SYLLABUS

Department of Education
FACULTY OF EDUCATION
MOHAN LAL SUKHADIA UNIVERSITY, UDAIPUR

SCHEME OF EXAMINATION AND COURSE OF STUDIES

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.)

TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME

YEAR 2017-18, 2018-19,

Department of Education
FACULTY OF EDUCATION
MOHAN LAL SUKHADIA UNIVERSITY, UDAIPUR
 INDEX (FIRST YEAR)
S.No. PARTICULARS PAGE NO.
1 INTRODUCTION 4
2 PROVISIONS FOR ADMISSION TO B.ED. COURSE 5
3 OBJECTIVES OF THE COURSE 5-6
4 MODES OF LEARNING ENGAGEMENT 7
5 COMPONENTS OF THE B.Ed. PROGRAMME 8-9
6 INTERNSHIP 10
7 THE CURRICULAR DETAILS FOR TWO YEARS 11
8 MLSU PAPER CODE (THE CURRICULAR DETAILS FOR TWO YEARS ) 12-14
8 EVALUATION 14-17
9 WORKING OUT THE RESULT FOR AWARDING DIVISION 17
PROPOSED SCHEME OF DISTRIBUTION OF TIME FOR THEORY &
10 18
PRACTICE TEACHING
11 DISTRIBUTION OF PERIODS FOR THEORY PROGRAMME 19
12 Course 1 - CHILDHOOD & GROWING UP 22-24
13 Course 2 -CONTEMPORARY INDIA AND EDUCATION 25-27
(INCLUDING GENDER, SCHOOL AND SOCIETY)
14 Course 3 -LEARNING AND TEACHING 28-31
15 Course 4 -LANGUAGE ACROSS THE CURRICULUM 32-33
(INCLUDING READING AND REFLECTING ON TEXTS)
16 Course 5 & 6 -PEDAGOGY OF A SCHOOL SUBJECT(FIRST SUBJECT & SECOND SUBJECT)-PART I 34
17 PEDAGOGY OF HINDI. 35-36
18 PEDAGOGY OF ENGLISH. 37-39
19 PEDAGOGY OF SANSKRIT. 40-42
20 PEDAGOGY OF URDU. 43-46
21 PEDAGOGY OF RAJASTHANI. 47-48
22 PEDAGOGY OF MATHEMATICS. 49-52
23 PEDAGOGY OF GENERAL SCIENCE. 53-55
24 PEDAGOGY OF PHYSICS. 56-58
25 PEDAGOGY OF CHEMISTRY. 59-61
26 PEDAGOGY OF BIOLOGY. 62-64
27 PEDAGOGY OF HOME SCIENCE. 65-66
28 PEDAGOGY OF COMPUTER SCIENCE 67-69
29 PEDAGOGY OF SOCIAL SCIENCE. 70-71
30 PEDAGOGY OF SOCIOLOGY 72-74
31 PEDAGOGY OF PSYCHOLOGY 75-77
32 PEDAGOGY OF HISTORY. 78-79
33 PEDAGOGY OF POLITICAL SCIENCE. 80-82
34 PEDAGOGY OF ECONOMICS. 83-85
35 PEDAGOGY OF GEOGRAPHY. 86-87
36 PEDAGOGY OF ART. 88-90
37 PEDAGOGY OF MUSIC. 91-92
38 PEDAGOGY OF BUSINESS STUDIES 93-94
39 PEDAGOGY OF FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING 95-97
40 Course 7 -DRAMA AND ART IN EDUCATION (Internal Assessment) 98-102
41 Course 8 -CRITICAL UNDERSTANDING OF ICT (Internal Assessment) 103-105
42 Course 9 - OPEN AIR SESSION / SUPW CAMP (Internal Assessment) 106
Course 10 -SCHOOL INTERNSHIP (PHASE – 1, 4 WEEKS) (Internal
43 107-108
Assessment)
44 Course: 11 EXTERNAL ASSESSMENT 109

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME -2-

 INDEX (SECOND YEAR)
S.No. PARTICULARS PAGE NO.
1 Course 12 & 13 -PEDAGOGY OF A SCHOOL SUBJECT (FIRST SUBJECT & SECOND 111
SUBJECT)-PART II

2 PEDAGOGY OF HINDI. 112-113

3 PEDAGOGY OF ENGLISH. 114-115
4 PEDAGOGY OF SANSKRIT. 116-117
5 PEDAGOGY OF URDU. 118-119
6 PEDAGOGY OF RAJASTHANI. 120-121
7 PEDAGOGY OF MATHEMATICS. 122-124
8 PEDAGOGY OF GENERAL SCIENCE. 125-126
9 PEDAGOGY OF PHYSICS. 127-128
10 PEDAGOGY OF CHEMISTRY. 129-130
11 PEDAGOGY OF BIOLOGY. 131-132
12 PEDAGOGY OF HOME SCIENCE. 133-134
13 PEDAGOGY OF COMPUTER SCIENCE 135-136
14 PEDAGOGY OF SOCIAL SCIENCE. 137-138
15 PEDAGOGY OF SOCIOLOGY 139-140
16 PEDAGOGY OF PSYCHOLOGY 141-142
17 PEDAGOGY OF HISTORY. 143-144
18 PEDAGOGY OF POLITICAL SCIENCE. 145-146
19 PEDAGOGY OF ECONOMICS. 147-148
20 PEDAGOGY OF GEOGRAPHY. 149-150
21 PEDAGOGY OF ART. 151-152
22 PEDAGOGY OF MUSIC. 153
23 PEDAGOGY OF BUSINESS STUDIES 154-155
24 PEDAGOGY OF FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING 156-157
25 Course 14 - KNOWLEDGE AND CURRICULUM 158-160
26 Course 15 - ASSESSMENT FOR LEARNING 161-164
Course 16 - EDUCATIONAL MANAGEMENT AND CREATING AN
27 165-166
INCLUSIVE SCHOOL
28 Course 17 - UNDERSTANDING THE SELF (INTERNAL ASSESSMENT) 167-169
Course 18 - OPTIONAL COURSE 170-171
1. VOCATIONAL/WORK EDUCATION
172-173
2. HEALTH AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION
29 174-175
3. PEACE EDUCATION
4. GUIDANCE AND COUNSELING 176-177
5. INNOVATIONS AND ACTION RESEARCH 178

30 Course 19 - SCHOOL INTERNSHIP (Phase- II, 16 WEEKS)(INTERNAL 179-181

ASSESSMENT)
Course 20 - EXTERNAL ASSESSMENT
31 182
ONE FINAL LESSON OF PEDAGOGY OF A SCHOOL SUBJECT

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME -3-

 Department of Education
FACULTY OF EDUCATION
MOHAN LAL SUKHADIA UNIVERSITY, UDAIPUR

Scheme of Examination and Course Of Studies

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.)

(B.Ed. Programme Is a Full Time, Two Academic Session Programme; Each Session will Be of 200
Days Duration)

1. INTRODUCTION

Destiny of a nation is shaped in its classrooms and teacher is the architect who shapes the destiny.
Enlightened, emancipated and empowered teachers lead communities and nations towards better and
higher quality of life. Teachers are expected to create soul cohesion, national integration and a learning
society. They disseminate knowledge and generate new knowledge. It is therefore, essential for nation to
have a sound and effective programme of teacher preparation. The teacher education programme needs to
be upgraded and updated periodically.
A perusal of the reports of various commissions and committees indicate the preference for longer
duration of B.Ed. programme. It was also endorsed by the Hon‟ble Supreme Court of India in its
judgement on 15 June 1993. “The Teachers Training Institutes are meant to teach children of
impressionable age and we cannot let loose on the innocent and unwary children the teachers who have
not received proper and adequate training. True, they will be required to pass the examination but that
may not be enough. Training for a certain minimum period in a properly organised training institute is
essential before a teacher may be duly launched.” The NCTE (2009) recommended a two year B.Ed.
programme. Earlier too in 1998 NCTE had recommended two year B.Ed. programme in its earlier
curriculum framework.The NCERT had prepared two year B.Ed. curriculum and launched it in the
Regional Institutes of Education in 1999.
Now, finally the NCTE has recommended that the B.Ed. course should be of two years duration and has
prepared a Curriculum Framework for Two year B.Ed. Programme.Mohanlal Sukhadiya University also
decided to introduce Two Year B.Ed. programme and has prepared a detailed course of study and
Scheme of Examination for two years B.Ed. course on the basis of guideline given in the curriculum
framework.The two year B.Ed. course will come in to force from the session commencing in 2015.

The two-year B.Ed. course aims at a complete development of the student-teacher; particularly in
knowledge and skills, in individual care of the learner and also in methods and evaluation designed to
facilitate learning. This course is divided into two parts. It aims at developing understanding of and
competence to render disciplinary knowledge into forms relevant to stage specific understanding of
teaching-learning situation apprehended through intensive study of conceptual explanations, observation
and analysis of live classroom situations as well as hand-on experiences and longer duration of field
experience. Interactive processes, i.e. group reflection, critical thinking and meaning-making have been
encouraged. The maturity of student-teachers has been kept in mind while visualizing modes of learning
engagements; instead of continuous teacher monitoring, greater autonomy to learners has been given in
accordance with andragogic principles of learning. The syllabus retains the essence of student-teachers
being active participants in the learning process and prepares the student-teachers for facing the emerging
challenges resulting out of globalization and its consequences.
Therefore it becomes essential for any nation to give necessary professional inputs to its teachers.
Mohanlal Sukhadia University pursues the following curriculum for its pre-service teacher training
programme. The curriculum also aims at developing language proficiency of the pupil teacher by
providing him opportunities through different activities and course content.
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME -4-
 2. PROVISIONS FOR ADMISSION TO B.ED. COURSE

Admission shall be made on merit on the basis of marks obtained in the qualifying examination and / or
in the entrance examination or any other selection process as per policy of the State Government/ and the
University.
Duration
The B.Ed. Programme shall be of duration of Two Academic Years, which can be completed in a
Maximum of Three Years from the date of the admission to the programme.
Working Days
1. There shall be at least Two Hundred (200) Working Days each year exclusive of the period of
examination and admission.
2. Institution shall work for a minimum of thirty six hours a week, during which physical presence in the
institution of all the teachers and student teachers is necessary to ensure their availability for advice,
guidance, dialogue and consultation as and when needed.
3. The minimum attendance of student-teachers shall have to be 75% for all course work and practicum,
and 90% for school internship.
Eligibility
Candidates with at least 50% Marks either in Bachelor Degree and /or in Master Degree in Science/
Social Sciences/ Humanities/Commerce, Bachelor in Engineering of Technology with specialization in
Science and Mathematics with 55% Marks or any other Qualification equivalent thereto, are eligible for
admission to the programme. Relaxation in case of reservation catagories will be as per state government
guidelines.
3. OBJECTIVES OF THE COURSE

The objectives of theory course prescribed for the B.Ed. course are as follows:

1. To develop competence to teach subjects of their specialization on the basis of an adequate theory of
learning and a sound knowledge of the subjects.
2. To develop interest, attitude and knowledge which will enable them (i) to foster the all-round growth
and development of children under their care and (ii) to provide guidance to individual pupils?
3. To develop an understanding of the aims and objectives of education in the Indian background and to
promote an awareness of the role of the school and the teacher in realizing these aims and ideals.
4. To develop an understanding of the close relationship between societies and the school, between life
and school work.
5. To become self-regulated learners; develop professional commitment and work as responsible
professionals.
6. To make them comfortable with content and pedagogical effective use and utilization of ICT.
7. To enable them to critically analyse the various evaluation tools to serve CCE.
8. To reflect on teacher practices and interface with societal resources
9. To build up professional consciousness.
The objectives of practical work prescribed for the B.Ed. course are as follows:
To develop the ability and self-confidence of pupil teachers to-
1. Be conscious of a sense of values and need for their inculcation in children through all available
means including ones own personal life.
2. Posses a high sense of professional responsibility.
3. Develop resourcefulness so as to make the best use of the situation available.
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME -5-
4. Appreciate and respect each child‟s individuality and treat him as an independent and
integrated personality.
5. Arouse their curiosity and interest and secure their active participation in the education process.
6. Develop capacity for thinking and working independently and guide them to that end.
7. Organize and manage the class for teaching learning.
8. Appreciate the dynamic nature of the classroom situation and teaching techniques.
9. Define objectives of particular lessons and plan for achievement.
10. Organize the prescribed subject matter in relation to the needs, interest and abilities of the pupils.
11. Use appropriate teaching methods and techniques.
12. Prepare and use appropriate teaching aids, use of the black board and other apparatus and materials
properly.
13. Convey ideas in clear and concise language and in a logical manner for effective learning.
14. Undertake action research.
15. Give proper opportunity to the gifted pupils and take proper care of the pupils with special need.
16. Correlate knowledge of the subjects being taught with other subjects and with real life situations as
and when possible.
17. Prepare and use assignment.
18. Evaluate pupil‟s progress.
19. Plan and organize co-curricular activities and participate in them.
20. Co-operate with the school teachers and administrators and learn to maintain school records and
registers.
Learning Outcomes
After the completion of the course the student teacher is expected to attain the following learning
outcomes:
1. Competence to teach effectively two school subjects at the secondary/senior secondary level.
2. Ability to translate broad objectives of secondary/senior secondary education in terms of specific
programmes and activities in relation to the curriculum.
3. Ability to understand children‟s needs, motives, growth pattern and the process of learning to
stimulate learning and creative thinking to foster growth and development.
4. Ability to use (a) individualized instruction and (b) dynamic methods in large classes.
5. Ability to examine pupil‟s progress and effectiveness of their own teaching through the use of proper
evaluation techniques.
6. Use of Equipment for diagnosing pupil‟s difficulties and deficiencies in achievement and dealing with
them through remedial work.
7. Readiness to spot talented and gifted children and capacity to meet their needs.
8. Ability to cater to the need of children with special needs.
9. Ability to organize various school programmes, activities for pupils.
10. Ability to provide guidance in educational, personal and vocational matters.
11. Ability to asses the all round development of pupils and to maintain a cumulative record.
12. Development of certain practical skills such as:
(a) Black board work
(b) Preparing improvised apparatus
(c) Preparing teaching aids
13. Developing professional competence.
14. Readiness to participate in activities of professional organizations.

4. MODES OF LEARNING ENGAGEMENT

Overall Intention of Modes of Learning Engagement

1. The Curriculum is so designed that the student-teachers internalise the nature of

education and pedagogic process through enriched experiences.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME -6-

2. The kinds of learning engagement suggested will contribute to reduction of the gap between
theory and practice by dovetailing both appropriately.
3. The Curriculum emphasises the use of varied modes of learning engagement in accordance with the
requirements.
4. Interactive processes wherein group reflection, critical thinking and meaning making will be
encouraged.
5. In this respect, critical theory, critical pedagogy and critical thinking become very crucial
theoretical inputs and are embedded implicitly in various courses.
6. While visualising modes of learning engagement, the nature of student teachers who are
adults has been kept in mind. Instead of continuous teacher monitoring greater autonomy to learners
has been recommended which is more relevant and in accordance with the andragogic principles of
learning.
7. Multiple learning engagements visualised being more active/interactive, the course work is clearly not
meant to be burdensome and „memorybased‟, but challenging and engaging.

Some Specific Modes of Learning Engagement Envisaged

1. Overarching lectures-cum-discussion
2. Use of narratives based on research and documentation
3. Project reviews
4. Case studies
5. Use of video-clips and transcripts of classroom teaching
6. Success stories/ innovations
7. Observation in schools and other field sites
8. Recording of observations and experiences
9. Interviews with school personnel
10. Panel of group discussion on issues
11. Individual projects
12. Journal writing
13. Using library and ICT resources.

These are suggestive modes of learning engagement. Teacher educators will have to create, design and
evolve different modes of learning engagement based on the course and suited to the needs of student
teachers.
Enhancement of Learning through School-based Experiences
Most courses require school experience for various purposes. Some significant aspects of these
experiences are outlined:
1. School visits and observations spread over the years, including
a) Observation visits
b) School attachment
c) Longer duration attachment, along with mentoring
2. School as a site for practical learning linked with theory
3. Single school visit for carrying out tasks related to more than one course
4. Exposure to variety of schools in order to understand larger systemic issues
5. School-based experience to learn not only classroom pedagogy, but also learning to function as a
teacher in the school environment.

5. COMPONENTS OF THE B.Ed. PROGRAMME

The programme shall comprise three broad curricular areas – Perspectives in Education, Curriculum and
Pedagogic Studies and Engagement with the Field. The courses under each of these areas are as follows:
I. Perspectives in Education

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME -7-

 Perspectives in Education include courses in the study of childhood, child development and
adolescence, contemporary India and education, theoretical foundations of knowledge and
curriculum, teaching and learning, gender in the context of school and society, and inclusive
education. The following are the five courses to be transacted in the two year period, under the
curricular area of Perspectives in Education:
Course 1 Childhood and Growing Up
Course 2 Contemporary India and Education (Including Gender, School and Society)
Course 3 Learning and Teaching
Course 13 Knowledge and Curriculum
Course 15 Educational Management and Creating an Inclusive School
The course on „Childhood and Growing up‟ shall enable student-teachers to engage with studies on
Indian society and education, acquire conceptual tools of sociological analysis and hands-on
experience of engaging with diverse communities, children and schools. The course on
„Contemporary India and Education‟ shall develop a conceptual understanding about issues of
diversity, inequality and marginalization in Indian society and the implications for education, with
analyses of significant policy debates in Indian education. The course on „Teaching and Learning‟
will focus on aspects of social and emotional development; self and identity, and cognition and
learning. „Knowledge and Curriculum‟ shall address the theoretical foundations of school
knowledge from historical, philosophical and sociological perspectives, with critical analysis of
curricular aims and contexts, and the relationship between curriculum, policy and learning. The
course on „Creating an Inclusive School‟ shall develop an understanding of the cultures, policies
and practices that need to be addressed in order to create an inclusive school.
II. Curriculum and Pedagogic Studies
Curriculum and Pedagogic Studies offers a study of the nature of disciplines, critical understanding
of the school curriculum; pedagogy as the integration of knowledge about the learner, the discipline
and the societal context of learning, and research relating to different aspects of young children‟s
learning. The design of the programme would enable students to specialize in two subject areas, at
secondary level of school. The courses under the curricular area of „Curriculum and Pedagogic
Studies‟ for the two year period include:
Course 4 Language across the Curriculum (Including Reading and Reflecting on Texts)
Course 5 Pedagogy of a School Subject (Including Understanding Disciplines and Subjects First)–Part I
Course 6 Pedagogy of a School Subjec(Including Understanding Disciplines and Subjects Second)–Part I
Course 11 Pedagogy of a School Subject (First) - Part II
Course 12 Pedagogy of a School Subject (Second) - Part II
Course 14 Assessment for Learning
Course 17 Optional Course
I. Vocational/Work Education
II. Health and Physical Education
III. Peace Education
IV. Guidance and Counseling
V. Innovations and Action research
These courses shall aim to develop in students an understanding of the curriculum, linking school
knowledge with community life. A variety of investigative projects, that link with curricular area III
given below, shall be included to reconstruct concepts from subject knowledge though appropriate
pedagogic processes that communicates meaningfully with children.
Optional courses will be offered in areas such as Vocational/Work Education, Health and Physical
Education, Peace Education, Guidance and Counselling,
To opt for the pedagogy of a school subject, the student teacher shall have to offer any two teaching
subjects out of the following papers, which he/she has studied at Graduation /P.G. level for at least two
years:

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME -8-

The pedagogy of a school subject:

1- Pedagogy of Hindi.
2- Pedagogy of English.
3- Pedagogy of Sanskrit.
4- Pedagogy of Urdu.
5- Pedagogy of Rajasthani.
6- Pedagogy of Mathematics.
7- Pedagogy of General Science.
8- Pedagogy of Physics.
9- Pedagogy of Chemistry.
10- Pedagogy of Biology.
11- Pedagogy of Home Science.
12- Pedagogy of Computer Science
13- Pedagogy of Social Science.
14- Pedagogy of Sociology
15- Pedagogy of Psychology
16- Pedagogy of History.
17- Pedagogy of Political Science.
18- Pedagogy of Economics.
19- Pedagogy of Geography.
20- Pedagogy of Art.
21- Pedagogy of Music.
22- Pedagogy of Business Studies
23- Pedagogy of Financial Accounting
III. Engagement with the Field –( the Self, the Child, Community and School)
This curricular area would have three components –
1. Tasks and Assignments that run through all the courses as indicated in the year wise distribution
of the syllabus
2.School Internship
3.Courses on Enhancing Professional Capacities (EPC- Internal assessment)
Course 7: Drama and Art in Education
Course 8: Critical Understanding of ICT
Course 9: Open Air Session / SUPW Camp
Course 16: Understanding the Self

6. INTERNSHIP
Apart from teaching practice experience in school, the student- teacher should function as a regular
teacher in a school (i.e. taking attendance, organizing and participating in all the school activities, like
assembly, games, Balsabha, cultural and literacy programmes, examination papers, maintenance of
school record etc.)
The trainee-teacher should prepare a report about the school experience with specific reference to their
chosen areas of specialization.
Internship may also be utilized for completing the application based assignment of the theory papers.
Having gained some experience with the child, the community and schools in Year 1, the second year
would offer intensive engagement with the school in the form of School Internship. During the first year,

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME -9-

to support better understanding of schools and in preparation of Internship, teacher education institutes
shall make provisions for visits to innovative centres of pedagogy and learning - innovative schools,
educational resource centres, etc.
During the Internship, a student-teacher shall work as a regular teacher and participate in all the school
activities, including planning, teaching and assessment, interacting with school teachers, community
members and children. Before teaching in a classroom, the student-teachers will observe the school and
its classrooms for a week, to understand the school in totality, its philosophy and aims, organisation and
management; the life of a teacher; needs of the physical, mental, emotional development of children;
aspects of curriculum and its transaction; quality, transaction, and assessment of teaching–learning.
School Internship shall be designed to lead to the development of a broad repertoire of perspectives,
professional capacities, teacher dispositions, sensibilities and skills. Student teachers shall be equipped to
cater to diverse needs of learners in schools.They should be provided opportunities to teach in
government/private schools with systematic supervisory support and feedback from faculty. Internship in
schools is to be done for a minimum duration of 16 weeks. This should include an initial phase of one
week for observing a regular classroom with a regular teacher and would also include peer observations,
teacher observations and observations of interns‟ lessons by faculty. It is important that the student-
teachers consolidate and reflect on their teaching experience during and after the school internship.
Therefore, along with writing reflective journals during the internship programme, there shall be space
for extended discussions and presentations on different aspects of the teaching experience after the
internship.
For each student-teacher, internship should be conducted in one school for the entire 16 weeks.
7. THE CURRICULAR DETAILS FOR TWO YEARS
ANNUAL DISTRIBUTION OF THE COURSES
I-Year
Course No. Paper Code Nomenclature Scheme
Course 1 9101 Childhood and Growing Up 100 marks (80+20)
Contemporary India and Education
Course 2 9102 100 marks (80+20)
(Including Gender, School and Society)
Course 3 9103 Learning and Teaching 100 marks (80+20)
Language across the Curriculum (Including Reading and
Course 4 9104 100 marks (80+20)
Reflecting on Texts)
Pedagogy of a School Subject (Including Understanding
Course 5 9105-9127 100 Marks (80+20)
Disciplines and Subjects First) –Part I
Pedagogy of a School Subject (Including Understanding
Course 6 9105-9127 100 Marks (80+20)
Disciplines and Subjects Second) –Part I
Drama and Art in Education
Course 7 9128 50 marks
Internal assessment
100 marks
Course 8 9129 Critical Understanding of ICT (50 Internal & 50
Internal, External assessment External)
Open Air Session / SUPW Camp
Course 9 9130 50 marks
Internal assessment
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 10 -
 School Internship (Phase-I, 4 Weeks)
Course 10 9131 Internal assessment 200 marks
(Pre-Practice Teaching, Practice Teaching)
Engagement with the Field: Tasks and Assignments for Courses 5 & 6
External Assessment
Course 11 9132 100 marks
One Lesson Of Pedagogy of a School Subject
1100 marks
Total
II-Year
Course No. Paper Code Nomenclature Scheme
Course 12 9201-9223 Pedagogy of a School Subject (First) – Part II 50 marks (40+10)
Course 13 9201-9223 Pedagogy of a School Subject (Second) – Part II 50 marks (40+10)
Course 14 9224 Knowledge and Curriculum 100 marks (80+20)
Course 15 9225 Assessment for Learning 100 marks (80+20)
Educational Management and Creating an Inclusive
Course 16 9226 100 marks (80+20)
School
Course 17 9227 Understanding the Self 50 marks
Internal assessment
Optional Course* (Any one)
I. Vocational/Work Education
II. Health and Physical Education
Course 18 9228 50 marks (40+10)
III. Peace Education
IV. Guidance and Counseling
V. Innovations and Action research
School Internship (Phase-II, 16 Weeks)
Internal assessment
Course 19 9229 250 marks
Engagement with the Field: Tasks and
Assignments for Courses 12 & 13
Course 20 9230 External Assessment 150 marks
Viva-Voce for School Internship Subject
900 Marks
Total
8. MLSU PAPER CODE (THE CURRICULAR DETAILS FOR TWO YEARS )
I-Year
Course No. Paper Code Nomenclature Scheme
Course 1 9101 Childhood and Growing Up 100 marks (80+20)
Contemporary India and Education
Course 2 9102 100 marks (80+20)
(Including Gender, School and Society)
Course 3 9103 Learning and Teaching 100 marks (80+20)
Language across the Curriculum (Including Reading
Course 4 9104 100 marks (80+20)
and Reflecting on Texts)
Pedagogy of a School Subject (Including Understanding
Course 5 9105-9127 100 Marks (80+20)
Disciplines and Subjects First) –Part I
Pedagogy of a School Subject (Including Understanding
Course 6 9105-9127 100 Marks (80+20)
Disciplines and Subjects Second) –Part I
9105 1- Pedagogy of Hindi
Course 5 9106 2- Pedagogy of English
&6
9107 3- Pedagogy of Sanskrit

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 11 -

 9108 4- Pedagogy of Urdu
9109 5- Pedagogy of Rajasthani
9110 6- Pedagogy of Mathematics
9111 7- Pedagogy of General Science
9112 8- Pedagogy of Physics
9113 9- Pedagogy of Chemistry
9114 10- Pedagogy of Biology
9115 11- Pedagogy of Home Science
9116 12- Pedagogy of Computer Science
9117 13- Pedagogy of Social Science
9118 14- Pedagogy of Sociology
9119 15- Pedagogy of Psychology
9120 16- Pedagogy of History
9121 17- Pedagogy of Political Science
9122 18- Pedagogy of Economics
9123 19- Pedagogy of Geography
9124
20- Pedagogy of Art
9125
21- Pedagogy of Music
9126
22- Pedagogy of Business Studies
9127
23- Pedagogy of Financial Accounting
Drama and Art in Education
Course 7 9128 50 marks
Internal assessment
100 marks
Course 8 9129 Critical Understanding of ICT (50 Internal & 50
Internal, External assessment External)
Open Air Session / SUPW Camp
Course 9 9130 50 marks
Internal assessment
School Internship (Phase-I, 4 Weeks)
Course 10 9131 Internal assessment 200 marks
(Pre-Practice Teaching, Practice Teaching)
Engagement with the Field: Tasks and Assignments for Courses 5 & 6
External Assessment
Course 11 9132 100 marks
One Lesson Of Pedagogy of a School Subject
Total 1100 marks

II-Year
Course No. Paper Code Nomenclature Scheme
Course 12 9201-9223 Pedagogy of a School Subject (First) – Part II 50 marks (40+10)

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 12 -

Course 13 9201-9223 Pedagogy of a School Subject (Second) – Part II 50 marks (40+10)
9201 1- Pedagogy of Hindi
9202 2- Pedagogy of English
9203 3- Pedagogy of Sanskrit
9204 4- Pedagogy of Urdu
9205 5- Pedagogy of Rajasthani
9206 6- Pedagogy of Mathematics
9207 7- Pedagogy of General Science
9208 8- Pedagogy of Physics
9209 9- Pedagogy of Chemistry
9210 10- Pedagogy of Biology
9211 11- Pedagogy of Home Science
Course 12 9212 12- Pedagogy of Computer Science
&13
9213 13- Pedagogy of Social Science
9214 14- Pedagogy of Sociology
9215 15- Pedagogy of Psychology
9216 16- Pedagogy of History
9217 17- Pedagogy of Political Science
9218 18- Pedagogy of Economics
9219 19- Pedagogy of Geography
9220
20- Pedagogy of Art
9221
21- Pedagogy of Music
9222
22- Pedagogy of Business Studies
9223
23- Pedagogy of Financial Accounting
Course 14 9224 Knowledge and Curriculum 100 marks (80+20)
Course 15 9225 Assessment for Learning 100 marks (80+20)
Educational Management and Creating an Inclusive
Course 16 9226 100 marks (80+20)
School
Understanding the Self
Course 17 9227 50 marks
Internal assessment
Optional Course* (Any one)
I. Vocational/Work Education
II. Health and Physical Education
Course 18 9228 50 marks (40+10)
III. Peace Education
IV. Guidance and Counseling
V. Innovations and Action research

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 13 -

 School Internship (Phase-II, 16 Weeks)
Course 19 9229 Internal assessment 250 marks
Engagement with the Field: Tasks and Assignments for Courses 11 & 12
External Assessment
Course 20 9230 150 marks
Viva-Voce for School Internship

Total 900 marks

9. EVALUATION
EVALUATION OF THEORY PAPERS
Some theory papers will carry a weightage of 100 marks, out of which 80 marks will be for external
University Examination and 20 marks will be for internal sessional work. Out of 20 marks - 10 marks
will be for sessional and 10 marks will be for mid-term test. In some of the papers carrying a weightage
of 50 marks, 40 marks will be for external University Examination and 10 marks will be for internal
sessional work. Out of 10 marks - 5 marks will be for sessional and 5 marks will be for mid-term test.
The final external examination paper for 80 marks will be of three hour’s duration and the paper
for 40 marks will be of two hour’s duration.
1. Each question paper (80 MARKS) will have three sections- Section A will contain 10 very short answer
type questions and the candidate will be required to attempt the entire ten questions. Each question
will carry two marks. Section-B will contain 10 short answer type questions out of which a candidate
is required to attempt any 5 questions (one question per unit to be attempted out of two questions
per unit). Each question will carry 6 marks. Section-C will have 5 questions and a candidate will be
required to attempt any three questions. There will be 10 marks for each question.
2. Each question paper (40 MARKS) will have three sections- Section A will contain 4 very short answer
type questions and the candidate will be required to attempt all four questions. Each question will
carry 2 marks. Section-B will contain 3 short answer type questions out of which a candidate is
required to attempt any 2 questions. Each question will carry 6 marks. Section-C will have 3
questions with a choice of attempting any 2 questions. Essay type questions will carry 10 marks each.
3. Very short answer type questions would aim at testing of critical thinking, knowledge of concepts,
facts, definitions, laws, principles, generalization etc. and also understanding of principles and
concepts.
4. Short answer type questions would aim at testing knowledge, definitions, laws, generalization etc. and
also understanding of concepts.
5. Essay type questions are to aim at testing the abilities of critical thinking and application of principles
taught in theory.
Format of Eighty (80) marks question paper
Question Type No. of Question Total No. of No. of Questions to Total
per Unit Question be Attempted Marks
2 per unit
Very short question type 10 10 10x2=20

5
short question type 2 per unit 10 (one question per unit 5x6=30
to be attempted)
1 per unit
Long question type 5 3 3x10=30

Format of Forty (40) marks question paper

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 14 -
 Question Type No. of Question Total No. of No. of Questions to Total
per Unit Question be Attempted Marks

Very short question type 1/2 per unit 4 4 4x2=8

short question type 1 per unit 3 2 2x6=12

Long question type 1 per unit 3 2x10=20

2

EVALUATION FOR INTERNSHIP PROGRAMME

Evaluation for internship programme will consist of two parts – Internal Evaluation &
External Evaluation, the details of which are as follows:

Practical Work in B.Ed. 1st Year

I- Pre-Practice Teaching

a) Practicing Teaching Skill (Minimum 05) 20

b) T.L.M. Workshop in Each Subject (5+5) 10

c) Simulated Teaching (5 Lesson in each subject) (5+5) 10

d) Blue Print & Test Preparation in Both Subject (5+5) 10

Total : 50

II. Practice Teaching

(A) Peer group lesson observation 10

Ordinary + Criticism – 5 lesson in each round (5+5)

(B) Practice Teaching two round one in each subject

In each subject 13 lesson + 1 test + 1criticism

Lessons- (50 + 50) = 100

Test - (10 + 10) = 20
Criticism- (10 + 10) = 20
Total = 150

III. External Practical Exam

Presentation in one subject - 100 Marks

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 15 -

 Grand Total = 300 Marks

INTERNAL EVALUATION (Course-19)

[II Year]
Teaching in Schools (Record of date and period wise teaching plan to be
1. 100
maintained for it.
2. Individual Activities and File Record 80
3. Group Activities and File Record 30
4. Teaching Aid (4) 20
5. Community Engagement and Report writing 20
Total Marks 250
EXTERNAL EVALUATION
[II Year]
1. Course -20 Viva-Voce for Internship Programme 150
Total Marks 400

EXTERNAL EVALUATION
[I YEAR]
1. The weightage of final lesson will be 100 marks. Final lesson will be conducted at the end of first
academic year i.e. after the completion of 1st phase of internship.
2. During the final practical examination each candidate will have to teach one Lesson in any one of the
two teaching subjects. However, he shall have to prepare lesson plan in both the teaching subjects and
should be prepared to deliver lesson in both the subjects if required.
3. The Board of examiners for external examination will consist of:
a) The Principle of the college concerned.
b) One senior member of the college.
c) Two external examiners appointed by the university.
Note: - The selection of the faculty member and two examiners be such that, as for as possible, Board
of Examiners represent all the three faculties-Humanities, Languages and Science.
EXTERNAL EVALUATION
[II YEAR]
1. The weightage of external evaluation (Viva-voce for 2nd phase) of internship will be 150 marks.
2. During the Viva voce, student will present all the records of the work done during the internship (2 nd
phase) programme viz. teaching in school, individual and group activities.
3. Power point presentation (Including Videos of various activities) of the work done by the students
during the second phase of internship is desirable at the time of viva-voce.
4. The Board of examiners for Viva-voce will consist of:
a) The Principle of the college concerned.
b) One senior member of the college (Preferably Internship Incharge)
c) One external examiner appointed by the university.
Evaluation of Open Air/SUPW Camp
(Internal Evaluation)

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 16 -

 S. No. Activity Marks
1. Participation in preparation of Camp 5
2. Presentation of report of survey/ creative work 20
3. Participation in Community Awareness Programme 15
4. Participation in organizational process/community
10
living/cultural and aesthetic activities
Total Marks
50

10. WORKING OUT THE RESULT FOR AWARDING

DIVISION
1. A candidate in order to be declared successful at the B.Ed. examination shall be required to pass
separately in Theory and Practice of teaching.

2. For a pass in Theory a candidate shall be required to obtain at least-(a) 30% marks in each theory
paper the (b) 36% marks in the aggregate of all the theory papers.

3. For a pass in Practice of Teaching a candidate shall be required to pass separately in the internal &
external examinations and obtain at lest 40 marks in each.

4. University theory examination will be conducted at the end of each academic year and the final
division will be awarded on the basis of aggregrate marks of the two academic years.

5. Practical examination (Final lesson) will be conducted at the end of the second academic session.

6. The successful candidates will be classified in three divisions and shall be assigned divisions
separately in theory and practice of teaching as follows:

Division Theory Practice of teaching

I 60% 60%
II 48% 48%
III 36% 36%

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 17 -

 11. PROPOSED SCHEME OF DISTRIBUTION OF TIME FOR THEORY &
PRACTICE TEACHING
DAYS DISTRIBUTION

FIRST YEAR

THEORY – 165 DAYS

PRACTICALS – 35 DAYS

1. SCHOOL BASED OBSERVATION AND ENGAGEMENT WITH FIELD - 6 DAYS

2. SCHOOL INTERNSHIP (Phase-I, 4 Weeks) -24 DAYS

(12- LESSON IN EACH SUB.)
3. OPEN AIR SESSION/ SUPW CAMP -5 DAYS

SECOND YEAR

THEORY – 104 DAYS

PRACTICALS – 96 DAYS

1. SCHOOL OBSERVATION - 6 DAYS

2. SCHOOL INTERNSHIP (Phase-II, 16 Weeks) -90 DAYS

EXAMINATION SHEDULE

FIRST YAER - THEORY EXAM

EXTERNAL ASSESSMEN (One Lesson of Pedagogy of a School Subject)
SECOND YEAR - THEORY EXAM
EXTERNAL ASSESSMEN (Viva – Voce for Internship Programme)
TIME-SCHEDULE OF A WORKING DAY

Total Allocation per day - 6 Hours

Prayer - 15 Minutes
Lunch - 30 Minutes
Periods 7X45 Minutes - 315 Minutes
Total - 360 Minutes (6) Hours

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 18 -

 12. DISTRIBUTION OF PERIODS FOR THEORY PROGRAMME
FIRST YAER
(1) Per day – 7 period, Total days (165)
(2) Total periods-165x7=1155 period

1. Foundation Courses (Having 100 Marks) - 5 periods per week for each
Total Weeks - 27
Total Periods - 4 x 6 x 27 = 648 Periods
(Having 50 Marks) - 3 periods per week for each
Total Weeks - 27
Total Periods - 2 x 3 x 27 = 162 Periods

2. Pedagogy Courses (Two Sub.) - 4 Periods per week for each paper
Total Weeks - 27
Total Periods - 2 x 4 x 27 = 216
3. Library Periods 1 Periods per week - 1 x 27 = 27
4. Tutorials & Society /House meetings one Periods per week 2 Periods per week
- 2 x 27 = 54
5. Cultural Activities 2 Periods per week - 1 x 27 = 27
6. Community,Yoga & Other Activities - 21
Total Periods = 1155
SECOND YEAR
(1) Per day – 7 period, Total days (104)

(2) Total periods-104 x 7 = 728 period

1. Foundation Courses (Having 100 Marks) - 6 periods per week for each paper
Total Weeks - 17
Total Periods - 3 x 6 x 17 = 306
2. Pedagogy Courses & Foundation Courses (Having 50 Marks)
- 4 Periods per week for each paper
Total Weeks - 17
Total Periods - 4 x 4 x 17 = 272
3 .Library Periods 2 Periods per week - 2 x 17 = 34
4. Tutorials 2 Periods per week - 2 x 17 = 34
5. Cultural Activities 2 Periods per week - 2 x 17 = 34
6. Society /House meetings one Periods per week - 1 x 17 = 17
7. Community & Yoga - 31
Total Periods = 728

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 19 -

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 20 -
 FIRST YEAR
Course 1 Childhood and Growing Up

Contemporary India and Education

Course 2
(including Gender, School and Society)

Course 3 Learning and Teaching

Language across the Curriculum

Course 4
(including Reading and Reflecting on Texts)

Pedagogy of a School Subject (First) –Part I

Course 5
(including Understanding Disciplines and Subjects)

Pedagogy of a School Subject (Second) –Part I

Course 6
(including Understanding Disciplines and Subjects)

Drama and Art in Education

Course 7
Internal assessment

Critical Understanding of ICT

Course 8
Internal assessment

Open Air Session / SUPW Camp

Course 9
Internal assessment

School Internship (phase – 1, 4 Weeks)

Course 10 Internal assessment
Engagement with the Field: Tasks and Assignments for Courses 5 & 6
External Assessment
Course 11
One Lesson Of Pedagogy of a School Subject

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 21 -

 PAPER CODE-9101
Course 1 - CHILDHOOD & GROWING UP
Objectives–After completion of the course the student teachers will be able to:-
1. Understand the Developmental characteristics of Childhood and adolescence.
2. Learn the Theories of development.
3. Understand Educational provisions of children at different stages of development.
4. Understand the Concepts and Components of Personality.
5. Know the Techniques of Personality Assessment.
6. Understand the Psycho-Analytic Theory of personality.
7. Understand the Concept and Importance of Mental Health and role of Teacher in Promoting Mental
Health.
8. Acquire the Concept of Individual Variation and their Classroom Implications.
9. Understand nature and Characteristics of Intelligence.
10. Understand the Theories of Intelligence.
11. Acquire the skill of Measurement of Intelligence.
12. Understand concept and assessment of creativity and ways of fostering it.

COURSE CONTENT
UNIT- I Basic Concepts of Child Development
1. Meaning, Scope and Importance of studying Child Development.
2. Methods of study of Children- Case Study, Observation and Field Studies.
3. Basic Concepts in Child Development-Growth V/S Development, Maturation V/S Learning, Heredity
vs. Environment (Family, Neighborhood, School and Community)
4. Principles of Growth and Development
5. Stages of Development.

UNIT- II Childhood
1. Characteristics of Childhood
2. Physical, Cognitive, social, Emotional and Moral development during childhood.
3. Factors affecting various developments during childhood.
4. Nature of Education during Childhood.
5. Theories of development – Piaget (cognitive), Erikson (Psychosocial).

UNIT- III Adolescence

1. Characteristics of adolescence development- Physical, Cognitive, Social and Emotional.
2. Impact of Urbanization, Economic, Social and Political changes on adolescence.
3. issues in adolescence and role of teacher -
- Identity crisis and conflicts
- Idealism and Hero worship
- sexual abuse and harassment
- Child Labour
- Changing Family Structures
- Peer Pressures
- Pressure of Competition
- Juvenile Delinquency
4. Guidance and Counseling of adolescents.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 22 -

UNIT- IV Personality and Mental Health
1. Personality Concept, types and Components of Personality.
2. Psychoanalytic theory of Personality by Freud.
3. Factors affecting Personality development.
4. Assessment of Personality- Projective and Non-Projective Techniques.
5. Mental Health-
a) Concept and Importance
b) Types of Conflicts and Defense Mechanisms
c) Role of Teacher in Promoting Mental Health

UNIT - V Individual Variations

1. Concept of Variation and Classroom,Implication with reference to Intelligence, Aptitude, Creativity.
2. Intelligence, Nature and Characteristics
3. Theories of Intelligence
a) J.P. Guilford Structure of Intellect
b) Howard Gardener‟s Theory of Multiple Intelligence.
c) Daniel Goleman‟s Model of Emotional Intelligence.
4. Measurement of Intelligence and Types of Intelligence Tests.
5. Creativity: Concept, assessment and role of teacher in fostering creativity.

SESSIONAL WORK
Attempt any two (One from each section)
Section -A
1. Administration, Scoring, Interpretation of any one Intelligence test.
2. Administration, Scoring, Interpretation of any one Personality test.
3. Administration, Scoring, Interpretation of any one Test of Creativity.
Section –B
1. Preparation of case history of a child of any age group (Childhood to adolescence) from different Socio
economic and cultural background in the context of family, school, neighborhood and community.
2. Study of any one psychosocial issues related to adolescence (Child labour, Juvenile Delinquency,
Pressure of Competition).
3. Study of any one issue represented and highlighted by media (Sexual abuse and harassment, child
labour etc).

REFERENCES
1. Ambron S.R (1981) Child Development, Holt Rinehart & Winston, New york.
2. Atkinson, Richard C. etal (1983) Introduction to Psychology Harcourt Brace Johanovich inc, New
york. Benjafield, J.G (1992) Cognition, Prentice hall, Englewood Cliffs.
3. Bains, Narinder Singh (2008). Shiksha Manovigyan Avam Vikas Ku Avastha, Jaipur : Jain
Prakashan.
4. Bhatia, K.K. (2005). Shiksha Manovigyan ke Aadharm Ludhiana : Kalyani Publishers.
5. Blackie, J.How Children Learn in J.C Stone an F.W. Schneider (eds) (1971) Readings in the
Foundations of Education vol, II Cromwell : New york.
6. Brown J.S.Collins A and Dugrid P (1989) Situated Cognition and the Culture of Learning,
Educational Researcher, 32- 42
7. Chouhan, R.S. (2007). Adhigam avam Vikas Ka Manovigyan, Jaipur : Aggresen Shiksha Prakashan
8. Dweck, C. (2006). Mindset: The new Psychology of Success. Random House LLC.
9. Flavell, J.H (1963)The Developmental Psychology of Jean Piaget, Van Nostrand: New york
10. Gardner, H (1999) The Disciplined Mind: what all Students should Understand . New york: Simon
and Schuster.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 23 -

11. Gardner, Howard (1989) Frames of Mind The Theory of Multiple Intelligence, Basic Books, New
york
12. Gardner, Howard (1989) the Unschooled Mind Basic books. New york.
13. Hurlock, E.B (1964) Child Development , Mcgraw Hill Book co.New york, Jeanne Ellis ormrod
Educational Psychology, Developing learners, fourth Edition
14. Lindgn, H.C (1980) Educational Psychology in the Classroom Oxford University press, New york.
15. Luria, A.R(1976) Cognitive Development: Its Cultural and Social Foundations. Howard University
Press Cambridge mass.
16. Mangal, Dr. S.K, Mangal Shubhra, 2005, Child Development, Arya Book Depot New Delhi.
17. Mishra Mithlesh, Ahlawat Meena (2008), Jaipur : Neelkanth Pustak Mandir.
18. Mishra, Mahindra Kumar (2008). Vikasatmak Manovigyan, Jaipur : University Book House.
19. Mishra, Manju. (2008). Adhigamkarta Ka Vikas avam Shikshan Adhigam Prakirya, Jaipur :
University Book House.
20. Mishra. R.C. 2010, Child Psychology. A.P.H Publishing Corporation, New Delhi.
21. Pareek, Mathureshwar, 2002, Child Development and Family Relationship, Research Publication,
Jaipur.
22. Patricia A. Alexander, Phillp H.Winnie (2006) Handbook of Educational Psychology.
23. Phillpee Aives (1962) Centuries of childhood: A Sociology of Family Life, Knops, New york.
24. Piaget, J. (1997) Development and Learning. in M gauvarin & M. Cole (Eds.) readings on the
development of children. New York. WH freeman & company
25. Piaget,J,Inhelder,B(1969).Psychology of Child : New York.
26. Rajoria, Arun Kumar, Arora, Preeti (2007). Adhigamkarta Ka Vikas Avam Shikshan Adhigam
Prakirya. Jaipur : Kavita Prakashan.
27. Rogers, C.R (1983) Freedom to Learn (revised edition) Columbus, OH: Merrill.
28. Rosser, Rosemary A (1993) Cogntive Development Psychological and Biological Perspective, Allyn
and Bacon, USA.
29. Saini, Babu Lal (2007). Shiksha Manovigyan, Jaipur : Swati Publication.
30. Santrok J.W (1999) Lifespan Development (7th edition) Boston: MC Graw Hill college sibia A
(2006) life at Mirambika, NCERT, New Delhi.
31. Sarangpani M.Padma (2003) Constructing School Knowledge an Ethnography of Learning in an
Indian Village, sage Publication.
32. Saraswati T. S. (1999) Adult-Child Continuity in India: in Adolescence a Myth or an Emerging
Reality? in T.S. Saraswati 9Ed) culture, socialization and human development : theory research and
applications in india. New Delhi Sage.
33. Sharma, R.K, Sharma, H.S, Tiwari, Aryana, 2006, Psychological Foundation of Child development,
Radha Prakashan Mandir, Agra.
34. Shrivasha, D.N. Verma, Dr.Preeti 2010, Modern Experimental Psychology and Testing, Shri Vinod
Pustak Mandir, Agra.
35. Shrivastava, D.N, Verma Preeti 2007, Child Psychology: Child Development Vinod Pustak Mandir,
Agra.
36. Singh, Arun Kumar (1997). Uchattar Samanya Manovigyan, Delhi : Motilal Banarisidas.
37. Srivastava A.K (1998) Child Development: The Indian Perspective, NCERT, New Delhi.
38. Sturt Mary, Oakden E.C (1999) Modern Psychology and Education, Routledge.
39. Thorndike Edward L (2007) Educational Psychology, Published by READ books.
40. Verma, Rampal Singh. Adhigam avam Vikas Ke Mano-Samajik Adha, Agra : Vinod Pustak Mandir.
41. Vygotsky, L.S (1978).Mind in Society, Harvard university Press: Cambridge Chapter 6.
42. Wertsch, J.V (1986) Vygotsky and the Social Formation of Mind, Harvard University press.
43. Wolfolk, (1987) Educational Psychology, Prentice Hall, Eaglewood Cliff.
44. Woolfolk, A.E (2009) Educational Psychology (11th Edition) (My Education Lab series) Prentice
Hall.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 24 -

 PAPER CODE-9102
Course 2- CONTEMPORARY INDIA & EDUCATION
(Including Gender, School & Society)
Objectives: Student teachers will be able to :-
1. Understand the diversified nature of Indian Society.
2. Understand the Marginalization and Inequality present in Indian Society.
3. Understand the Challenges and implications of Social diversity and inequality in school education.
4. Understand the role of Education in grooming children with respect to diversity.
5. Understand the Constitutional promises of freedom Social justice, equality and fraternity.
6. Critically examine the reflection of constitutional values in educational system.
7. Understand the policies related to education in pre and post independent india.
8. Critically examine the implementation of policies on education.
9. Understand the implications of Globalization, Privatization and Liberalization in education. 10
develop gender sensitivity and understand the gender discrimination in family, school and
society.
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT- I Indian Society & Education
1. Meaning, Nature & purpose of Education:
According to different thinkers i.e, Gandhi, Tagore, Aurobindo, Vivekananda, Rousseau and Dewey.
2. Concept of Social diversity, inequity and Marginalisation and role of Education to cope up
with these issues.
3. Universalization of Education.

UNIT- II Education in India

1. Education in Pre Independence Period- Vedic Period, Buddhist Period, British Period.
2. Education in Post Independence Period- Education Commission (1966), NPE (1986), NCF (2005),
Learning without burden (Yashpal Committee report) NCFTE (2009), Dellors Commission report-
relevance to Indian conditions.

UNIT- III – Challenges in Education

1. Language policy Mutli lungal approach
2. Enhancement of quality in Education and role of SSA and RAMSA in this.
3. Increasing enrollment at different stages
4. Globalization, Liberalization, and Privatization and their implications in Education.

UNIT- IV Gender, School and Society

1. Gender Sensitivity and its importance for society.
2. Gender discrimination in Family, Society, and Schools.
3. Role of Education, Family, Media and legislation in developing gender parity.
4. Obstacles to and measures for Gender Sensitization.

UNIT – V - Values in Education –

1. Values: concept and classification, unity of all life and being); tolerance; Values in modern Indian
context with the reference to the Indian Constitution. Rights and Duties of a citizen as stated in
constitution.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 25 -

2. Value Education and role of school. Human rights & danger to Social Security, Role of
Education in safe guarding human rights. Activities helpful in Inculcation of values.
3. Environmental Education- Role of teacher in Promoting Conservation of Environment.
4. Education for peaceful and cooperative living.

SESSIONAL WORK
Attempt any two-(One each from following sections)
Section A
1. Term paper on any one Topic/issues related to Education
2. Two abstract of any Two articles related to Education

Section B
1. Prepare a report on Co-curricular Activities of a school supporting Environment protection.
2. Case study of any one institution with reference to gender sensitivity.
3. Prepare a report of a group discussion conducted on language Policy/ Constitutional values/
Globalization/ Libralization/ Privatization.

REFERENCES

1. Agnihotri, R.K (1995), Multillgualism as a classroom resource. In

K.Heugh.A.Siegruhn,&P.Pluddemann (Eds) Multilingual education for south Africa ( pp.3-7)
Heinemann Educational Books.
2. Batra,P. (2005), Voice and Agency of teachers: Missing link in national curriculum framework 2005.
Economic and Political Weekly, 4347-4356.
3. Chakravarti, U.(1998). Rewriting history: The life and times of Pandita Ramabai Zubaan.
4. De,A.Khera, R.Samson, M.& Shiva kumar, A.K. (2011) PROBE revisited: A report on elementary
education in India. New Delhi: Oxford University Press.
5. Dewey. J (2004), Democracy and Education Courier Dover Publications
6. Freire, P (2000) Pedagogy of the oppressed Continuum
7. Ghosh,S.C (2007) History of Education in India. Rawat Publications.
8. GOI,(1966) Report of the Education Commission:Education and national development New
Delhi:Ministry of Education.
9. GOI (1992,1998) National policy on education 1986 (As modified in 1992) Retrieved from
http://mhrd.gov.in/sites/upload_files/mhrd/files/NPE86-mod92.pdf
10. GOI (2009) The right of Children to free and compulsory education act, 2009 Retrieved from
http//mhrd.gov.in/sites/upload_files/mhrd/files/rte.pdf
11. GOI (2011) Sarva Shiksha abhyan- framework for implementation based on the right of children to
free and compulsory education act, 2009. GOI Retrieved from
http//www.upefa.com/upefaweb/admin/myuploads/SSA_Frame_work (revised)_9-6-2011 pdf.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 26 -

12. Govinda, R,(2011) who goes to school? Exploring exclusion in Indian education Oxford University
Press.
13. Govinda, R & Josephine, Y (2004) Para teachers in India:A review New Delhi: National Institute of
Educational Planning and Adminstration
14. Hindustani Talimi Sangh (1938) Basic national education: Report of the Zakir Hussain commitee
Sagoan, Wardha: Hindustani Talimi sangh
15. Haiah, K (1996) Why I am not a hindu :A sudra critique of Hindutwa philosophy, Culture and
political economy Samya Publications.
16. Kumar,K (2013) Politics of Education in colonial India, India: Routledge.
17. Naik, J.P,& (1982) The education commision and after. APH Publishing
18. NCERT ( 2005) National curriculum framework .NCERT.
19. NCERT ( 2006a) Position paper-National focus group on education with special needs (NCF 2005)
New Delhi: NCERT
20. NCERT (2006b) Position paper-National focus group on gender issues in the curriculam (NCF 2005)
NCERT.
21. NCERT (2006c) Position paper –National focus group on problems of scheduled caste and scheduled
tribe children (NCF2005) New Delhi:NCERT
22. NCERT (2006d) Position paper-National focus group on teaching of Indian language (NCF 2005)
New Delhi: NCERT
23. Pathak, A. (2013) Social implications of Schooling: Knowledge pedagogy and consciousness. Aakar
Books.
24. Raina, V (2010) FAQs on the right to free and compulsory education act 2009, Bharat Gyan Vigyan
Samiti, UNICEF
25. Sabyasachi, B (1997) The Mahatma and the poet: Letters and debates between Gandhi and Tagore.
National Book Trust.
26. Sykes, M ( 1987) The story of Nai Talim. Wardha: Nai Talim Samiti.
27. Tagore, R.(2003) Civilization and progress. In Crisis in civilization and other essays New
Delhi:Rupa & Co.
28. The PROBE Team (1999) Public report on basic education in India. Delhi: Oxford University Press.
29. Zastoupil , L & Moir, M (1999) The Great Indian education debate : Documents relating to the
Orientalist Anglicist controversy, 1781-1843. Psychology Press.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 27 -

 PAPER CODE-9103
Course 3 - LEARNING AND TEACHING
Objectives:- After completing this course, the student-teachers will be able to :
1. Understand the process of learning and different approaches to the teaching learning process.
2. Apply psychological principles in the teaching learning process.
3. Understand the concept of motivation and strategies to develop motivation and use the motivational
devices during teaching learning process.
4. Apply transfer of learning to foster maximum positive transfer.
5. Identify and cater to the educational needs of children with learning difficulties.
6. Develop an understanding of cognitive processes.
7. Understand various factors that influence learning.
8. Understand the concept, principles of teaching and models of teaching.
9. Develop an understanding of various approaches of teaching.
10. Understand the management of teaching.
11. Understand the role of professional organizations in professional development of teachers.

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT-I Learning and Motivation

1. Learning- Concept and Factors Affecting Learning.
2. (a) Approaches to Learning:
Cognitive : Gestalt (Werthimier, Kofka, Kohler)
Behaviorist : (Pavlov, Thorndike, Skinner)
Social Cognitive: Bandura
(b) Relevance and the applications of the above approaches to learning.
3. Transfer of Learning – Meaning, Types of Transfer and Teaching for Transfer.
4.Motivation– Concept and Significance, Types of Motivation (Intrinsic and Extrinsic),
Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs and Motivational Devices for Classroom Teaching.

UNIT- II Individual Differences and Cognitive Processes

1. Individual differences – Nature, Types, Causes, Accommodating individual differences in classroom.
2. Understanding differences based on cognitive abilities in children with learning difficulties (for
instance, slow learner, dyslexic).
3. (a) Cognitive Process-Concept and Processes such as Sensation, Perception, Attention,
Memory,Concept formation and Problem Solving in Learning.
(b) Educational Implications of the above cognitive processes.

UNIT- III Teaching and Teaching Process

A. Teaching
1. Concept, Nature and Principles of Teaching.
2. Relationship between Teaching and Learning.
3. Levels, Phases and Components of Teaching (Teacher, Student, Teaching-Learning material and
Classroom climate.
4. Interrelatedness of objectives, teaching learning experiences and evaluations.
5. Content analysis and Task analysis.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 28 -

 B. Teaching Process:
1. Teaching Technology: Concept, Assumptions, Characteristics and Components – Planning,
Organisation and Evaluation.
2. Criterion of effective teaching, Methods of assessment of teaching (Classroom observation, Peer
assessment, Self reporting and Evaluation by a supervisor).
3. Teacher behaviour during Teaching: Flander‟s Interaction Analysis System.

UNIT- IV Models and Approaches of Teaching

1. Concept of models of teaching.
2. Elements of Models of Teaching.
3. Families of Models of Teaching.
4. Types of Models of Teaching - Richard Suchman‟s Inquiry Training Model, Glaser‟s Basic
Teaching Model, Information Processing Model and Concept Attainment Model.
5. Approaches to teaching- Participatory, Child Centered, Constructivist and Investigatory - Their
meaning, characteristics and use in teaching.

UNIT-V Teaching as a Profession

1. Definition and characteristics of a profession.
2. Characteristics of teaching profession .
3. Professional Ethics for Teachers.
4. Strengthening Teaching Profession
a) Role of Educational Organizations in the professional development of teachers (UGC, NCTE,
NCERT, Universities and SIERT)
b) Role of Teacher Education Institution in the professional development of teachers.
c) Role of School and Community in enriching Teaching Profession
5. Balancing personal aspirations and professional obligations by teachers.

SESSIONAL WORK
The student teachers shall undertake any two of the following activities (one from each section) –
I –Section-A
1. Preparing a teaching plan based on constructivist approach / child centered approach / activity based
learning.
2. Case study of a child with learning difficulties.

II-Section-B:
1. Study and report on pressures on school teachers.
2. Observation of one student-teacher‟s behavior during one teaching period (using Flander‟s Interaction
Analysis System).
3. Collection of few success stories of teachers.
4. A case study of a professional organisation of teachers.

REFERENCES
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 29 -
1. pkSgku] vkj-,l- ¼2007½] vf/kxe o fodkl dk euksfoKku] t;iqj % vxzlu
s f”k{kk izdk”ku
2. feJk eatw ¼2008½] vf/kxedrkZ dk fodkl ,oa f”k{k.k vf/kxe izfØ;k] t;iqj ;wfuoflZVh cqd gkÅl
3. jktksfj;k] v:.k dqekj] vjksM+k izhfr ¼2007½] vf/kxedrkZ dk fodkl ,oa f”k{k.k vf/kxe izfØ;k] t;iqj %
dfork izdk”ku
4. dqyJs"B] ,l-ih- ¼1988½ % 'kSf{kd rduhdh ds ewy vk/kkj] fouksn iqLrd eafnj] vkxjk
5. lDlSuk ,oa vkscsjk; ¼1995½ % f'k{kd dh rduhdh] fo; j[kstk] lw;Z ifCyds'ku] esjB
6. Aggarwal, J. C. (1995), Essentials of Educational Psychology,Delhi:Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.
7. Benjafield, J. G. (1992), Cognition, Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs.
8. Brown, J. S., Collins A and Dugrid, P (1989), Situated Cognition and the Culture of Learning,
Educational Researcher, 32-42.
9. Bhatia, K. K.(2003), Bases of Educational Psychology The Learner – Nature and Development, New
Delhi: Kalgoni publisher.
10. Bains, Narinder Singh (2008). Shiksha Manovigyan Avam Vikas Ki Avastha, Jaipur : Jain Prakashan.
11. Bhatnagar, S. C. (1977) : Shikshan Shilp Vigyan.
12. Barnard H. C. (1970) : An Introductions to teaching, UI Publication, U.S.A.,
13. Becker, H. J., & Riel, M. M. (2000). Teacher professional engagement and constructivist compatible
computer use (Report No. 7). Irvine, CA: Center for Research on Information Technology and
Organizations.
14. Buch, M. B. and Santharam M R (1972) Communication in Classroom, CASE, Faculty of Ed. & Psy.
M S Univ. Baroda
15. Bagley, Classroom Management, New York: Macmillan
16. Buch, T (et al) (1980) Approaches to School Management, Harper & Row Publishers, London.
17. Clark, S. C. T. (1970) : A General Theory of Teaching
18. Chauhan, S. S. (1990) :Innovation in teaching learning process, Vikas Publication, New Delhi.
19. Chouhan, R. S. (2007). Adhigam avam Vikas Ka Manovigyan,J aipur: Aggrasen Shiksha Prakashan
20. Gagne, R. M. (1985) The Conditions of Learning and Theory of Instruction (4 th edition). New York:
Holt, Rinehart and Winston.
21. Gupta, S. K. and Gupta S (1991) Educational Administration and Management, Manorama
Prakashan, Indore.
22. Hilgard, E. R. (1956).Theories of Learning,New York:Appleton Century Craft.
23. Joyce, B. Weil, M. Models of Teaching, Prentice Hall, New Jersey.
24. Kulkarni S. S. (1986) :Introduction to Education Technology, Oxford & IBH Publishing Co. New
Delhi.
25. Loura, E. Berk (2008).Child Development,New Jersey: Pearson Prentice Hall (Low Price Edition) .

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 30 -

26. Luria, A. R. (1976), Cognitive Development : Its Cultural and Social Foundations. Havward
University Press, Cambridge, Mass.
27. Mishra, Manju . (2008). Adhigamkarta Ka Vikas avam Shikshan Adhigam Prakirya, Jaipur :
University Book House.
28. Pathak, P. D. (1973). Educational Psychology,Agra: Vinod Pustak Mandir .
29. Passi, B. K. (1976) Becoming Better Teacher, Micro teaching Approach,
Sahitya Mudranalya, Ahmedabad.
30. Rajoria, Arun Kumar, Arora, Preeti (2007). Adhigamkarta Ka Vikas avam Shikshan Adhigam
Prakirya. Jaipur: Kavita Prakashan.
31. Rayans, D. G. (1969), Characteristics of Teachers.
32. Saxena & Oberoi (1995), Technology of Teaching 1995.
33. Sarangapani M. Padma (2003), Constructing School Knowledge : An Ethnograph of learning in an
Indian Village, Sage Publication.
34. Sharma R. A. (1986), Technology of Teaching, Loyal Book Depot. Meerut.
35. Sharma, R. A. (1996), Fundamentals of Educational Psychology,Meerut: R.Lal Book Depot.
36. Skinner, B.F.(1960), Essentials of Educational Psychology,Bombay:Asia Publishing House.
37. Thorndike Edward L. (2007), Educational Psychology, Published by READ Books. Woolfolk, A.E.
(2009), Educational Psychology (11th Edition) (My Education Lab Series) Prentice Hall.
38. Wertsch, J. V. (1985), Vygotsky and the Social Formation of Mind. Havard University Press.
39. Verma, Rampal Singh .Adhigam avam Vikas Ke Mano-Samajik Adha, Agra: Vinod Pustak Mandir.

40. Veeraraghavan,Vimla (2006), Behavioural Problems in Children and Adolescents, New Delhi :
Northern Book Centre.

PAPER CODE-9104
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 31 -
 Course 4- LANGUAGE ACROSS THE CURRICULUM
(Including reading and reflecting on text)
Objectives: After the completion of the course, the student teacher will be able to:
1. Understand the language background of students as the first or second language
users.
2. Create sensitivity to the language diversity that exists in the classroom.
3. Understand the nature of classroom discourse and develop strategies for using oral
language in the classroom.
4. Understand the nature of reading comprehension in the content area & writing in
specific content areas.
5. Understand interplay of language and society.
6. Understand function of language and how to use it as a tool.
7. Understand language and speech disorders and make remedial measure, too.

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT –I Language and society

1. Relationship between language and society.
2. Multilingualism- concept, status of Indian classroom language.
3. Verbal Communication.
4. Social stimulation- gestures, emotional and facial expressions, postures and movements, articulate
speech, physiognomy.

UNIT- II Language development

1. Language development in different stages.
2. Speech defects: lisping, slurring, stammering and role of teachers in its resolution.
3. Language acquisition: stages, language and thought.
4. Meta- linguistics: concept, meaning, listening, speaking, reading, comprehension and writing for
varying context, language proficiency for teacher.

UNIT- III Classroom and language

1. Classroom discourse- nature, meaning and medium.
2. Questioning in the classroom- type of questions, why and how of asking of questions, teachers role
and control during questioning, encouraging questioning by students.
3. Functions of language within and outside the classroom.
4. Role of classroom interaction in learning language.
5. Role of literature in language learning.

UNIT- IV Reading and writing

1. Reading skills- purpose and methods.
2. Reading in the content areas- science, social science and Mathematics.
3. Writing with a sense of purpose, writing to learn and understand.
A. Preparation of press note and meeting minutes.
B. Reporting of conference and workshop

UNIT –V Reading and Reflecting on text

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 32 -

1. Nature of texts- expository v/s narrative texts, transactional v/s reflective texts
2. Scheme theory- text structures and examining content area.
3. Reading reflections :
a. Characteristics and Precautions of summary writing.
b. Measures and Precautions to be taken for organizing discussions based on reading of a document.
c. Steps of expressing views on an editorial of newspaper.

SESSIONAL WORK

Any two of the following:

1. Find out the different languages spoken by the students and prepare a plan to use multilingualism as a
teaching strategy.
2. Identify speech defects of a student and make a remedial strategy.
3. Organize an activity based game to motivate students for creative questioning and present its report.
4. Read any empirical, conceptual, historical work or a policy document or studies about schools,
teaching, learning or different people‟s experiences and submit reading reflections.
5. Plan a participatory transaction strategy for language acquisition.
6. Prepare abstracts of any two articles published in reputed Journals.

REFERENCES

1. Agnihotri, R.K. (1995). Multilingualism as a classroom resourse. In K. Heugh, A Siegruhn, & P.

Pluddemann (Eds.) Multilingual education for South Africa 9pp. 3-&) Heinemann Educational books.
2. Anderson, R.C. (1984). Role of the Reader‟s Schema in comprehension, learning and memory. In
R.C. Anderson, J. Osborn, & R.J. Tierney (Eds.) Learning to read in American school: Basad readers
and content texts. Psychology Press.
3. Eller, R.G. (1989). Johnny can‟t talk, either: The perpetuation of the deficit theory in classroom: The
Reaing Teacher, 670-674.
4. Erlwanger, S.H. (1973). Benny‟s conception of rules and answers in IPI mathematics. Journal of
children‟s mathematical behavior, 1 (2), 7-26
5. Grellet, f. (1981). Developing reading skills: A practical gude to reading comprehension exercises.
Cambridge University Press.
6. Ladson-Billings. G. (1995). Toward a theory of culturally Relevant Pedagogy. American Educational
research journal. 32(3), 465-491.
7. NCERT. (2006d) Position paper National Focus Group on teaching of Indian language (NCF-2005).
New Delhi: NCERT.
8. Thwaite, A. & Rivalland, J. (2009) How can analysis of classroom taks help teachers reflect on their
practices? Australian Journal of Language and Literacy, the 32(1)38.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 33 -

 Course – 5 & 6
PEDAGOGY OF A SCHOOL SUBJECT
(Including Understanding Disciplines and Subjects)
Part I

To opt for the pedagogy of a school subject, the student teacher shall have to offer any two
teaching subjects out of the following papers, which he/she has studied at Graduation /P.G. level
for at least two years:

1- Pedagogy of Hindi.
2- Pedagogy of English.
3- Pedagogy of Sanskrit.
4- Pedagogy of Urdu.
5- Pedagogy of Rajasthani.
6- Pedagogy of Mathematics.
7- Pedagogy of General Science.
8- Pedagogy of Physics.
9- Pedagogy of Chemistry.
10- Pedagogy of Biology.
11- Pedagogy of Home Science.
12- Pedagogy of Computer Science
13- Pedagogy of Social Science.
14- Pedagogy of Sociology
15- Pedagogy of Psychology
16- Pedagogy of History.
17- Pedagogy of Political Science.
18- Pedagogy of Economics.
19- Pedagogy of Geography.
20- Pedagogy of Art.
21- Pedagogy of Music.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 34 -

 22- Pedagogy of Business Studies
23- Pedagogy of Financial Accounting
PAPER CODE-9105
Course 5 & 6 - fgUnh dk f'k{k.k “kkL=
mn~ns”;& izf'k{k.kkFkhZ bl ikB~;Øe dks i<+us ds mijkUr&
1- Hkk"kk ds Lo:i dks tku ldsx a sA
2- Hkk"kk dh vyx&vyx Hkwfedkvksa dks tku ldsaxAs
3- Hkk"kk lh[kus ds rjhds ,oa izfØ;k dks tku ldsx a sA
4- Hkk"kk;h vfHkO;fDr ds izdkjksa dks tku ldsx a sA
5- vuqokn ds egRo ,oa Hkwfedk dks le>uk ldsx a sA
6- fo|kfFkZ;ksa dh Hkk"kk;h l`tukRed {kerk dks igpkuuk ldsaxs rFkk fodflr dj ldsx a sA
7- lkfgR; o Hkk"kk ds lEcU/k dks le> ldsx a sA
8- fgUnh f'k{k.k ds mís';ksa dks tku ldsx a s ,oa mi;ksx esa ys ldsx
a sA
9- fgUnh f'k{k.k ds egRo dks le> ldsx a sA
10- fo|ky; esa fgUnh Hkk"kk lEcU/kh xfrfof/k;ksa ds lapkyu dh ;ksX;rk fodflr dj ldsaxAs
11- fgUnh f'k{k.k esa vuqHkwr leL;kvksa ds fujkdj.k gsrq y?kq izk;kstuk,¡] fØ;kRed vuqla/kku vkfn mik;ksa
dks dke esa ysus dh izfØ;k dks tku ldsx a sA
12- fgUnh f'k{k.k esa n`';&J`O; lkexzh rFkk Hkk"kk iz;ksx'kkyk dk mi;ksx tku ldsx a sA
ikB~;Øe&fo"k;oLrq
bdkbZ& I Hkk"kk dk vFkZ] egRo] Hkkf"kd leL;k rFkk f'k{k.k mís';
¼1½ Hkk"kk dk vFkZ] egRo rFkk ekr`Hkk"kk ,oa ekud Hkk"kk dh le>A
¼2½ lafo/kku vkSj f'k{kk lfefr;ksa ds izfrosnuksa esa Hkk"kk dh fLFkfrA
¼3½ Hkkjr dh Hkkf"kd leL;k] f=Hkk"kk lw= rFkk xk¡/kh th }kjk Hkk"kk ds lEcU/k esa O;Dr fd;s fopkjA
¼4½ Hkk"kk f'k{k.k ds mís'; ,oa O;ogkjxr ifjorZuA
¼5½ cky lkfgR; dk vFkZ ,oa fo/kk,¡ rFkk ikB~;Øe esa lkfgR; dks i<+uk] i<+kuk ,oa vuqokn djukA
bdkbZ&II Hkk"kk dk oSKkfud Lo:i rFkk Hkk"kk;h O;ogkj ds fofo/k igyw
¼1½ Hkk"kk dk oSKkfud Lo:i ¼o.kZ fopkj] 'kCn fopkj ,oa okD; fopkj dh n`f"V ls½
¼2½ Hkk"kk lh[kus&fl[kkus dh cgqHkkf"kd n`f"VA
¼3½ Hkk"kk;h O;ogkj ds fofo/k igyw ¼fofHkUu cksfy;ka] {ks=h; Hkk"kk ,oa ekud Hkk"kk½
bdkbZ&III fgUnh f'k{k.k ds vk/kkjHkwr dkS'ky] lw= rFkk vU; fo"k;ksa ls lEcU/k
¼1½ fgUnh ds vk/kkjHkwr dkS'ky& lquuk] cksyuk] i<+uk o fy[kuk ,oa Hkk"kk ds ek/;e ls l`tukRedrk
dk fodkl
¼2½ fgUnh f'k{k.k ds lw= ,oa fl)kUr
¼3½ fgUnh Hkk"kk dk vU; fo"k;ksa ls lEcU/k
¼4½ fgUnh f'k{k.k esa pqukSfr;k¡

bdkbZ& IV fgUnh f'k{k.k dh fofHkUu fo/kk,¡

¼1½ x| f'k{k.k&mís';] fof/k;k¡ ,oa ikB ;kstukA
¼2½ i| f'k{k.k& cks/k ikB] jl ikB ,oa mi;kstuk ikBA ¼cks/k ikB o jl ikB dk fefJr :i½
¼3½ ukVd ,oa ,dkadh f'k{k.k&vfHku;kRed ikB&eaph; fof/kA
¼4½ O;kdj.k ,oa jpuk f'k{k.kA
¼5½ bdkbZ ,oa okf"kZd bdkbZ] nSfud f'k{k.k ;kstuk] bdkbZ tkWp i= rFkk uhy i= dk fuekZ.kA
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 35 -
bdkbZ& V fgUnh f'k{k.k esa lgk;d lkexzh ,oa uokpkj
¼1½ n`';&J`O; lkexzh ¼jsfM;ks] Vsyhfotu] vks-,p-ih-] fyXok Qksu] fp=dFkk] VsifjdkWMZj vkfnA
¼2½ Hkk"kk iz;ksx'kkykA
¼3½ Hkk"kk f'k{k.k esa uokpkj ¼vfHku;hdj.k] leL;k iwfrZ] dkYifud ys[k vkfn½
¼4½ funkukRed ijh{k.k ,oa mipkjkRed f'k{k.kA

l=h; dk;Z
fuEukafdr esa ls dksbZ nks
1- fo|ky; dh fdlh ,d lkfgfR;d xfrfof/k dh ;kstuk fuekZ.k] fØ;kfUofr djuk rFkk izfrosnu
rS;kj djukA
2- Hkk"kk;h dkS'kyksa ¼lquuk] cksyuk] i<+uk] fy[kuk½ ds lh[kus lEcfU/kr pkj&pkj xfrfof/k;k¡ rS;kj dj
izfrosnu izLrqr djukA
3- fgUnh Hkk"kk esa iz;qDr vU; Hkk"kkvksa ds 'kCnksa dk ladyu] v/;;u ,oa O;kdj.k dh izdf` r ds vuqlkj
oxhZdj.kA
4- Hkk"kk f'k{k.k ds nkSjku vkus okyh leL;kvksa ij fØ;kRed vuqla/kku dk fØ;kUo;u dj izfrosnu
rS;kj djukA%&

lanHkZ iqLrdsa

1- 'kekZ] ch-,u- ¼1997½ ^^fgUnh f'k{k.k** lkfgR; izdk'kuA

2- frokjh] mn;ukjk;.k ¼1999½ ^^Hkk"kk f'k{k.k**&fouksn iqLrd eafnj] vkxjkA
3- ukxnk] Hkaojyky ¼2000½ ^^fgUnh Hkk"kk esa orZuh ,oa mPpkj.k lEcU/kh =qfV;ka ,oa mipkj**] Dykfldy
ifCyf'kax daiuh] ubZ fnYyhA
4- ik.Ms; jke'kdy ¼2004½ ^^uwru fgUnh f'k{k.k**] fouksn iqLrd eafnj] vkxjkA
5- flag] fujatu dqekj ¼2006½ ^^ek/;fed fo|ky;ksa esa fgUnh f'k{k.k**] jktLFkkuh fgUnh xzaFk vdkneh
t;iqjA
6- cD'kh] ,u-,l- ¼2007½ ^^fgUnh f'k{k.k**] izsj.kk izdk'ku lsDVj 14] jksfg.kh] ubZ fnYyhA
7- 'kekZ ,oa xqIrk ¼2007½ ^^fgUnh f'k{k.k**] lkfgR;xkj] t;iqjA
8- ukxnk] Hkoajyky ¼2007½ ^^f'k{kk ds uwru vk;ke** vadqj izdk'ku] mn;iqjA
9- HkkbZ ;ksxUs nzthr ¼2008½ ^^fgUnh Hkk"kk f'k{k.k**] fouksn iqLrd eafnj] vkxjkA
10- 'kekZ ,oa 'kekZ ¼2008½ ^^fgUnh Hkk"kk rRo ,oa mipkjkRed dk;Z** Jqfr ifCyds'ku] t;iqj&6A
11- 'kekZ ,e-Mh- ^^fgUnh ekr` Hkk"kk f'k{k.k**] vxzlus f'k{kk izdk'ku] t;iqjA
12- tks'kh vkse izdk'k ¼2008½ ^^fgUnh Hkk"kk lkfgR; f'k{k.k**] jkW;y ifCyds'ku] t;iqjA
13- ik.Ms;] jke'kdyk ¼2008½ **fgUnh f'k{k.k**] fouksn iqLrd eafnj] vkxjkA
14- xq:] dkerk izlkn ¼2009½ ^^fgUnh O;kdj.k** lkfgR;xkj] t;iqjA
15- xq: dkerk izlkn ¼2009½ ^^o`gn fgUnh O;kdj.k**] lkfgR;xkj] t;iqjA
16- ukxnk] Hkaojyky ¼2011½ ^^fgUnh Hkk"kk =qfV;ka ,oa mipkj**] Dykfldy ifCyf'kax dEiuh] ubZ fnYyhA

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 36 -

17- ukxnk] Hkaojyky ukxnk] MkW- }kfjdk izlkn ¼2015½ ^^fØ;kRed vuqla/kku ,oa lkaf[;dh**] vadqj
izdk'ku] mn;iqjA

PAPER CODE-9106
Course 5 & 6 - PEDAGOGY OF ENGLISH
I Year
PEDAGOGY OF TEACHING ENGLISH
OBJECTIVES:
1. To enable the student -teachers to know and understand the basic concepts related to the nature
of English , language teaching , objectives of ELT ( English Language Teaching), approaches
and methods.
2. To enable the student -teachers to apply the knowledge and understanding of the basic
concepts of ELT in the actual classroom conditions .
3. To enable the student-teachers to grow as teachers of ELT .

Course Content:

UNIT -1 NATURE OF ENGLISH:

Basic knowledge and understanding of the origin of the English Language :
Old English, Contemporary English /Modern English , Difference between Oral
and Written English, Difference between Formal and Informal English .

Aspects of English: Phonological aspects( including vowel and consonant

sounds, beats, pause, juncture, accent ,stress, intonation and
rhythm),morphological , syntactic, grammatical, lexical ,semantic and
orthographic aspects of English .

UNIT -2 LANGUAGE TEACHING :

Basic Concepts: (MT)Mother Tongue /L1 ( First Language )/ , L2 ( Second
Language ), TL ( Third Language ) and FL ( Foreign Language) .

Language Content: Basic concept, types including the phonological content

( sounds, etc .), lexical content ( words ) ,syntactic ( grammar ) and structural
content ,and orthographic content ( script ,style ,size and shape of script ) and
their implications for teaching .
Basic Language Skills:
i. Listening :Essential Components and sub-skills ,difference between
hearing and listening, role of note taking.
ii. Speaking : Essential Components and sub-skills.
iii. Reading : Mechanics, Types of reading: skimming, scanning, silent
reading, reading aloud, intensive reading and extensive reading.
iv. Writing : Types of composition: oral, written, controlled, guided,
contextualized and integrated composition.

Principles of Language Teaching

UNIT -3 OBJECTIVES OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE TEACHING (ELT); General and

Specific Objectives , Skills based Objectives , Competence based Objectives (
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 37 -
 linguistic and communicative competence), TEMT( Teaching English as Mother
Tongue ) , TESL ( Teaching English as Second Language), TEFL ( Teaching
English as Foreign Language).

UNIT -4 APPROACHES AND METHODS :

Basic philosophy , basic principles, basic aims/ focus , procedure, merits and
demerits of Structural Situational Approach ,Communicative Approach ,
Grammar Translation Method, Direct Method ,Bilingual Method, CALT (
Computer Assisted Language Teaching ) ,Eclectic Approach.

UNIT -5 PLANNING FOR TEACHING :Annual plan, Unit -plan, Lesson -plan ,
Techniques of teaching of lexical and structural items , teaching of grammar,
teaching of comprehension skills ( listening and reading), use of Cloze
procedure and Maze method, use of dictionary in teaching and reading skill,
phonetic- transcription, teaching of expression skills ( speaking and writing),
composition (letters, essay, report, e-mail, notice, précis/summary, paragraph,
developing stories, note making), teaching of poetry .

Sessional work
Any two of the following :
1. A detailed critical essay on the status of ELT in India or Rajasthan.
2. A detailed essay on the contribution of any one of the following linguists /applied
linguists /grammarians :- Ferdinand de Saussure ,H.E.Palmer,Otto Jesperson, Samuel
Johnson , C.J.Dodson, A.S.Hornby, Noam Chomsky, David Crystal, A.C.Gimson, and
Daniel Jones .
3. Preparation of a scrap book containing 5 flash cards, 5 substitution tables, and 5 basic
dialogues.
4. Preparation of any three of the following: one Cloze test, one Maze test, one speaking
test, one listening test, one communicative skills test , and one grammar test.
5. A report (based on the interviews with teachers ) on the problems of ELT in the
elementary schools or secondary schools.

A List of Suggested Readings:

1..Bansal, R.K. and Harrison, J.B. (1972). Spoken English for India. Madras: Orient Longman Ltd.

2. Baruah, T.C. (1985). The English Teacher’s Handbook. New Delhi: Sterling Publishing Pvt. Ltd.

3. Bright, J. A. and McGregor, G. P. (1970). Teaching English as Second Language. London:

Longman.

4.Brown, H. Douglas. (2007). Principles of Language Learning and Teaching. New York: Pearson
Education

5. Brumfit, C.J. (1984). Communicative Methodology in Language Teaching. Cambridge:

Cambridge University Press.

6. Crystal ,David ( 2003). The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the English Language. Cambridge :
C.U.P.

7. Doff, A. (1988). Teaching English. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 38 -
8. Freeman, Diane-Larsen. (2000). Techniques and Principles in language Teaching. Oxford:
Oxford University Press.

9. Gimson, A.C. (1980). An Introduction to the Pronunciation of English. London: Edward

Arnold.

10.Harmer, Jeremy. (2007). How to Teach English. Harlow: Pearson Education Limited.

11. Hornby, A.S. (1968). A Guide to Patterns and Usage in English. Oxford: Oxford University
Press.

12. Krishnaswamy, N. and Krishnaswamy, Lalitha. (2008). The Story of English in India. New
Delhi: Foundation Books.

13. Krishnaswamy, N. and Krishnaswamy, Lalitha. (2005). Methods of Teaching English. New
Delhi: Macmillan.

14. Krishnaswamy, N. and Krishnaswamy, Lalitha. (2005). Teaching English: Approaches,

Methods and Techniques. New Delhi: Macmillan.

15. Lado, R. (1971). Language Teaching. New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill Publishing.

16. NCF 2005 .New Delhi: NCERT .

17. Paliwal, A.K. (2012). Methodology of Teaching English as a Second Language. Jaipur:
Kalpana Publications.

18. Palmer, H.L. (1965). The Principles of Language Study. London: Oxford University Press .

19. Quirk, R. and Greenbaum, S. (1973). A University Grammar of English. London: Pearson
Longman .

20. Raimes, Ann. (2010). Techniques in Teaching Writing. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

21. Richards, J.C. and Rodgers, T.S. (2014). Approaches and Methods in Language Teaching
.Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

22. Roach, Peter. (1991). English Phonetics and Phonology. Cambridge :CUP.

23. Sinclair, John. (2000). Collins Co-build English Grammar. London: Harper Collins.

24.Venkteshwaran, S. ( 1995) .The Principles of Teaching English.Vikas Publishing House :New

Delhi .
25. Yadav, Saryug. (2014). Challenges of Teaching English Language and Literature in the Age
of Globalization. New Delhi: Lakshi Publishers.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 39 -

 PAPER CODE-9107

Course 5 & 6 - laLd`r dk f”k{k.k ”kkL=

mn~ns”;& izf'k{k.kkFkhZ bl ikB~;Øe dks i<+us ds mijkUr&

1. Hkk’kk dh fofHkUu Hkwfedkvksa dks le> ldsaxsA
2. Hkkjr esa laLd`r Hkk’kk dh fLFkfr ,oa egRo dks le> ldsaxsA
3. laLd`r Hkk’kk ds rRoksa dk izR;kLej.k dj ldssaxs vkSj mudk lgh iz;ksx dj ldsx a sA
4. laLd`r f”k{k.k ds fl}kUr] lw=] lkekU; ,oa fof”k’V m)s”;ksa dks le> ldsaxsA
5. ewyHkwr Hkk’kk dkS”kyksa] tSls& Jo.k] Hkk’k.k] okpu ,oa ys[ku ds lEizR;;] egRo ,oa fodkl dks le> ldsaxsA
6. laLd`r f”k{k.k dh fofHkUu fof/k;ksa ,ao mikxeksa dk izR;kLej.k dj ldsaxs vkSj budk leqfpr iz;ksx dj
ldsaxsA
7. laLd`r lkfgR; dh fo/kk,W]tSl& s x|] i|] dFkk] ukVd vkfn dk lEizR;;] egÙo] f”k{k.k iz.kkfy;ksa o lksikuksa
dks le> ldsx a s vkSj buesa bdkbZ ;kstukvksa ,oa ikB;kstukvksa dk fuekZ.k dj ldsx
a sA
8. laLd`r f”k{k.k dks jkspd ,oa izHkkoh cukus ds fy, mfpr f”k{k.k lgk;d lkezxh ,oa lk/kuksa dk p;u fuekZ.k
,oa mi;ksx dj ldsaxsA
9. laLd`r f”k{k.k esa fofHkUu izdkj ds iz”uksa dh jpuk dj ldsaxsA
10. ek/;fed f”k{kk cksMZ] jktLFkku ds uewus ¼isVuZ½ ds vk/kkj ij laLd`r ikB~;iqLrd ij iz”u i= rS;kj dj
ldsaxsA
11. laLd`r ds iz”ui=ksa dk fo”ys’k.k dj ldasxAs

ikB~;dze

bdkbZ &I Hkk’kk dh Hkwfedk] laLd`r Hkk’kk dh fLFkfr] egÙo ,oa rRo

1- Hkk’kk dh Hkwfedk] Hkk’kk ,oa lekt] Hkk’kk ,oa fyax] Hkk’kk ,oa igpku ¼vfLerk½] Hkk’kk ,oa “kfDrA
2- ?kj dh Hkk’kk ,oa fo|ky; dh Hkk’kk] vf/kxe esa laLd`r dh dsfUnzrrk
3- Hkkjr esa laLd`r Hkk’kk dh fLFkfr
a) Hkk’kk f”k{kk lEcU/kh laoS/kkfud izko/kku ¼/kkjk 343&351]350 v½
b) laLd`r Hkk’kk lac/kh uhfr;ka &laLd`r vk;ksx ¼1956&57½]dksBkjh vk;ksx ¼1964&66½
jk’Vªh; f”k{kk uhfr ¼NPE)- 1986, fdz;kUo;u dk;Zdze ¼POA)- 1992
jk’Vªh; ikB~;p;kZ :ijs[kk&2005¼Hkk’kk f”k{kk½ & laLd`r dh fLFkfr
4- laLd`r Hkk’kk dk egÙo] laLd`r Hkk’kk ,oa lkfgR;] laLd`r Hkk’kk ,oa Hkkjrh; Hkk’kk,a] laLd`r Hkk’kk dk
lajpukRed] lkaLd`frd ,oa lkekftd egÙo] vk/kqfud Hkkjrh; Hkk’kk ds :i esa laLd`r dk egÙo] fo|ky;
Lrj ij laLd`r f”k{k.k ls lEcfU/kr vuqHkwr leL;k,a
5- laLd`r Hkk’kk ds rRo “kCn:i] fyM~x&Kku] /kkrq :i ¼n”k ydkj½] loZ uke :i] fo”ks’k.k :i] vO;;] milxZ]
izR;;] lfU/k] lekl] foHkfDr ¼dkjd½] okD; lajpuk ,oa okP; ifjorZu dk Kku ,oa iz;ksx

bdkbZ &II laLd`r Hkk’kk f”k{k.k ds fl}kUr] lw= ,oa mn~ns”;

1- laLd`r Hkk’kk f”k{k.k ds fl)kUr] d{kk f”k{k.k ds lkekU; fl)kUr] cksyus o fy[kus esa vuq:irk dk
fl)kUr] vH;kl dk fl)kUr vkfn A
2- laLd`r Hkk’kk f”k{k.k ds lw=
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 40 -
3- laLd`r f”k{k.k ds mn~ns”;

a) lkekU; ,oa fof”k’V mn~ns”;ksa esa vUrj

b) fofHkUu Lrj ij laLd`r f”k{k.k ds mn~ns”; ¼mPPk izkFkfed] ek/;fed ,oa mPp ek/;fed½
c) fof”k’V mn~ns”;ksa dk O;ogkjxr “kCnkoyh esa fu/kkZj.k
bdkbZ &III laLd`r Hkk’kk f”k{k.k dkS”ky] fof/k;ka ,oa mikxe
1- laLd`r Hkk’kk f”k{k.k dkS”ky Jo.k] Hkk’k.k] okpu ,oa ys[ku dkS”kyksa dk lEizR;;] egÙo ,oa fodkl]
Hkk’kk;h f”k{k.k dkS”kyksa dks fodflr djus dh ikB~;lgxkeh xfrfof/k;ka “yksdikB] laLd`r xhr ikB]
vuqPNsn ys[ku] dFkk ys[ku] i= ys[ku] d{kk if=dk] fHkfÙk if=dk] fo|ky; if=dk] vUR;k{kjh] dfo
njckj] leL;kiwfrZ] iz”uksrjh] l`tukRed ys[ku] Hkk’kk;h [ksyA
2- laLd`r Hkk’kk f”k{k.k dh fof/k;ka] ikB”kkyk fof/k] ikB~;iqLrd fof/k] O;kdj.k&vuqokn fof/k]
izR;{k fof/k] f}Hkk’kk fof/kA
3- laLd`r Hkk’kk f”k{k.k ds mikxe] ekSf[kd mikxe] laxUz Fku mikxe ,oa lEizs{k.k mikxeA

bdkbZ &IV laLd`r lkfgR; dh fofHkUu fo/kk,a] ikB fu;kstu] f”k{k.k ,oa vf/kxe lkexzh
1- laLd`r lkfgR; dh fofHkUu fo/kk,a tSls & x|] i|] dFkk] ukVd] O;kdj.k ,oa jpuk ds lEizR;;]
egÙo] f”k{k.k iz.kkfy;ka ,oa lksiku
2- bdkbZ ;kstuk ,oa ikB ;kstuk dk fu;kstuA
bdkbZ ;kstuk dk lEizR;;] egÙo ,oa lksikuA
ikB;kstuk dk lEizR;;] egÙo ,oa lksikuA
bdkbZ ;kstuk ,oa ikB;kstukvksa dk fuekZ.k ,oa f”k{k.kA
3- f”k{k.k ,oa vf/kxe lkexzh vkSj lk/ku
fizUV ehfM+;k o vU; okpu&lkexzh tSls & vf/kxedkas }kjk p;fur iqLrdas] if=dk,a] lekpkj i=]
d{kk iqLrdky; bR;kfnA
n`”;&JO; lk/ku tSls&oLrq] fp=] js[kkfp=] ekufp=] izfrd`fr] “;ke ië] Q~ys”k dkMZ] Vsi fjdkMZj]
ikjn”khZ] jsfM;ks] dEI;wVj ,oa lhM+h bR;kfnA

bdkbZ&V laLd`r esa vkdyu

laLd`r esa fofHkUu izdkj ds iz”uksa dk fuekZ.k &
1 oLrqfu’B iz”u & fjDr LFkku iwfrZ iz”u] cgq fodYihiz”u] lqesyu in iz”u] lR;& vlR; iz”u]
2 vfry?kwÙkjkRed ,oa y?kwÙkjkRed iz”u]
3 fuca/kkRed iz”u] leL;k&lek/kku] l`tukRed]
vkykspukRed lksp dks fodflr djus okys] dYiuk dks thfor djus okys ,oa ifjos”kh;
ltxrk ds iz”uA
a) Hkk’kk fodkl dh izxfr dk vkdyu lrr~ ,oa lexz vkdyu dh rduhd] ekSf[kd]
fyf[kr]Lo vkdyu] “kykdk vkdyu] lgikBh vkdyu ,oa lewg vkdyu
b) fofHkUu rkfydkvksa lfgr uhyi= dk fuekZ.k] iz”ui= dk fuekZ.k] mÙkj ,oa vad;kstuk] in
fo”ys’k.k
l=h; dk;Z
fuEukfdr esa ls fdUgh nks xfrfof/k;ksa dk p;u dj izfrosnu rS;kj djukA

1- jk-ek-f”k-cksMZ }kjk d{kk 10 ds laLd`r Nk=ksa ds fy, fufeZr iz”ui= dk fof”k’V mn~ns”; ,oa Hkk’kk
“kq}rk dks /;ku esa j[kdj fo”ys’k.k djukA

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 41 -

2- d{kk 8 ds laLd`r Nk=ksa ds fy, fofHkUu rkfydkvksa lfgr uhyi= cukdj ,d vkn”kZ iz”ui= laLd`r
esa rS;kj djukA
3- ek/;fed Lrj dh laLd`r ikB~;iqLrd eas iz;qDr fdlh ,d ij&vO;;] milxZ] izR;;] foHkfDr] lfU/k]
lekl] ydkj vkSj okD; esa ls d{kk f”k{k.k laO;wgu rS;kj djukA
4- f”k{k.k izn”kZu dh ppkZ dj vkSj mi;qZDr lq>ko nsdj ,d izfrosnu rS;kj djukA
5- laLd`r dh fdlh dFkk ls lacf/kr fp=ksa dh ikjn”khZ vFkok Lykb~M~l rS;kj djukA
lUnHkZ iqLrdsa
1- vkIVs]oh-,l-¼2008½ laLd`r fgUnh dks”k] t;iqj] jpuk izdk”ku
2- Hkalkyh] vk”kk ¼2004½ laLd`r f”k{k.k ds u;s vk;ke] tks/kiqj] jktLFkkuxzUFkkxkj
3- nos] ve`ryky ,oa “kekZ] MkW-fu:iek ¼2012½lw{e f”k{k.k ds fl}kUr ,oa vH;kl] vkxjk]jk/kk izdk”ku efUnj izk -
fy-
4- nos] ve`ryky] ikVuh] m’kk ,oa ukxnk] mn;yky ¼2013½ laLd`r dk f”k{k.k “kkL=] vkxjk] jk/kk izdk”ku
efUnj izk-fyfeVsM
5- f}osnh] dfiy nso ¼2008½ jpukuqokndkSeqnzh] t;iqj fo”ofo|ky; izdk”ku
6- xks;y] izhfrizHkk ¼2000½ laLd`r O;kdj.k] tks/kiqj jktLFkku xzUFkkxkj
7- tks”kh] eksrhyky ,oa “kekZ] eatq ¼2002½ laLd`r f”k{k.k] p.Mhx<+] nsoukjk;.k izdk”ku
8- d.kZflag ¼1997) laLd`r f”k{k.k] y[kheiqj&[khjh] xksfoUn izdk”ku
9- feJ] izHkk”kadj ¼1984½ laLd`r f”k{k.k] p.Mhx<+] gfj;k.kk xzaFk vdkneh
10- feÙky] larks’k ¼2007½ laLd`r f”k{k.k] esjB] vkj-yky] cqd fMiks
11- ik.Ms;] jke”kdy ¼1995½] laLd`r f”k{k.k] vkxjk] fouksn iqLrd efUnj
12- lQk;k] vkj-,u-¼1990½ laLd`r f”k{k.k ] tkya/kj fdrkc ?kj
13- lkEcf”koewfrZ] dEcEikVh ¼2006½ laLd`r f”k{k.ka] t;iqj ] nhif”k[kk izdk”ku
14- lR;nso flag ,oa “kekZ] “kf”kdyk ¼2014½ laLd`r f”k{k.k vkxjk] vxzoky ifCyds”kUl
15- lkrosydj] Jhikn] nkeksnj ¼2004½ Lo;a&f”k{kd] fnYyh] jktiky ,.M lUl
16- “kekZ] eqjyh/kj ¼2003½ laLd`r f”k{k.k leL;k] fr:ifr] jk’Vªh; laLd`r laLFkku
17- “kekZ] ,u-ds- ¼2008½ laLd`r f”k{k.k] ubZ fnYyh] ds-,l-ds ifCy”klZ ,oa fMfLVªC;wVlZ
18- “kkL=h] oklqnso ¼1996½ fdz;kRed laLd`r f”k{k.k] uonsgyh] jk’Vªh; laLd`r laLFkku
19- f=ikBh] czãkuUn ¼2003½ vuqoknpfUnzdk] okjk.klh] pkS[kEck lqjHkkjrh izdk”ku
20- f=ikBh] jekdkUr ¼2002½ vuqokn jRukdkj] okjk.klh] pkS[kEck fo|kHkou
21- f=ikBh] jkeukjk;.k ¼1970½ laLd`r v/;kiu fof/k] vkxjk y{ehukjk;.k vxzoky
22- mik/;k;] cynso ¼1982½ laLd`r lkfgR; dk bfrgkl] okjk.klh] “kkjnk fudsru
23- fo”okl ¼2004½ dkS”kycksf/kuh] ubZ fnYyh] laLd`r Hkkjrh
24- O;kl] Hkksyk”kadj ¼1999½ laLd`r Hkk’kk] fnYyh] pkS[kEck fo|kHkou
25. Apte, D.G and Dongre, P.K (1960), Teaching of Sanskrit in Secondary School, Baroda, Acharya
Book Depot.
26. Huparikar ( ) Problems of Sanskrit Teaching
27. Kumar, Krishna (1998) The Child‟s Language and the Teacher-A handbook, New Delhi, National
Book Trust
28. Mishra, K.K (1997) Sanskrit Studies in India, New Delhi, Rashtriya Sanskrit Sansthan
29. National Curriculum Framework, 2005, Position Paper on Teaching of Indian Language, NCERT,
New Delhi
30. Report of Sanskrit Commission (1958) Govt of India, New Delhi
31. Report of Official Language Commission (1958) Govt of India, New Delhi.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 42 -

 PAPER CODE-9108
Course 5&6 - PEDAGOGY OF URDU
Objectives: After completion of the course the student-teachers will be able to:
1. understand the importance and different roles of language;
2. understand the basic concept and the elements of Urdu language;
3. understand the importance of home language and school language and role of mother tongue in
education;
4. understand the importance and role of Urdu language in our country;
5. develop an understanding of the nature of Urdu language system;
6. develop an understanding of various approach of Urdu Language;
7. develop linguistic skills of Urdu language and different teaching skills associated with teaching of
Urdu;
8. understand and use teaching strategies of grammar, composition, poetry, prose and drama in Urdu;
9. use methods, approaches and materials for teaching Urdu at different levels;
10. develop an understanding and use of purpose, concept and various techniques of evaluation in
teaching of Urdu Language;

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT - I: Role and Nature of Language

1. Role of Language in Society: Importance of Language; Language and gender; Language and identity;
Language and power; Language and class (society); Language in School: Medium of instruction in
school and language spoken at home; Centrality of language as means of learning and
communication.

2. Nature of Language
a) Aspect of Linguistic Behaviour: Language as a rule governed behaviour and linguistic variability;
Pronunciation, linguistic diversity and its impact on Urdu pedagogical implication; Speech and
Writing.
b) Linguistic System: The organization of sound; The structure of sentences; The concept of
universal grammar; Nature and structure of meaning; Basic concept in phonology, morphology,
syntax and semantics; Discourse.

UNIT – II Nature, Development and Position of Urdu Language

1. Nature and Development of Urdu Language:

The nature of the subject Urdu and Urdu Education- Urdu as a language of knowledge; Urdu as first,
second and third language; Urdu as mother tongue; Urdu as communicative language; Urdu as Media
language
2. Origin and development of Urdu Language
3. Importance and functions of Urdu Language
4. Relation of Urdu language with other Indian Languages.
5. Role of Urdu language in promoting national integration.
6. Role of Urdu language in Indian Independence movement
2. Position of Urdu Language in India:
1. Position of Urdu in Pre-and post-partition of India.
2. Present position of Urdu in our country.
3. Position of Urdu language in the present educational system as prevalent in the state of Rajasthan.
4. Suggestions for a better place of Urdu language in syllabi.
5. Different forms of Urdu.
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 43 -
6. Urdu at International level;
7. Challenges of teaching and learning Urdu
UNIT –III An overview of Language Teaching with Reference to Urdu Language
1. Different Approaches to Language Learning and Teaching:
2. Philosophical, social and psychological bases of approaches to Language acquisition and Learning;
Inductive and deductive approach to language learning; Whole language approach; Constructive
approach; Multilingual approach to Language Teaching
3. Indian thought on language teaching.
2. Approaches of Teaching Urdu Language:
1. Basic concept and elements of Urdu Language :
Phonetic structure, Morphological structure and Syntactic structure.
2. Linguistic skills of Urdu language and different teaching skills associated with teaching of Urdu:
1. Listening – Art of Listening;
2. Speaking – Pronunciation, Recitation and Punctuation;
3. Reading – Concept, meaning and importance of reading;
4. Writing – Defects of writing skills and their improvement;
5. Sub skills of listening and speaking - Task Materials and resources for developing the listening
and speaking skills : Storytelling, dialogues, situational conversation, role plays, simulations,
speech, games and contexts, language laboratories, pictures, authentic materials and multimedia
resources.
6. Sub skills of reading:
a) Importance of development of reading skills;
b) Aloud and silent reading;
c) Extensive and intensive reading;
d) Study skills, including using thesauruses, dictionary and encyclopedia, etc.
7. Writing:
a) Stages of writing;
b) Process of writing;
c) Formal and informal writing such as poetry, short story, letter, diary, notices, articles, reports,
dialogue, speech, advertisement;
d) Defects of writing skills and their improvement
e) Knowledge of Urdu script such as Khat-e-Naskh, Khat-e-Nastaliq, Khat-e-Shikast;
f) Reference skills;
g) Higher order skills.
UNIT – IV Strategies of Teaching Urdu
1. Basis of Teaching Urdu:
a) Objectives of teaching Urdu at Secondary level;
b) Behavioural objectives : Meaning and Importance of behavioural objectives; Essentials of
behavioural objectives; Determination and Writing behavioural objectives for teaching Urdu;
c) Problems of teaching and learning Urdu and their solution;
d) Value outcomes of teaching Urdu at different levels of education;
e) Various methods of teaching Urdu: Direct Method; Translation Method; Structural Method; Play
way Method; Grammar Method; Bi-lingual Method
2. Teaching strategies of Urdu:
1. Planning of teaching Urdu:
a) Need and Importance of Planning
b) Content Analysis
c) Yearly, Unit and Daily Lesson Plan
2. Teaching of various forms of Urdu:
a) Prose,
b) Poetry – Ghazal, Nazam and other forms of Urdu Poetry,
c) Drama,

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 44 -

 d) Composition, and
e) Grammar
3. Support System of teaching Urdu:
a) Teacher – Qualities and Characteristics of a good Urdu Teacher,
b) Teaching Aids – Verbal aids, Visual aids - Pictorial aids (non-projected, two or three dimensional
aids), Projected aids (still and motion), Audio and Audio – Visual aids etc.;
UNIT – V Evaluation In Teaching Of Urdu
1. Purpose and Concept of Evaluation in Teaching Urdu.
2. Continuous and Comprehensive Evaluation
3. Techniques of Evaluation:
4. Teacher made test
5. Designing examination paper and Blue – Print
6. Development of test items- Various types of test questions (Essay, short answer, and objective types)
and their uses.
7. Preparation of achievement test - its administration, analysis and reporting.
8. Diagnostic testing and remedial Teaching in Urdu.
9. Progress and assessment of development of language;
10. Cloze test, Self evaluation;
11. Peer evaluation;
12. Group evaluation.
Activities
1. Group discussions among student teachers may be arranged on the following topics:
a) Role and importance of Urdu language in promoting national integration.
b) Urdu language and poetry and Indian Independence movement;
c) Challenges of teaching and learning Urdu
d) Difference between Home and the School Language.
e) Difference between spoken and written language‟
f) Mother Tongue and Other Tongue‟
g) Centrality of language as means of learning and communication
2. If possible some Panel discussion or lecture of experts from field may arrange on following topics:
a) Origin and development of Urdu Language
b) Multilingualism as a Resource
c) „War begins when words fail‟
d) Indian thought on language teaching.
e) Urdu as a language of knowledge;
SESSIONAL WORK
Any two of the following:
1. Prepare a report on the status of language given in the Constitution of India and language policies
given in Kothari Commission, NPE-1986 and POA-1992
2. Visit five schools in the neighbourhood and prepare a report on the three language formula being
implemented in the schools.
3. Prepare a report on the challenges of Urdu as a medium of instruction.
4. Prepare a report on the challenges of teaching-learning process
5. Keeping in view the topics given in the Unit, prepare a questionnaire. Interview ten people from
community and write a report on „Position of Urdu language in India‟
6. Analysis of advertisements aired on Radio/Television on the basis of language and gender.
7. Take a few passages from science/ social science/ maths textbooks of Classes VI to VIII and analyse
on the following points:
a) How the different registers of language have been introduced?
b) Does the language clearly convey the meaning of the topic being discussed?
c) Is the language learner-friendly?
d) Is the language too technical?
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 45 -
 e) Does it help in language learning?
Now write a report based on the analysis of above issues.
REFERENCES
1. Afzal Hussain : Fun-e-Taleem aur Tarbeeat; Makazi Maktab Islam,Delhi
2. Afazal Hyssain Fun-e-Ataleem aur Tarbeet Makazi Maktaba IslamDelhi.
3. Ansari Akhtar Ghazai and Dara-e National Council for Promotion of Urdu Langauage, West
Block R.K. Puram, New Delhi.
4. Ansari Akhtar : Ghazal Aur Ghazal ki Taleem; New Delhi. Taraqqi-e-Urdu Board
5. Ansari Akhtar(1950); Studies in Language and Language Teaching, Aligarh, Friends Book House
6. Husain, Aijaz (1975) : Mukhtasar Tareekh-e-Urdu, Urdu Kitab Ghar Delhi
7. Inamullah Sharwani Tadres-e-Zaban-e-Urdu Usmania Book Depot 1, 25,RabindraSaraud Kolkatta.73
8. Maulvi Abdul Quwaid-e-Urdu Anjuman Taraqqi Urdu (Hindi) New Delhi.
9. Moulvi Saleem : Urdu Kaise Padhaen , Chaman Book Depot, Delhi
10. Muenuddin Hum Urdu Kaise Padhen National Council for Promotion of Urdu Language West Block,
RK Puram,New Delhi.
11. Muenuddin Urdu Zaban Ki Tadrees National Council for Promotion of Urdu Language,West Block,
RK Puram, New Delhi.
12. Rasheed Hasan Hum Urdu Kaise Likhaen Maktaba Jamia Limited Jamia Nagar, New Delhi
13. Rasheed Hasan Urdu Imla Maktaba Jamia Limited Jamia Nagar ,New Delhi

PAPER CODE-9109
Course 5&6 - jktLFkkuh dk f'k{k.k 'kkL=
mn~ns”;%& izf'k{k.kkFkhZ bl ikB~;Øe dks i<+us ds mijkUr&
1. jktLFkkuh Hkk"kk ds Lo:i dks tku ldsx a sA
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 46 -
2. jktLFkkuh Hkk"kk dh vyx&vyx Hkwfedkvksa dks tku ldsx a sA
3. jktLFkkuh lh[kus ds rjhds ,oa izfØ;k dks tku ldsaxAs
4. Hkk"kk;h vfHkO;fDr ds izdkjksa dks tku ldsxa sA
5. vuqokn ds egRo ,oa Hkwfedk dks le>uk ldsx a sA
6. fo|kfFkZ;ksa dh Hkk"kk;h l`tukRed {kerk dks igpkuuk ldsaxs rFkk fodflr dj ldsx a sA
7. lkfgR; o Hkk"kk ds lEcU/k dks le> ldsx a sA
8. jktLFkkuh f'k{k.k ds mís';ksa dks tku ldsaxs ,oa mi;ksx esa ys ldsx a sA
9. jktLFkkuh f'k{k.k ds egRo dks le> ldsx a sA
10. fo|ky; esa jktLFkkuh Hkk"kk lEcU/kh xfrfof/k;ksa ds lapkyu dh ;ksX;rk fodflr dj ldsx a sA
11. jktLFkkuh f'k{k.k esa vuqHkwr leL;kvksa ds fujkdj.k gsrq y?kq izk;kstuk,¡] fØ;kRed vuqla/kku vkfn
mik;ksa dks dke esa ysus dh izfØ;k dks tku ldsx a sA
12. jktLFkkuh f'k{k.k esa n`';&J`O; lkexzh rFkk Hkk"kk iz;ksx'kkyk dk mi;ksx tku ldsx
a sA
ikB~;Øe&fo"k;oLrq
I bdkbZ izFke&jktLFkkuh dk vFkZ] egRo] Hkkf"kd leL;k rFkk f'k{k.k mís';
¼1½ jktLFkkuh dk vFkZ] egRo rFkk ekr`Hkk"kk ,oa ekud Hkk"kk dh le>A
¼2½ lafo/kku vkSj f'k{kk lfefr;ksa ds izfrosnuksa esa Hkk"kk dh fLFkfrA
¼3½ Hkkjr dh Hkkf"kd leL;k] f=Hkk"kk lw= rFkk xk¡/kh th }kjk Hkk"kk ds lEcU/k esa O;Dr fd;s fopkjA
¼4½ jktLFkkuh f'k{k.k ds mís'; ,oa O;ogkjxr ifjorZuA
¼5½ jktLFkkuh lkfgR; dk lEizR;; ,oa fo/kk,¡ rFkk ikB~;Øe esa lkfgR; dks i<+uk] i<+kuk ,oa vuqokn
djukA
¼6½ ikB~;Øe esa ehfM;k dh Hkwfedk] egRo] mís'; ,oa izklafxdrkA

II bdkbZ nks&jktLFkkuh Hkk"kk dk oSKkfud Lo:i rFkk Hkk"kk;h O;ogkj ds fofo/k igyw
¼1½ jktLFkkuh Hkk"kk dk oSKkfud Lo:i ¼o.kZ fopkj] 'kCn fopkj ,oa okD; fopkj dh n`f"V ls½
¼2½ jktLFkkuh Hkk"kk dkS'kyksa ds fodkl gsrq ekSf[kd] fyf[kr ,oa l`tukRed vfHkO;fDr dk fodkl
¼3½ jktLFkkuh Hkk"kk vtZu ,oa vf/kxe dk nk'kZfud] lkekftd rFkk eukSoK S kfud vk/kkj
¼4½ jktLFkkuh Hkk"kk lh[kus&fl[kkus dh cgqHkkf"kd n`f"VA
¼5½ Hkk"kk;h O;ogkj ds fofo/k igyw ¼fofHkUu cksfy;ka] {ks=h; Hkk"kk ,oa ekud Hkk"kk½

III bdkbZ r`rh;&jktLFkkuh f'k{k.k ds vk/kkjHkwr dkS'ky] lw= rFkk vU; fo"k;ksa ls lEcU/k
¼1½ jktLFkkuh f'k{k.k ds vk/kkjHkwr dkS'ky& lquuk] cksyuk] i<+uk o fy[kuk ,oa Hkk"kk ds ek/;e ls
l`tukRedrk dk fodkl
¼2½ jktLFkkuh f'k{k.k ds lw= ,oa fl)kUr
¼3½ jktLFkkuh Hkk"kk dk vU; fo"k;ksa ls lEcU/k
¼4½ jktLFkkuh f'k{k.k esa pqukSfr;k¡
IV bdkbZ pkj&jktLFkkuh f'k{k.k dh fofHkUu fo/kk,¡
¼1½ x| f'k{k.k&mís';] fof/k;k¡ ,oa ikB ;kstukA
¼2½ i| f'k{k.k& cks/k ikB] jl ikB ,oa mi;kstuk ikBA ¼cks/k ikB o jl ikB dk fefJr :i½
¼3½ ukVd ,oa ,dkadh f'k{k.k&vfHku;kRed ikB&eaph; fof/kA

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 47 -

¼4½ O;kdj.k ,oa jpuk f'k{k.kA
¼5½ bdkbZ ,oa okf"kZd bdkbZ] nSfud f'k{k.k ;kstuk] bdkbZ tkWp i= rFkk uhy i= dk fuekZ.kA

V bdkbZ ik¡p& jktLFkkuh f'k{k.k esa lgk;d lkexzh ,oa uokpkj

¼1½ n`';&J`O; lkexzh ¼jsfM;ks] Vsyhfotu] vks-,p-ih-] fyXok Qksu] fp=dFkk] VsifjdkWMZj vkfnA
¼2½ Hkk"kk iz;ksx'kkykA
¼3½ lg&laKkRed xfrfof/k;ksa dh :ijs[kk ¼ppkZ] okn&fookn] vUR;k{kjh] fucU/k] ukVd] ,dkadh] lewg
dk;Z½
¼4½ jktLFkkuh f'k{k.k esa uokpkj ¼vfHku;hdj.k] leL;k iwfrZ] dkYifud ys[k vkfn½
¼5½ funkukRed ijh{k.k ,oa mipkjkRed f'k{k.kA

l=h; dk;Z&fuEukafdr esa ls& ¼dksbZ nks½

1- fo|ky; dh fdlh ,d lkfgfR;d xfrfof/k dh ;kstuk fuekZ.k] fØ;kfUofr djuk rFkk izfrosnu rS;kj
djukA
2- jktLFkkuh Hkk"kk;h dkS'ky ¼lquuk] cksyuk] i<+uk] fy[kuk½ ds lh[kus lEcfU/kr pkj&pkj xfrfof/k;k¡
rS;kj dj izfrosnu izLrqr djukA
3- jktLFkkuh Hkk"kk esa iz;qDr vU; Hkk"kkvksa ds 'kCnksa dk ladyu] v/;;u ,oa O;kdj.k dh izdf` r ds
vuqlkj oxhZdj.kA
4- jktLFkkuh f'k{k.k ds nkSjku vkus okyh leL;kvksa ij fØ;kRed vuqla/kku dk fØ;kUo;u dj izfrosnu
rS;kj djukA
lanHkZ iqLrdsa
¼1½ esukfj;k] MkW- eksrhyky ^^jktLFkkuh Hkk"kk ,oa lkfgR;**] jktLFkkuh xzaFkkxkj] tks/kiqjA
¼2½ ukxnk] Hkaojyky] ^^f'k{kk ds uwru vk;ke**] vadqj izdk'ku] mn;iqjA
¼3½ dqekj lqfufr] ^^jktLFkkuh Hkk"kk** dkWyst cqd fMiks] t;iqjA
¼4½ 'kekZ] jktdqekj] ^^jktLFkkuh Hkk"kk vkSj lkfgR;** dkWyst cqd fMiks] t;iqjA
¼5½ Lokeh ujksÙke] ^^jktLFkkuh Hkk"kk** jktLFkkuh xzaFkkxkj] tks/kiqjA
¼6½ yky lhrkjke] ^^jktLFkkuh 'kCn dks"k**] jktLFkkuh xzaFkkxkj] tks/kiqjA
¼7½ Lokeh ujksÙke] ^^jktLFkkuh O;kdj.k** jktLFkkuh xzaFkkxkj] tks/kiqjA
¼8½ pq.M+kor] y{eh dqekjh] ^^ dSpp
s dok ckr** jktLFkkuh xzaFkkxkj] tks/kiqjA
¼9½ frokjh] Hkksyus kFk] ^^Hkk"kk foKku** fdrkc egy] bykgkcknA
¼10½ ukxnk] Hkaojyky ¼2011½ ^^fgUnh Hkk"kk =qfV;ka ,oa mipkj**] Dykfldy ifCyf'kax dEiuh] ubZ fnYyhA
¼11½ ukxnk] Hkaojyky ukxnk] MkW- }kfjdk izlkn ¼2015½ ^^fØ;kRed vuqla/kku ,oa lkaf[;dh**] vadqj
izdk'ku] mn;iqjA
PAPER CODE-9110
Course 5 & 6 - PEDAGOGY OF MATHEMATICS
Objectives: After completion of course the students will be able to-
1. Gain insight into the meaning, nature, scope and objectives of mathematics education.
2. Appreciate mathematics as a tool to engage the mind of every student.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 48 -

3. Understand the process of developing the concepts related to Mathematics.
4. Appreciate the role of mathematics in day to day life.
5. Learn important mathematics: mathematics more than formulas and mechanical procedures.
6. Pose and solve meaningful problems.
7. Construct approriate assessment tools for evaluating mathematics learning.
8. Understand methods and techniques of teaching mathematics.
9. Perform pedagogical analysis of various Topics in mathematics at secondary level.
10. Understand and use I.C.T. in teaching of mathematics.
11. Understand and use continuous and comprehensive evaluation, diagnostic testing and remedial
teaching in Mathematics.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT-I Nature of Mathematics as a Discipline
1. A Mathematics is not merely subject of computations skill , it is much more, it has a logical
structure.
2. Nature of mathematics- building blocks of mathematics ( Concept, objectives, variables, function &
relation, symbolization)
3. Important processes of mathematics-estimation , approximation, understanding or visualizing pattern
representation, reasoning & proof, making connections, mathematical communication.
4. Historical development of mathematics as a discipline Contribution of western and Indian
mathematicians like Ramanujan, Aryabhatt, Bhaskarcharya, Pythogorous and Euclid.
5. Constructivist approach in learning mathematics.

UNIT-II Mathematics as a School Subject

1. Importance of mathematics in school curriculum.
2. Aims and objectives of Teaching mathematics at secondary level. writing objectives in behavioural
terms. Bloom's taxonomy (revised)
3. Correlation of mathematics with other school subjects.
4. Changing trends and goals of teaching mathematics with reference to NCF 2005
5. Concept mapping of themes related to mathematics.

UNIT-III Methodology of Teaching and Learning of Mathematics

1. Nature of concept, concept formation and concept assimilation.
2. Methods of teaching mathematics at secondary level-
a. Lecture cum demonstration
b. Inductive-Deductive
c. Problem Solving
d. Project
e. Heuristic
f. Analytic & Synthetic
3. Techniques of teaching mathematics
a. Oral work
b. Written work
c. Drill work
d. Home assignment
UNIT-IV Pedagogical analysis and mode of learning engagement
1. Pedagogical analysis of the units with reference to concepts, learning outcomes, activities and
learning experiences and evaluation techniques of following content at secondary level-
a. Number system
b. Measures of central tendency

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 49 -

c. congruency and similarity
d. Trigonometrical ratios and identities
e. Area and Volume
f. Profit, loss and partnership
g. Compound interest
h. Graphical representation of data

2. Modes of learning engagement in mathematics

a. Providing opportunities for group activities
b. Group/ Individual Presentation
c. Providing opportunities for sharing ideas
d. Designing different Working Models for concept formation
e. Teaching aids and activities in laboratory work
f. Reflective written assignments

UNIT-V Assessment & Evaluation of Mathematics learning

1. Assessment of critical thinking, logical reasoning and to discourage mechanical manipulation and
rote learning-
a. Planning of evaluation in mathematics
b. Formative, Summative and predictive evaluation in mathematics
c. continuous and compressive evaluation (CCE) in mathematics at secondary level
d. Diagnostic Testing, Remedial Teaching and enrichment programme for:
1. Gifted Learners
2. Slow Learners
3. Learners with Dyslaxcia
4. Difficulties Faced by the Teacher in Teaching of Mathematics and Suggestive Measures to
overcome them.
2. Construction of achievement test/ question paper in mathematics

SESSIONAL WORK
Any two of the following:
1. Preparing a Diagnostic or Achievement Test.
2. Preparing one inovative lesson plan.
3. Conduct at least one Experiment on any topic of mathematics.
4. Prepare Instructional Material for teaching one topic in Mathematics.
5. A term paper on a brief History of one mathematician.
6. Preparing a working model.
7. A project report on any project related to mathematics.

SUGGESTED READINGS
1. Ñ’.k dUgS;ky lDlsuk] ¼2007½ xf.kr f”k{k.k] ;wfuoflZVh cqd gkml] t;iqj
2. eaxy % xf.kr f'k{k.k] vk;Z cqd fMiks] ubZ fnYyh
3. lh/kq % xf.kr f'k{k.k] fouksn iqLrd Hk.Mkj] vkxjk
4. gsrflag c?ksyk] ¼2005½] iquhr izdk”ku] t;iqj
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 50 -
5. ,e-,l- jkor] ¼2009½] fouksn iqLrs iqLrd Hk.Mkj] vkxjk
6. fotsUnz dqekj ekgs”ojh] ¼1997½] yks;y cqd fMiks] esjB
7. ts-,l- usxh] ¼2005½] xf.kr f'k{k.k] fouksn iqLrd Hk.Mkj] vkxj k
8. Aggarwal S.M. : (2005), Teaching of Modern Mathematics, Dhanpat Rai and Sons, Delhi.
9. Aiyangar and Kuppuswami, (1999), N. : A teaching of mathematics in the new education universal
publication.
10. Butler and Wren : (2000), The teaching of Secondary Mathematics, MC Graw Hill Book Company.
11. Cooney, Thomas J. and Others (1975), Dynamics of Teaching Secondary School Mathematics,
Boston : Honghton Mifflin.
12. Grouws, D.A. (ed) (1992) Handbook of Research on Mathematics Teaching and Learning.
13. Jagdguru Swami : (2000), Sri Bharti Krisna Tirthji Vedic mathematics, Moti Lal Banarsids Publisher
Delhi.
14. Kapur, J.N. : (1997), Modern mathematics for teachers, Arya Book Depot., New Delhi.
15. Lester, F.K. (Ed.) (2007). Second Handbook of Research on Mathematics Teaching and Learning,
Charlotte, NC : NCTM & Information Age Publishing.
16. Mager, Robert (1962) Preparing instructional objectives. Palo Alto, CA : Fearon.
17. Marshall, S.P. (1995) Schemes in Problem-solving. NY : Cambridge University Press.
18. Moon, B. & Mayes, A.S. (eds) (1995). Teaching and Learning in Secondary School. London :
Routedge.
19. Mangal, S.K. : (2001) Teaching of Mathematics Prakash Brothers Ludhiana.
20. Nickson, Marilum (2000). Teaching and Learning Mathematics : A Guide to Recent Research and its
Applicantions, NY : Continuum.
21. Numes, T. and Bryant, P. (Eds) (1997). Learning Mathematics : An International Perspective,
Psychology Press.
22. Poly, George (1957) How to solve it, Princeton, NJ : Princeton University Press.
23. Sudhir Kumar, (2006), Teaching of Mathematics.
24. S.M.S.G. & N.M.P. : Text Books Teacher‟s Guides.
25. UNESCO : Trends in Mathematics Teaching
26. Butler, C. H. & Wren, K. H. (1980). The teaching of Secondary Mathematics, New York: McGraw-
Hill Book Comp.
27. Carey L.M. (1975). Measuring and Evaluating School Learning, Boston: Allyn and Bacon.
28. Copeland, R.W. (1979). How Children Learn Mathematics, New York: McMillan Pub. Comp.
29. Dave, R. H. & Saxena, R. C. (1970). Curriculum and Teaching of Maths in Secondary Schools, A
Research Monograph. Delhi: NCERT
30. David Wood (1988). How Children Think and Learn, Oxford U.K.: Blackwell Publishers Ltd.
31. Davis D.R. (1951). The Teaching of Mathematics, London: Addison Wesclyh Press.
32. Intel (2003). Intel innovation in Education, Intel Tech to the Future- Students Work Book
33. J.N. Kapur (1991). Suggested Experiments in School Mathematics, New Delhi: Arya Book Depot
34. Jain, S. L. (1973). Ganit Shikshan, Jaipur: Hindi Granth Academy
35. Joanna O. Masingila & Frank K. Lester (1988). Mathematics via Problem Solving (Student
Resource), New York: Printice Hall Inc.
36. Kapoor, J. N. (1988). Vidyalaya Ganik ke Liye San Prayog, New Delhi: Arya Book Depot
37. Kulshrestha, A. K. (2007). Teaching of Mathematics. Meerut: R. Lall Book Depot
38. Mangal, S. K. (2007). Teaching of Mathematics, New Delhi: Arya Book Depot
39. Shankaran & Gupta, H. N. (1984). Content-cum-Methodology of Teaching Mathematics, New Delhi:
NCERT
40. Thomas A. S. (1993). Mathematics for Elementary Teachers (An Interactive Approach), Florida: HBJ
Publishers
41. The Teaching of Mathematics- Roy Dubush, John Wiley and Sons INC, New York and London, 1963
42. Teaching of Mathematics by Butler and Wren, Mc Graw Hill Book Company, INC, New York and
London, 1960

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 51 -

43. The Teaching of Secondary Mathematics by Claude H. Brown, Harper& Brothers, publisher, New
York (1953)
44. Teaching Mathematics in The Secondary School, Reinhart & Company, INC, New York , 1954.
45. Mathematics Discovery (Volume I and II), George Polya, John Wiley & sons INC, New York and
London,1962 (I), 1955 (II)
46. Teaching Mathematics in Elementary School by C.G. Corle, The Ronalal Press Company, New York,
1964
47. Activity for Junior High School and Middle School Mathematics, Vol. II NCTM, USA, 1999
48. Geometry- History, Culture and Techniques, J.L. Heilborn, Oxford University, Prss-2000
49. Mathematics, Part I and II Textbook for Class XII, 2007, NCERT, New Delhi
50. Mathematics, Part I and II Textbook for Class XI, 2006, NCERT, New Delhi
51. Mathematics, Part I and II Textbook for Class X, 2007, NCERT, New Delhi
52. Mathematics, Part I and II Textbook for Class IX, 2006, NCERT, New Delhi
53. Secondary School Curriculum, 2006, CBSE, New Delhi
54. Mathematics Laboratory in school- towards joyful learning, 2006 CBSE, New Delhi
55. Guidelines for Mathematics Laboratory in school for class IX, 2006 CBSE, New Delhi
56. Guidelines for Mathematics Laboratory in school for class X, 2006 CBSE, New Delhi
57. Mathematics for Class VIII, 2008, NCERT, New Delhi
58. Mathematics for Class VII, 2007, NCERT, New Delhi
59. Mathematics for Class VI, 2006, NCERT, New Delhi
60. National Curriculum Framework- 2005, NCERT
61. Position Paper of NFG on Teaching Mathematics-2005, NCERT
62. Position Paper of NFG on Habitat and Learning-2005, NCERT
63. Position Paper of NFG on Examination Reforms-2005, NCERT
64. Position Paper of NFG on Aims of Education-2005, NCERT
65. Position Paper of NFG on Gender Issues in Education-2005, NCERT
66. Position Paper of NFG on Education and Peacs-2005, NCERT

Journals:
1. Teaching Children Mathematics(TCM), NCTM, USA
2. Mathematics Teaching in the Middle School(MTMS), NCTM, USA
3. Journal of Mathematics Teacher Education, Springer Netherlands

Web Links:
1. Mathematics Thinking and Learning. Philadelphia, USA
2. http://WWW. mathforum.org/dr.math
3. http://WWW. sakshat.ac.in
4. http://web.utk.edu
5. http://www.confluence.org
6. http://www.nationalmathtrail.org
7. http://www.qsh.org/lists/hilites.html
8. http://www.kn.pacbell.com./wired/bluewebn
9. http://www.qsh.org/pr
10. http://www.education-world.com
11. http://www.nctm.org
PAPER CODE-9111
Course 5&6 - PEDAGOGY OF GENERAL SCIENCE
Objectives:-After completion of the course the student teachers will be able to :-

1. Develop understanding of the nature of science.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 52 -

2. Develop understanding of the concept of General Science, its importance and its correlation with
other subjects.
3. Appreciate the contribution of Indian and foreign scientists in development of Science.
4. Develop scientific attitude and scientific creativity among students.
5. Develop an understanding of aims and objectives of General Science.
6. Develop an ability of preparing annual plan, unit plan and daily teaching plan.
7. Develop ability to use various methods and approaches of teaching General Science.
8. Develop an ability to construct an achievement test
9. Use continuous and comprehensive evaluation.
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT – I Nature of Discipline
1. Science as a domain of enquiry and characteristics of a scientific enquiry Observation, steps in
scientific method.
2. Science as a dynamic body of knowledge
3. Values developed through Science
4. Contributions of Eminent Indian and western Scientists. – Jagdish Chandra Bose, Dr. Hargobind
Khorana, Birbal Sahani, Salim Ali, Darwin, Mendel Watson & Crick and Alfred Nobel,

UNIT –II General Science as a Subject in School Curriculum

1. Place and importance of General Science in school curriculum.
2. Correlation of General Science with other subjects.
3. Changing trends and goals of teaching General Science with references to NCF-2005 (position
paper).
UNIT – III Pedagogy of General Science
1. Aims and objectives of teaching General Science.
2. Writing objectives in behavioral terms.
3. Developing scientific attitude, scientific temper and creativity through teaching of General Science.
4. Content cum Pedagogical analysis of following topics of General Science -
a. Matter in our surrounding;
b. Natural resources;
c. Our environment;
d. Heredity and Evolution
e. Force and Priciples of motion

UNIT – IV Planning and Strategies of Teaching-learning General Science-

1. Preparation of annual plan, unit plan and daily teaching plan.
2. Inquiry approach, constructivist approach, investigatory approach, Computer assisted learning,
concept mapping, collaborative learning.
3. Lecture cum demonstration method, Laboratory method, Heuristic method, Project method, problem
solving method, Inductive –deductive method, Panel discussion.
UNIT – V Assessment and evaluation in General Science
1. Concept of Evaluation.
2. Types of items.
3. Construction of achievement test.
4. Home assignment – Planning and evaluation.
5. Importance and construction of diagnostic test, remedial program.
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 53 -
6. Concept and advantages of – Continuous and Comprehensive Evaluation (CCE)

SESSIONAL WORK

Any two of the following:-

1. Life sketch and contribution of any one prominent biological Scientist.
2. Make a scrap Book on any Environmental issue.
3. Planning, conducting and reporting of an investigatory project.
4. Abstract of two papers related to General Science published in reputed journals
5. Identify the difficulties of students in conducting General Science practical.
6. Identify weak students of General Science and plan a diagnostic and remedial programe for them.

REFERENCE

1 dqyJs"B ,l-ih- 2010 'kSf{kdrduhdh ds ewyvk/kkj] fouksniqLrdHk.Mkj] vkxjk

Kulshrasth S.P. 2010 ShakshikTeachiningkaMulAadhar, Vinod ustakBhandar, Agra
2 eaxy ,l-ds- 1996 foKkuf'k{k.k] vk;ZcqdfMiks] ubZfnYyh
Mangal S,K, 1996 VigyanSikshan, Arya Book Depo, New Delhi
3 'kekZvkj-,- 2003 f'k{kk ds rduhdhvk/kkj] vkjykycqdfMiks] esjB
Sharma R.A. 2003 SokshaKaTachnigiAadhar, R.L. Book DepoMeeruth
4 'kekZvkj-lh- 2005 foKkuf'k{k.k] /kuirjk; izdk'kudEiuhizk-fy- ubZfnYyh
Sharma R.C. 2005 VigyanSikshan, DhanpatRoaPrakashan Company Pvt. Ltd. New
Delhi
5 oktis;h] xksyoydj 2007 foKkuf'k{k.k] 'kkjnkiqLrdHk.Mkj] bZykgkckn
,oavU; 2007 GolwalkarVigyanSikshanPustakBhandar,
Vijhayee Allahabad and other

6 Aggrawal J.C. 1990 Curriculum Reforms in India, Dasba House, Delhi

7 Bloom, Benjamin 1965 Taxonomy of Educational objectives. The classification of
and others Educational goals, Handbook 1-
Cognitive Domain. New York, David Mckay Company
Inc.
8 Broudy, Harry and 1966 Examples of Teaching method. Chicago, Second Printing,
Palmer, John R. Rand McNally& Co.
9 Chauhan S.S. 1985 Innovation in teaching learning process, Delhi, Vikas
Publishing House
10 Dale Edgar 1962 Audio Visual Methods in Teaching, New York, Revised
edition Hold, Rivehart and winston.
11 Dani D.N. 1989 “Scientific Attitude and Cognitive Style”, Northern Book
Centre, New Delhi.
12 Dave, R.H. 1969 Taxonomy of Educational objectives & Achievement, testing
London University Press London.
13 Edger. Marlow & 2003 Teaching Science Successfully, Discovery publishing House,
Rao, D.B. New Delhi
14 Gupta S.K. 1983 Technology of Science Education Vikas Publishing House Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 54 -
15 Jenkins, E.W. 2000 Innovation in Science & Technology Education Vol. VII
UNESCO, Parco
16 Kulsherstha, S.P. 1988 Teaching of General Science, Loyal Book Depot. Meerut.
17 NCERT National Curriculum Framework-2005
18 NCERT Position Paper of NCF on Teaching of Science-2005
19 Sharma R.C. 2005 Science Teaching, Dhanhat Rai publishing Company (P.) Ltd.
New Delhi
20 Sharma, L.M. 1977 Teaching of Science & Life Science, Dhanpat Rai & Sons,
Delhi
21 Singh U.K. 2003 Science Education, Common wealth Publishers Daryaganj,
&Nayab, A.K. New Delhi
22 Sood J.K. 1987 Teaching Life Science, Kobli Publisher, Chandigarh
23 UNESCO Source Book for Science Teaching.
24 Vadav, M.S. 2000 Modern methods of teaching Science, Anmol Publisher, Delhi
25 Venkataih S. 2001 Science Education in 21st Century, Anmol Publishers, Delhi

PAPER CODE-9112
Course 5&6 - PEDAGOGY OF PHYSICS
Objectives: On completion of the course the student teachers will be able to:

1. Understand the nature of Science as discipline and Physics as a branch of Science

2. Appreciate the contribution of Indian and Foreign Physicists in the development of Physics.
3. Acquire the understanding of the methods and processes of science that lead to exploration, generation
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 55 -
and validation of knowledge in science/physics.
4. Appreciate the issues at the interface of science, technology and society
5. Develop the skill of planning teaching learning activities.
6. Develop competencies in
(a) Selection and use of teaching methods, approaches and devices.
(b) Selection, preparation and use of cost effective teaching aids.
(c) Inculcation of scientific attitude, scientific temper and science related values.
7. Understand role and limitations of language in physics
8. Organise interactive child centered teaching learning by understanding of the learner
9. Conduct pedagogical analysis for planning of instruction
10. Prepare teaching plan using process skills.
11. Prepare, administer and analyze achievement tests for evaluation of learning outcomes of Physics

COURSE CONTENT
UNIT -I Nature of Science as Discipline
1. Nature of Science
2. Developmental perspectives of science.
3. Scientific attitude and Scientific Literacy,
4. Impact of Science on Society and Vice Versa
5. Contribution of eminent Indian and Foreign Scientists viz C.V.Raman, Vikram Sarabhai, Homi
Jehangir Bhabha, A.P.J.Abdul Kalam , Albert Einstein, Issac Newton

UNIT-II Physics as a Subject in school Curriculum

1. Essential Characteristic of Physics as a subject
2. Importance of Physics in School Curriculum
3. Correlation of Physics with other subjects
4. Physics in daily life.
5. Changing trends and goals of teaching physics with references to NCF 2005 (position paper)

UNIT-III Pedagogy of Physics

1. Aims and Objectives of Teaching learning Physics
2. Content cum Pedagogical analysis of following topics of Physics- Sound, Light, Force , Laws of
Motion, Gravitation, Thermodynamics.

UNIT- IV Planning and Strategies of Teaching Learning Physics

1. Preparation of Annual Plan, Unit plan, Daily Teaching Plan.
2. Methods of Teaching Physics
Lecture cum demonstration method; Inductive – deductive method; Heuristic method; Panel
discussion; Project method; Problem solving method ; Brain storming;
3. Constructivist approach, Investigatory approach, Computer Aided Instruction

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 56 -

UNIT-V Assessment and Evaluation
1. Concept of continuous and comprehensive evaluation, Formative and Summative Evaluation
2. Different types of questions, Blue print and construction of Achievement Test.
3. Home Assignment-Planning & evaluation
4. Diagnostic and Remedial measures
5. Assessment of practical work in Physics

SESSIONAL WORK
Any two of the following:
1.Prepare list of famous Physicists in chronological order from all over the world, starting from Galileo
and write major contributions of any one these physicists.
2. Life history and contribution in Physics of one noble prize winner in Physics
3. Report of an experimental project to be completed.
4. Collection of current issues related to science from news papers with comments.
5. Identify weak students in Physics of any one class and prepare a diagnostic test of physics and plan for
remedial teaching
6. Construction, administration, scoring and item analyses of examination Paper of Physics set on Board
Pattern.

REFERENCE BOOKS
Aicken,Frederick(1984).The Nature of Science,London: Heinemann Educational Books.
Anderson R.D. (1970). Developing Children’s Thinking Through Science,New Delhi: Prentice Hall.
Chauhan, S.S. (2000). Innovation in Teaching Learning ProcessNew Delhi: Vikas Publishing House Pvt.
Ltd.
Das, R. C. (1985).Science Teaching in Schools New Delhi: Sterling Publishers Pvt. Ltd.
Dave , R.H.( ).Taxonomy of Educational Objectives and Achievement Testing,London: London
University Press.
Edigar M. and Rao D.B. (1996). Science Curriculum,New Delhi: Discovery Publishing House.
Gronlund,Norman,E(1968). Constructing Achievement Tests, New York: Prentice Hall Inc.
Gupta, N.K. (1997). Research in Teaching of Science,New Delhi: APH Publishing Corporation.
Kochar, S.K. (1997). Methods and Techniques of Teaching,New Delhi: Sterling Publishers Pvt. Ltd.
Maitre, K. (1991). Teaching of Physics,New Delhi: Discovery Publishing House.
Mukalel, J.C. (1998). Creative Approaches to Classroom Teaching,New Delhi: Discovery Publishing
House.
Prakash, R. and Rath, T.N. (1996).Emerging Trends in Teaching of Physics, New Delhi: Kanisha
Publishers.
Radha Mohan (2003). Innovative Science Teaching for Physical ScienceTeachers,New Delhi:Prentice
Hall Pvt.Ltd.
Rao, D.B. (1997). Reflections on Scientific Attitudes,New Delhi: Discovery Publishing Hosue.
Romey, W.D. (1968). Inquiry Technique for Teaching of Science,New Jersey: Prentice Hall.
Sharma, R.C. (1981).Modern Science Teaching,Delhi: Dhanpat Rai and Sons.
Sharma, R. C. (1990). Modern Science Teaching, New Delhi: Dhanpat Rai & Sons Singh,Hemlata
(1990).Scientific Temper and Education,New Delhi:Common Wealth Publishers.
Sood, J.K. (2005). Teaching of Science -A Book of Methods,Chandigarh: Kohli publishers.
Sood,J.K.(1989). New Directions in Science Teaching, Chandigarh:Kohli Publisher.
Sood,J.K.(2004-5).Teaching Science for understanding and Application,Agra:Vinod Pustak Mandir.
Thurber, W. A. & Collette, A. T. (1967),Teaching Science in Today’s Secondary Schools, New Delhi:
Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.
UNESCO (1980). Handbook for Sc

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 57 -

 PAPER CODE-9113
Course 5 & 6 - PEDAGOGY OF CHEMISTRY
Objectives: After completion of the course the student teacher will be able to-

1. Develop an understanding of the Nature of Science.

2. Develop an understanding of the nature of Chemistry and its correlation with other subjects.
3. Develop scientific attitude and scientific Literacy

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 58 -

4. Develop an understanding of Pedagogy of Chemistry
5. Appreciate recent achievement of chemistry and the contribution of Indian and Foreign Scientists in
development of Science.
6. Develop an understanding of aims and objectives of Chemistry teaching.
7. Develop an ability of preparing annuals plan, unit plan and lesson plan.
8. Develop an ability to plan and conduct innovative projects in chemistry.
9. Develop an ability to construct and use an achievement test, diagnostic test and remedial measures in
Chemistry.
10. Use continuous and comprehensive evaluation.

COURSE CONTENT
UNIT-I Nature of Discipline
1. Nature of Science
2. Developmental perspectives of science.
3. Scientific attitude and Scientific Literacy,
4. Impact of Science on Society and Vice Versa
5. Contribution of eminent Indian and Foreign Scientists viz Neel Bohr, Marry Curie, C.V. Raman,
Khurana, Ruther ford.

UNIT-II Chemistry as a Subject in school Curriculum

1. Essential Characteristic of Chemistry as a subject
2. Importance of Chemistry in School Curriculum
3. Correlation of Chemistry with other subjects
4. Recent Scientific achievements in Chemistry (God Particle Boson, New elements in periodic table.
Fuel form Bio-waste, Liquid air as a fuel)
5. Chemistry in daily life.

UNIT-III Pedagogy of Chemistry

1. Aims and Objectives of Teaching learning chemistry
2. Content cum Pedagogical analysis of following topics of Chemistry
Atofmic Structure; Radioactivity ; Chemical Bonding; Periodic Table; Hard and Soft water;
Aromatic Compounds
UNIT- IV Planning and Strategies of Teaching Learning Chemistry
1. Preparation of Annual Plan, Unit plan, Daily Teaching Plan.
2. Methods of Teaching Chemistry
Lecture cum demonstration method; Inductive – deductive method; Heuristic method; Panel
discussion; Project method; Problem solving method ; Brain storming;
3. Constructivist approach, Investigatory approach, Computer Aided Instruction
UNIT-V Assessment and Evaluation
1. Concept of continuous and comprehensive evaluation, Formative and Summative Evaluation
2. Different types of questions, Blue print and construction of Achievement Test.
3. Home Assignment-Planning & evaluation
4. Diagnostic and Remedial measures
5. Assessment of practical work in Chemistry

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 59 -

 SESSIONAL WORK
Any Two from following –
Practicum No. 1 is compulsory for all
1. Preparation of kit for Demonstration of five experiments on any Topic related to chemistry covered in
the syllabus of class VI to X.
2. Preparation of a low cost apparatus/Improvised apparatus. (Other than submitted during internship)
3. Prepare and report any one project in chemistry.
4. Identification of Protein, Carbohydrate, Fat in a given substance.
5. Identification of Adulteration in some food article such as Ghee, Oil, Milk, Red Chilli powder,
Turmeric powder and Pulses etc.

REFERENCES
Aggrawal J.C.(1990), Curriculum Reforms in India, Dasba House Delhi.
Carleton, R.H. – Chemistry for new age
Chauhan S.S. (1985), Innovation in teaching learning Process, Delhi, Vikas Publishing House.
Dani D.N. (1989), "Scientific Attitude and Cognitive Style", Northern Book Centre, New Delhi.
Das R.C. (1985), Science Teaching in School, Sterling Publishers Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
Das R.C., Passi B.K. & Singh, L.C. (1975) Effectiveness of Microteaching in Training f Teachers,
NCERT, Delhi
Geoffrey, Neuss, Chemistry course companion.
Gupta, S.K. ((1983). Technology of Science Education Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
Jenkins, E.W. (2000), Innovation in science and Technology Education Vol. VII, UNESCO, Parco
Mangal, S.K. (1995), Teaching of Phsycial and Life Science, AVG Book Depot, KarolBagh
Mishra, D.C. (2008), Teaching of Chemistry, Sahitya Prakashan Agra.
Mittal, Arun (2004), Teaching of Chemistry, Efficient Offset Pvt.
Morrison & Boyd – Organic Chemistry VI Edition
Natrajan, C. (Ed.) (1997), Activity based foundation course on Science Technology and Society Homi
Bhatia Centre for science Education, Mumbai.
NCERT, National Curriculum Framework-2005
NCERT, Position Paper of NCF on Teaching of Sciene-2005.
Nuffield, Chemistry Laboratory Investigation
Pandey (2003), Major Issues in Science Teaching, Sumit Publication , New Delhi.
Richardson John. S. – Science Teaching in Secondary Schools
Saxena, N.R. and Oberoi, S.C. – Technology of Teaching
Sharma R.C. (2006), Modern Science Teaching, Dhanpat Rai Publications, New Delhi.
Sharma, B.L. and Saxena V.M. Teaching of Chemistry
Sharma, H.S. Teaching of Chemistry
Singh, Yogesh (2003) Rasaya Shikstan, APH Publishing Corp.
Their, DH, (1973) Teaching Elementary School Science A Laboratory Approach Steering Publication
Pvt. Ltd.
Thurber, W.A. and Collets A.T.- Teaching Secondary Schools.
UNESCO – Source Book for Science Teaching.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 60 -

Vaidya N., Science Teaching for 21st Centaury (1999)] Deep & Deep Publications.
Vaidya, N. – The impart Science Teaching
West. J. – New Oxford Modern Science Chemistry
Yadav, M.S. (2003) Teaching of Chemistry, Amol Publication

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 61 -

 PAPER CODE-9114
Course 5&6 - PEDAGOGY OF BIOLOGY
Objectives: - After completion of the course the student teachers will be able to :-

1. Develop understanding of the nature of science.

2. Develop understanding of the concept of Biology, its importance and its correlation with other
subjects.
3. Appreciate the contribution of Indian and foreign Biologists in development of Biology
4. Develop scientific attitude and scientific creativity among students.
5. Develop an understanding of aims and objectives of Biology.
6. Develop an ability of preparing annual plan, unit plan and daily teaching plan.
7. Develop ability to use various methods and approaches of teaching Biology.
8. Develop an ability to construct an achievement test
9. Use continuous and comprehensive evaluation.

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT – I Nature of Discipline

1. Science as a domain of enquiry and characteristics of a scientific enquiry. Observation, steps in

scientific method.
2. Science as a dynamic body of knowledge
3. Values developed through Science
4. Contributions of Eminent Indian and western Biologists. – Jagdish Chandra Bose, Dr. Hargobind
Khorana, Birbal Sahani, Salim Ali, Darwin, Mendel and Watson & Crick.

UNIT –II Biology as a Subject in School Curriculum

1. Place and importance of Biology in school curriculum.

2. Correlation of Biology with other subjects.
3. Changing trends and goals of teaching Biology with references to NCF-2005 (position paper).

UNIT – III Pedagogy of Biology

1. Aims and objectives of teaching Biology.

2. Writing objectives in behavioral terms.
3. Developing scientific attitude, scientific temper and creativity through teaching of Biology.
4. Content cum Pedagogical analysis of following topics of Biology.
a) Diversity of living organism
b) Biological Classification
c) Genetics and Evolution
d) Ecology and Environment

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 62 -

UNIT – IV Planning and Strategies of teaching-learning Biology-

1. Preparation of annual plan, unit plan and daily teaching plan.

2. Inquiry approach, constructivist approach, investigatory approach, Computer assisted learning,
concept mapping, collaborative learning.
3. Lecture cum demonstration method, Laboratory method, Heuristic method, Project method, problem
solving method, Inductive –deductive method, Panel discussion.

UNIT –V Assessment and evaluation in Biology

1. Concept of Evaluation.
2. Types of items.
3. Construction of achievement test.
4. Home assignment – Planning and evaluation.
5. Importance and construction of diagnostic test, remedial program.
6. Concept and advantages of – Continuous and Comprehensive Evaluation (CCE)

SESSIONAL WORK

Any two of the following:-

1. Life sketch and contribution of any one prominent biological Scientist.
2. Make a scrap Book on any Environmental issue.
3. Planning, conducting and reporting of an investigatory project.
4. Abstract of two papers related to Biology published in reputed journals
5. Identify the difficulties of students in conducting biology pracitcals.
6. Identify weak students of biology and plan a diagnostic and remedial programme for them.

REFERENCE

1 dqyJs"B ,l-ih- 2010 'kSf{kdrduhdh ds ewyvk/kkj] fouksniqLrdHk.Mkj] vkxjk

Kulshrasth S.P. 2010 ShakshikTeachiningkaMulAadhar, Vinod PustakBhandar, Agra

2 eaxy ,l-ds- 1996 foKkuf'k{k.k] vk;ZcqdfMiks] ubZfnYyh

Mangal S,K, 1996 VigyanSikshan, Arya Book Depo, New Delhi
3 'kekZvkj-,- 2003 f'k{kk ds rduhdhvk/kkj] vkjykycqdfMiks] esjB
Sharma R.A. 2003 SokshaKaTachnigiAadhar, R.L. Book DepoMeeruth
4 'kekZvkj-lh- 2005 foKkuf'k{k.k] /kuirjk; izdk'kudEiuhizk-fy- ubZfnYyh
Sharma R.C. 2005 VigyanSikshan, DhanpatRoaPrakashan Company Pvt. Ltd. New
Delhi
5 oktis;h] xksyoydj 2007 foKkuf'k{k.k] 'kkjnkiqLrdHk.Mkj] bZykgkckn
,oavU; 2007 GolwalkarVigyanSikshanPustakBhandar,
Vijhayee Allahabad
and other
6 Aggrawal J.C. 1990 Curriculum Reforms in India, Dasba House, Delhi

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 63 -

7 Bloom, Benjamin 1965 Taxonomy of Educational objectives. The classification of
and others Educational goals, Handbook 1-
Cognitive Domain. New York, David Mckay Company
Inc.

8 Broudy, Harry and 1966 Examples of Teaching method. Chicago, Second Printing, Rand
Palmer, John R. McNally& Co.

9 Chauhan S.S. 1985 Innovation in teaching learning process, Delhi, Vikas Publishing
House
10 Dale Edgar 1962 Audio Visual Methods in Teaching, New York, Revised edition
Hold, Rivehart and winston.
11 Dani D.N. 1989 “Scientific Attitude and Cognitive Style”, Northern Book Centre,
New Delhi.

12 Dave, R.H. 1969 Taxonomy of Educational objectives & Achievement, testing London
University Press London.

13 Edger. Marlow & 2003 Teaching Science Successfully, Discovery publishing House, New
Rao, D.B. Delhi
14 Gupta S.K. 1983 Technology of Science Education Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.,
New Delhi
15 Jenkins, E.W. 2000 Innovation in Science & Technology Education Vol. VII UNESCO,
Parco
16 Kulsherstha, S.P. 1988 Teaching of Biology, Loyal Book Depot. Meerut.

17 NCERT National Curriculum Framework-2005

18 NCERT Position Paper of NCF on Teaching of Science-2005
19 Sharma R.C. 2005 Science Teaching, Dhanhat Rai publishing Company (P.) Ltd. New
20 Sharma, L.M. 1977 Delhi
Teaching of Science & Life Science, Dhanpat Rai & Sons, Delhi
21 Singh U.K. 2003 Science Education, Common wealth Publishers Daryaganj, New
&Nayab, A.K. Delhi
22 Sood J.K. 1987 Teaching Life Science, Kobli Publisher, Chandigarh
23 UNESCO Source Book for Science Teaching.
24 Vadav, M.S. 2000 Modern methods of teaching Science, Anmol Publisher, Delhi
25 Venkataih S. 2001 Science Education in 21st Century, Anmol Publishers, Delhi

PAPER CODE-9115
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 64 -
 Course 5&6 - PEDAGOGY OF HOME SCIENCE
Objectives : After completion of the course the student teachers will be able to –
1. Develop an understanding of the Nature of Science and Home Science.
2. Develop an understanding of the importance of Home Science and its correlation with other subjects.
3. Develop scientific attitude and creativity among students.
4. Develop an understanding of aims and objectives of teaching Home Science.
5. Develop an understanding of pedagogy of Home Science.
6. Develop an ability of preparing annual plan, unit plan and daily teaching plan.
7. Develop an understanding of various methods and approaches of teaching Home Science at Senior
Secondary level.
8. Develop an understanding of continuous and comprehensive evaluation.
9. Develop an ability to construct an achievement test, diagnostic test and remedial measures.

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT-I Nature of Discipline

1. Nature of Science.
2. Concept, Nature, and Scope of Home Science.
3. Developmental perspective of Home Science.
4. Development of Scientific attitude and Fostering Creativity through Home Science.
5. Contribution of Eminent Indian Home Scientists – Dr. Rajammal P. Devadas, Dr. Hansa ben J.
Mehta, Dr. Durga bai Deulkar and Dr. S. Ananda Lakshmy.

UNIT –II Home Science as a Subject in School Curriculum

1. Essential Characteristics of Home Science as a subject.
2. Importance of Home Science in school curriculum.
3. Correlation of Home Science with other subjects.
4. Changing goals in teaching home science.

UNIT-III Pedagogy of Home Science

1. Aims and objectives of teaching Home Science.
2. Content cum Pedagogical analysis of the following topics of Home Science-
(a) Meal planning
(b) Food adultration.
(c) Common childhood diseases
(d) Consumer Problems
(e) Fibres and its Classification.

UNIT-IV Planning and Strategies

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 65 -

1. Annual plan, unit plan, daily teaching plan, Concept and Importance.
2. Methods of teaching Home Science: Lecture cum demonstration method, Laboratory method, Project
method, Panel discussion, Problem solving, , Role play, Brain storming.
3. Constructivist approach, Investigatory approach, Computer assisted instruction.

UNIT-V Assessment and Evaluation

1. Concept of Evaluation.
2. Concept and advantages of Continuous and Comprehensive Evaluation.
3. Different types of questions, Blue print and Construction of Achievement Test.
4. Importance and construction of Diagnostic test and Remedial measures.
5. Evaluation of practical work in Home Science.
6. Home assignment-Planning and Evaluation.

SESSIONAL WORK
Any two of the following –
1. Life sketch of an eminent Home Scientist.
2. Abstract of two published papers related to Home Science in reputed Journals.
3. Any hand made preparation of stitching / embroidery, painting, tie and dye and batik etc.
4. Identify weak students of Home Science and plan a diagnostic and remedial programme for them
5. Prepare a scrap book on current issues highlighted by media related to Home Science.
6. Any one Best out of waste‟ preparation and submission.

REFERENCES

1- 'kekZ jek] ¼2006½ % x`g foKku f”k{k.k] t;iqj] xks;y ifCyds”kUlA

2- 'kekZ vkj-lh- ¼2005½ % foKku f”k{k.k] ubZ fnYyh] /kuirjk; izdk”ku dEiuh izk-fy-A
3- 'kekZ vkj-,- ¼1994½ % ikB~;Øe fodkl] esjB] bZxy cqDl bUVjus”kuyA
4- 'kekZ jek ,oa feJk ,e-ds- ] ¼2009½ % x`g foKku f”k{k.k] ubZ fnYyh] vtqZu ifCyf”kx gkmlA
5- 'kekZ 'kdqUryk ¼2007½ % x`g foKku f”k{k.k] t;iqj] viksyks izdk”ku A
6- 'kSjh th-ih- ,oa lju Mh-ih- ¼1991½ % x`g foKku f”k{k.k] vkxjk] fouksn iqLrd efUnjA
7- lqf[k;k ,l-ih- ,oa egjks=k ih-oh- ¼1976½] x`g foKku f”k{k.k] paMhx<+ ] gfj;k.kk fgUnh xzUFk vdknehA
8- 'kekZ jktdqekjh ,oa 'kekZ] fu:iek ¼2014½ x`g foKku dk f”k{k.k 'kkL=] vkxjk] jk/kk izdk”ku efUnj izk -fy-A
9- vLFkkuk] ,l-vkj- ¼2007½ ^x`g foKku dk v/;kiu*]vkxjk] y{ehukjk;.k vxzoky izdk”ku A
10- -dqekjh] MkW- foeys”k ¼2007½ ^x`g foKku f”k{k.k*]ubZ fnYyh] fMLdojh ifCyf”kax gkml] A
11- 'kekZ] Jherh jktdqekjh o frokjh] Jherh vatuk ¼2006½ x`g foKku f”k{k.k] vkxjk] jk/kk izdk”ku efUnj]
12- Okktis;h] xksyoydj ,oa vU; ¼2007½ % foKku f”k{k.k] bykgkckn] 'kkjnk iqLrd Hk.MkjA
13- Dale Edgar (1962) Audio Visual Methods in Teaching, New York, Revised edition Hold Rivehart and
Winston.
14- Dars, R.R. and Ray Binita (1979) “Teaching of Home Science”, New Delhi, Sterling Publisher Pvt.
Ltd.
15- Devdas R.P. (1976) Methods of Teaching Home Science, Coimbatore, Poineer Press.
16- Mangal S.K. (1996), Science Teaching, New Delhi, Arya Book Depot.
17- Sharma R.C. (2005), Science Teaching, New Delhi, Dhanpat Rai Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd.
18- Sood J.K. (1987), Teaching Life Sciences, Chandigarh, Kohli Publishers.

PAPER CODE-9116
Course 5&6 - PEDAGOGY OF COMPUTER SCIENCE
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 66 -
Objectives: After completion of course the student teacher will be able to-
1. Gain insight into the nature and scope of Computer Science education.
2. Understand Computer as a tool to engage the mind of the student.
3. Understand the concepts related to Computer science.
4. Explain the role of computer science in day to day life.
5. Develop an understanding of the importance of Computer Science and its correlation with other
subjects.
6. Develop an understanding of aims and objectives of teaching computer science learning.
7. Develop an understanding of pedagogical computer science at school level.
8. Develop an understanding of methods and techniques of teaching computer science.
9. Develop an ability of preparing annual plan, unit plan and daily teaching plan.
10. Understand continuous and comprehensive evaluation in Computer science.
11. Develop an ability to construct an achievement test, diagnostic test and remedial measures.

COURSE CONTENT
UNIT –I Nature of Discipline and subjects
1. Nature of Science, NCF (2005) position paper on science
2. Nature of Computer science as a subject
a) Concepts and scope of computer science.
b) Generation, Characteristics and Uses of computer.
c) Classification of Computer.
d) Development of scientific attitude and fostering creativity and logical thinking through computer
science.
e) Contribution of eminent scientists and IT personalities – Charles Babbage, Jean Bartik, Hal
Abelson, Larry Page and Sergey Brin, Mark Zuckerberg, Tim Berners-Lee etc.

UNIT –II Computer Science as a Subject in School Curriculum

1. NCF, 2005 position paper of computer science.
2. Importance of Computer Science in school curriculum.
3. Correlation of Computer Science with other school subjects
4. Social needs of computer education.

UNIT –III Pedagogical analysis and mode of learning engagement of the following topic-
1. Aims and objectives of teaching computer science at school level
2. Pedagogical analysis of the following content with reference to concepts, learning outcomes,
activities and learning experiences and evaluation -
a) Computer System
b) Measures of Memory
c) Binary Number system
d) Processor
e) Windows Operating System
f) Application software

3. Modes of learning engagement in Computer Science

a) Providing opportunities for group activities through networking

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 67 -

 b) Group/ Individual Presentation through ICT
c) Providing opportunities for sharing ideas using internet
d) Teaching aids and activities in laboratory work
e) Reflective written assignments

UNIT –IV Planning and strategies of Teaching Computer Science

3. Methods- Inductive and Deductive, Lecture cum Demonstration, Problem Solving, Project,
Laboratory, Searching and surfing, E-Learning.
4. Techniques and approaches of teaching computer science- CAI, Inquiry approach, Investigatory
approach
3. Team Teaching, panel discussion, seminar and workshop.
4. Annual Plan, Unit Plan, Daily Teaching Plan: concepts and features.
5. Digital teaching Planning : Meaning, Process and Importance

UNIT- V Evaluation in computer science

1. Concept of evaluation
2. Concept and Advantages of Continuous and comprehensive evaluation (CCE).
3. Achievement test (Oral, Written and Practical) and attributes of good achievement test and
construction of achievement test.
4. Importance and Construction of Diagnostic test and conducting remedial program.
5. Home assignment – Planning and evaluation.
6. Online testing.
SESSIONAL WORK
Any two of the following-
1. Life sketch of an eminent scientist / IT personalities
2. Access and reporting an E-learning content using internet educational resources.
3. Developing Digital teaching plan.
4. Abstract of two published papers related to Computer Science in reputed Journals.
5. A term paper on a topic related to computer science.
6. Analysis of difficulties of students in practical work of computer science.
7. Identify weak students in computer science and diagnose their difficulties

REFERENCE
1. Apter,Michael,J.(1968).The New Technology of Education.London:MacMillan
2. Hunt, R. and Shelley, J. (1988) : “Computers and Common Sense”, PHI Publication, Delhi.
3. J.C. Aggarwal,(2004)Principles, Methods&Techniques of teaching ,Vikas Pub House PVT LTD
4. Mehra,Vandana(2000)Educational Technology,New Delhi:S S Publishers
5. Mukhopadhaya(2005)Education Technology Knowledge Assessment,New Delhi:Shipra Publications
6. Romesh Verma;Suresh Sharma,(1998)Modern trends in Teaching Technology,Anmol Publications
New Delhi
7. Sharma,L.(2000)Computer Education .Ferozpur CanttL:Wintech Publications

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 68 -

8. Singh,Arjinder(2009).Modern Approach to Computer Education.Jalandhar:Modern Publisher
9. Singh, Tarsem(2009).Basic Computer Education .Ludhiana:Tondon Brothers
10. Sinha, P.K. (1990): “Computer Fundamentals”, New Delhi: BPB Publications.
11. Subramaniam. N. (1988): “Introduction to computers. New Delhi : Tata McGraw Hill.
12. Yashpal,(2004) Methods of Teaching,Sanjay Prakashan.New Delhi

Web Links
1. http://code.org/educate/20hr
2. www.computingataeschool.org.uk/.../case...
3. Csta.acm.org/.../CSmethodologyCoureSY
4. www.cs.manchester.ac.uk/study/.../course
5. www.ucd.ie/.../problembasedlerning/
6. www.researchgate.net/.../what_are_the_best_methods
7. www.informatics-europe.org/.../research_
8. page.mi.fu-berlin.del/…/1994-17.pdf
9. www.csd.cs.cmu.edu/colloquium/
10. thevirtualexplorer.blogspot.com/…/
11. www.crito.uci.edu/tlc/

PAPER CODE-9117
Course 5&6 - PEDAGOGY OF SOCIAL SCIENCE
Objectives: After completion of the course the student teachers will be able to –

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 69 -

1. Develop an understanding of the Nature of Social Science.
2. Develop an understanding of the importance of Social Science and its correlation with other subjects.
3. Understand the origin and development of Social Science.
4. Develop an understanding of aims and objectives of teaching Social Science.
5. Develop an understanding of pedagogy of Social Science.
6. Develop an ability of preparing annual plan, unit plan and daily teaching plan.
7. Develop an understanding of various methods and approaches of teaching Social Science at
Secondary level.
8. Develop an understanding of continuous and comprehensive evaluation.
9. Develop an ability to construct an achievement test, diagnostic test and remedial teaching.

COURSE CONTENT
UNIT-I Nature of Discipline-
1. Nature of Social Science, NCF (2005.) position paper of social science.l
2. Concept, Nature, Scope and Importance of Social Science.
3. Developmental perspective of Social Science.
4. Eminent Social reformists: Raja Ram Mohan Rai, Swami DayanandSaraswati, VinobaBhave,
Abraham Linkon and Nelson Mandela.

UNIT – II Social Science as a Subject in School Curriculum-

1. Need and Importance of Social Science at secondary level.
2. Correlation of Social Science with other subjects – History, Geography, Political science, Economics,
Art, Literature, Science and Mathematics.
3. Scope of Social Science – Social Culture, Social Identity, Resource and Development.

UNIT-III Pedagogy of Social Science –

1. Aims and objectives of teaching Social Science.
2. Pedagogical analysis of the following topics of Social Science-
a) World war and Liberation Struggle.
b) Khilafat and Non-Cooperation Movement.
c) Movements of peasants, workers and tribals.
d) Patterns of Urbanization.
e) Migration and the growth of towns.
f) Social change and urban life.

UNIT-IV Planning and Strategies –

1. Annual plan, unit plan, daily teaching plan, Concept and Features.
2. Social Survey, Observation, Case Study.
3. Methods of teaching Social Science: Lecture cum demonstration method, Project method, Story
Telling, Role Playing, Supervised Study, Source Method, Discovery and Socialized Recitation
Method, Dramatization, Field Trips.
4. Constructivist approach, Investigatory approach, Computer assisted instruction,
UNIT-V Assessment and Evaluation –
1. Concept of Evaluation.
2. Concept and advantages of Continuous and Comprehensive Evaluation.
3. Different types of questions, Blue print and Construction of Achievement Test.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 70 -

4. Importance and construction of Diagnostic test and Remedial teaching.
5. Different Evaluation tools and techniques – Observation, Written Test, Open Book Test.

SESSIONAL WORK
Any two of the following –
1. Abstract of two published papers related to Social Science in reputed Journals.
2. Identify the students with less than 60% marks in Social Science, diagnose their difficulties and
suggest appropriate remedial measures.
3. Preparationof a scrap book related to the current issues of Social Science.
4. Term paper on any one Topic/ Issues related to Social Science.
5. Preparing a Radio or TV script related to current Social Science issue.

REFERENCES

1- tSu] vehpUn ¼1983½ % lkekftd Kku f”k{k.k] t;iqj jktLFkku fgUnh xzUFk vdknehA
2- 'kekZ] ch-,y- ekgs”ojh ¼2003½ % lkekftd Kku f”k{k.k] esjB vkj- yky cqd fMiksA
3- 'kekZ vkj- ,- ¼2003½% lkekftd Kku f”k{k.k] esjB vkj- yky cqd fMiksA
4- flag d.kZ ¼2004½% lkekftd foKku f”k{k.k] f[keiqj xksohUn izdk”kuA
5- R;kxh] xq:”kj.knkl ¼1985½ % lkekftd foKku f”k{k.k] vkxjk] fouksn iqLrd efUnjA
6- Aggrawal, J.C. (1994); Teaching of Social Study, New Delhi :VikasPublishing House Pvt.Ltd.
7. Aggrawal, J.C. (1989); Teaching of Social Study, New Delhi : (A Practical Approach)Vikas
Publishing House Pvt.Ltd.
8. Bening&Bening (1952) : Teaching the Social Studies in Secondary Schools, Bombay, Tata Mekgra
hills Publishing Company.
9. Bhattacharya, S. and D.R. Darji (1966); Teaching of Social Studies in Indian Schools. Baroda:
Acharya Book Depo.
10. Hemming, James; The Teaching of Social Studies in Secondary School. New York: London
Longmans Green and Co.
11. Jarolimek, John; (1977) Social Studies High School Education. New York: Mc. Millan Co.
12. Kochhar, S.L.; The Teaching of Social Studies. New Delhi: Sterling publishers Ltd. -16.
13. Moffat, M.P. (2004). Social Studies Instruction. New York: Prentice – Hall Inc.

PAPER CODE-9118
Course 5&6 - PEDAGOGY OF SOCIOLOGY
Objectives After completion of course the student teacher will be able to:
Develop an understanding of the nature of the discipline of social science.
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 71 -
2. Develop a conceptual understanding of sociology.
3. Develop an understanding of the relationship of sociology with other subjects.
4. Understand the origin and development of Sociology.
5. Understand Need and importance of Sociology in School Curriculum.
6. Understand and use different strategies of teaching sociology
7. Develop Skills for preparation of different types of planning.
8. Understand and analyse the current Social Problems concerns and Issues.
9. Measure the Students Social Behavior.
10. Understand evaluation techniques and Examination Reforms
11. Develop the concept and skills needed for Diagnostic and Remedial Teaching

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT –I Nature of Discipline

1. Nature of Social Science, National curriculum Framework 2005,Position paper on Social Science.
2. Social concerns and current issues.
3. Concept, Nature and Scope of Sociology, Sociological Perspective.
4. Origin and Development of Sociology with reference to pioneers of Sociology-
5. Foreign-Augest comte,Emile Durkhiem, Max Weber, Karl Marks Giddens.
6. Indian- G.S.Ghuriye, D.P. Mukhrji, A.R.Desai, M.N.Shrinivas
7. Development of Scientific View-Positivism (Augest Comte), Social Fact (Emile Durkhiem), Ideal
Type (Max Weber)
8. Sociology as a base to understand Social relations.

UNIT-II Sociology as a Subject in School Curriculum

Sociology as a subject in School Curriculum: Need and Importance.
Correlation of Sociology with other Subjects viz. History, Political Science, Economics, Geography,
Statistics, Anthropology and psychology etc.
Scope of Sociology…… Social institutions…. social relations… social structure…. social change….

UNIT-III Pedagogy of Sociology.

1. Aims and Objectives of Teaching Sociology.
2. Pedagogical Analysis of the following topics –
a. Gender issues
b. Child Labour
c. Population
d. Role of Media in Society

UNIT- IV Planning and Strategies

1. Annual Plan, Unit Plan, Daily Teaching Plan
2. Social Survey, Observation, Case Study
3. Use of Songs Analysis, Stories, Socialized, recitation, Dramatization, Role play, Lecture, Problem
solving, Project Field trip, Group Quiz and panel discussions as strategies of teaching.
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 72 -
UNIT -V Evaluation in Teaching Sociology
1. Concept of Evaluation
2. Different Evaluation tools and techniques –Observation, Written Test, Open Book Test,
Sociometric measuring devices, Rating Scale,
3. Preparation of Achievement Test-Blue Print, different type of question, Marking scheme,
scoring scheme.
4. Diagnostic testing and Remedial Teaching.
5. Continues and comprehensive Evaluation.

SESSIONAL WORK

Any Two of the following:-

1. Social Survey of any Social Institution viz. family, caste, school etc
2. Prepare Scrape Book on any one Social Issue.
3. Collection of Socio-Cultural Material and Prepare a report.
4. Case Study of an NGO working in the field of Education or an institution related to social science.
Socio-Educational Agency.
5. Collection and analysis of Local Folk songs / Folklore / Festivals with reference to cultural
aspects.
6. Prepare a script of drama on Social Problems.

REFERENCES

Agrawal,J.C.(1994),Teaching Social Studies, Vikas Publication House Pvt.Ltd.New Delhi.

Bening,A.C. and Bening Devid H.(1952),Teaching the Social Studies in Secondary School, Tata,Mekgra
Hill Publishing, Bombay.
Comte, Augeste (1855), The Positive Philosophy of Auguste Comte (
Translated,H,Marineau), New York.
Goode ,William, Hatt,Paul (1952), Methods in Social Research, Mc Graw Hill,New York.
Hamming,James, Teaching of Social Studies in Secondary Schools,Longmans green and Co., New York.
Inkels, Alex (1965),What is Sociology, Prentice Hall, New Delhi.
Jain, Amir Chand(1983), Samajik Gyan Shikshan, Rajasthan Hindi Granth Akadmi,Jaipur.
Johnson,H.M.(1963), Sociology-A systematic Introduction, Routledge and kegan paul, Landon.
Kochhar,S.L.,Teaching Social Studies, Sterling Publishers Ltd., New Delhi.
Muffat,M.P.(2004), Social Studies instruction, Prentice Hall Inc., New York.
NCERT Sociology Book of Class XI and XII.
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 73 -
NCERT, National Curriculum Framework-2005
NCERT, Position Paper of NCF on Teaching of Social Sciene-2005.
Ram Ahuja(), Samajik Samasyaye, Rawat Publication, New Delhi and Jaipur.
Rawat,Harikrishna(),Samajshashtriya Sabdkosh, Rawat Publication, New Delhi and Jaipur.
Rawat,Harikrishna(2001),Samajshashtriya Chintak avm Siddhankar,Rawat Publication, New Delhi and
Jaipur.
Sharma, R.A.(2003), Samajik vigyan Shikshan,R.Lal Book Depot, Merauth.
Sharma, Virendra Prakash (2005), Samajshastriya Chinten ke Muladhar, Panchasheel Prakashan, Jaipur.
Sharma,D.D.,Gupta,M.L.(), Samajik Samasyaye, Sahitya Bhawan Publications, Agra.
Sharma,D.D.,Gupta,M.L.(2012), Samajik Vicharak, Sahitya Bhawan Publications, Agra.
Sharma,D.D.,Gupta,M.L.(2012), Samajshash, Sahitya Bhawan Publications, Agra.
Singi,N.K.,Goswami, V.(2002), Samajshastra Vivechan, Rajasthan Hindi Granth Akadmi, Jaipur.
Tyagi,Gursaran Das(1985), Samajik vigyan Shikshan, Vinod Pustak mandir,Agra.
Vidyabhushan,Sachdeva, D.R.(1997), Samajshastra ke Siddhant, Century Printers, Allahabad.
Weber, Max( 1947), Theory of Social and Economic Organisation (Translated by Handerson and
Parsons), New York, Oxford University Press.

PAPER CODE-9119
Course 5&6 - PEDAGOGY OF PSYCHOLOGY

Objectives: After completion of the course the student teachers will be able to
1. Develop an understanding of the Nature of Psychology.
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 74 -
2. Knows the place, aims and objectives of teaching psychology.
3. Acquires the knowledge of current higher secondary school syllabus of psychology.
4. Develop an understanding of the importance of Psychology in daily life and its correlation with other
subjects.
5. Understand the Historical perspective and development of Psychology.
6. Gets acquainted him with different methods and approaches of teaching psychology at the higher
secondary level.
7. Develop an ability of preparing annual plan, unit plan and daily teaching plan.
8. Develop an understanding of continuous and comprehensive evaluation in psychology Teaching.
9. Applies the valuation procedures to assess the achievements of the pupils in psychology.
10. Develops various skills for the use of different audiovisual aids, administration, scoring and
interpretation of teaching the subject.
11. Identifies the weaknesses of pupils by using various tests and takes remedial measures.
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT-I Nature of Discipline
1. Concept, Nature, Branches and Importance of psychology.
 Subject matter of Psychology 
3. Historical perspective of psychology.
 Place of Psychology in modern life (a brief and general account) 
 Contributions of Psychology in the various personal, familial, social, educational, occupational and
clinical aspects of human life 
6. Eminent Psychologist : B. F. Skinner, Sigmund Freud, Albert Bandura, Jean Piaget, Carl Rogers,
William James, Erik Erikson, Ivan Pavlov, Kurt Lewin

UNIT – II Psychology as a Subject in School Curriculum-

1. Need and Importance of Psychology in the school curriculum – its unique nature and place in human
life, its importance in developing understanding about self and other people
 Relation of Psychology with Education, Sociology, Physiology and other biological science,
Anthropology, Management, Mathematics, Media sciences and Cybernetics (general) 
3. Scope and utility of psychology in various human field.

UNIT-III Pedagogy of Psychology

1. Aims and objectives of teaching Psychology.
2. Pedagogical analysis of the following topics of Psychology-
a) Intelligence
b) Ego and Personality
c) Mental Disorder
d) Sensation and Perception
e) Motivation and Emotion
f) Memory Process

UNIT-IV Planning and Strategies –

1. Annual plan, unit plan, daily teaching plan- Concept , Need and current Features.
2. Basic Teaching strategies
 Class – room based lecture, discussion, seminar, workshop, modelling 
 Laboratory based – experimental studies 
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 75 -
 Field based – survey, project, field visit of various form 
 Observation 
 Clinical – case study 
8. Methods of teaching Psychology:
a) Lecture cum demonstration method,
b) Inductive-Deductive Method
c) Project method,
d) Story Telling,
e) Role Playing,
f) Source Method,
g) Dramatization.
9. Various Approaches to teach Psychology –
a) Constructivist approach,
b) Investigatory or Inquiry approach,
c) Computer assisted instruction,

UNIT-V Assessment and Evaluation –

1. Concept of Evaluation.
2. Concept and advantages of Continuous and Comprehensive Evaluation.
3. Different types of questions, Blue print and Construction of Achievement Test.
4. Importance and construction of Diagnostic test and Remedial teaching.
5. Different Evaluation tools and techniques – Observation, Written Test, Open Book Test.
SESSIONAL WORK
Any two of the following –
1. Abstract of two published papers related to Psychology in NPC Journals.
2. Identify the Special Needy students Psychology diagnose their difficulties and suggest appropriate
remedial measures.
3. Preparation of a scrap book related to the Psychological Disorder.
4. Term paper on any one Topic/ Issues related to Psychological Problem in Adolescent.
5. Preparing a presentation related to Psychological issue at Se. Secondary level.

REFERENCE
 Anastadi, A., (1982). Psychological Testing, New York; Macmillan
 Cox Tom, (1978). Strees London, The McMillan Press Ltd.
 Hilgard, E. R. (1978). Introduction to Psychology (6th Edition), New York; Harcourt Brac and Co.
 Milard, Atkinson and Atkinson, (1979). Introduction to Psychology, New York; Harcourt Brace
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 76 -
 Hovanoboich Inc.
 Kendle, H. H. (1963). Basic Psychology Application, Century, Crofts
 Lazarus P. S. (1969). Patterns of Adjustment and Human Effectiveness, New York; McGraw Hill
Book Co.
 Lindgren, Fyrne and Petrinovich, (1966). Psychology – An Introduction to a Behavioural
Science, (4th Edition), New York; John Wiley & Sons Inc.
 Morgan, C. T., (1975). A Brief Introduction to Psychology, New York; John Wiley
Publication
 Sahakin, W. S. (1975). History and Systems of Psychology, New York; John Wiley and Sons
 http://www.iapp.org.in/
 http://www.aiansip.org/
 http://www.naopindia.org/
 http://www.iacp.in/2012/01/past-office-bearers.html
 http://nppassociation.org

PAPER CODE-9120
Course 5&6 - PEDAGOGY OF HISTORY
Objectives: After completion of the course the student teachers will be able to –

1. Develop an understanding of the Nature of Social Science and History.

2. Develop an understanding of the importance of History and its correlation with other subjects.
3. Develop an understanding of aims and objectives of teaching History.
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 77 -
4. Develop an understanding of pedagogy of History.
5. Develop an ability of preparing annual plan, unit plan and daily teaching plan.
6. Develop an understanding of various methods and approaches of teaching History at Senior
Secondary level.
7. Develop an understanding of continuous and comprehensive evaluation.
8. Develop an ability to construct an achievement test, diagnostic test and remedial teaching.

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT-I Nature of Discipline-

1. Nature of Social Science, NCF 2005 position paper of Social Science.
2. Concept, Nature, Philosophy, Scope, Importance of History and Historical development of History as
a discipline.
3. Contribution of Eminent Historians–Herodotus, Rake, Croche, Collingwood, Col.Todd, Bipin
Chandra, Satish Chandra, Sardesai, P.K. Basu, R.C Majumdar, Jadugar Sarkar

UNIT – II History as a Subject in School Curriculum-

1. Need and Importance of History at Senior Secondary level.
2. Correlation of History with other subjects – Geography, Political science, Economics, Social science,
Art& Literature, Mathematics.
3. Scope of History – Development of human civilization, History of development of - Society, Cities
and Urban Centers,
4. Renaissance
5. Industrial Revolution.

UNIT-III Pedagogy of History –

1. Aims and objectives of teaching History.
2. Pedagogical analysis of the following topics of History-
a) Changing cultural traditions.
b) Confrontation of cultures.
c) Paths to modernization.
d) The industrial revolution.
e) Issues in Social History :Caste, Class, Kinship and Gender.

UNIT-IV Planning and Strategies –

1. Annual plan, unit plan, daily teaching plan, Concept and Features.
2. Historical Survey, Observation, Case Study.
3. Methods of teaching History : Lecture cum demonstration method, Project method, Story Telling,
Role Playing, Supervised Study, Source Method, Discovery and Socialized Recitation Method.
4. Constructivist approach, Investigatory approach, Computer assisted instruction.
5. Field Trips
6. Historical Sourses (Primary and secondary) and their critical Evaluation.

UNIT-V Assessment and Evaluation –

1. Concept of Evaluation.
2. Concept and advantages of Continuous and Comprehensive Evaluation.
3. Different types of questions, Blue print and Construction of Achievement Test.
4. Importance and construction of Diagnostic test and Remedial teaching.
5. Different Evaluation tools and techniques – Observation, Written Test, Open Book Test.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 78 -

 SESSIONAL WORK

Any two of the following –

1. Abstract of two published papers related to History in reputed Journals.

2. Identify the students with less than 60% marks in History, diagnose their difficulties and suggest
appropriate remedial measures.
3. Preparationof a scrap book related to the current issues of History.
4. A study of any one aspect of current Historical issue and preparation of report.
5. Life sketch of a prominent historian.
6. Preparation of a report on local heritage.

REFERENCES
1- nhf{kr] misUnzukFk vkSj c?ksyk] gsr flag- ¼1982½ bfrgklf”k{k.k] t;iqj] jktLFkku xzUFk vdkneh
2- ?kkVs] oh-Mh- ¼1981½% bfrgkl f”k{k.k] gfj;k.kk] lkfgR; vdkneh p.Mhx<+
3- 'kekZ vkj-,- ¼1994½% bfrgkl f”k{k.k] esjB] ykW;y cqd Mhiks
4- R;kxh] xq:”kj.k- ¼2010½% bfrgkl f”k{k.k] vkxjk] vxzoky ifCyds”kUl-
5. Aggrawal, J.C.; Teaching of History, New Delhi :(A practical Approach),VikasPublishing House
Pvt.Ltd.
6. Choudhary, K.P.; Effective teaching of History in India, NCERT.
7. Ghate, V.D.; Suggestions for the teaching of History in India.
8. Ghose, K.D.; (1951) Creative Teaching of History. PUP,
9. Kochhar, S.K.; (1979) Teaching of History. New Delhi :SterlingPublishers Pvt.
10. Pathak,S.P.; (2005) Teaching of History . New Delhi: Kanishka Publisher.
11 Singh, Y.K; (2004) Teaching of History, New Delhi.APH, PublishingCorporation.
12. Shaida, B.D.; Singh Sahab , (2005 )Teaching History. New Delhi: DhanPatRai Publishing Co.
Pvt.Ltd, X.

PAPER CODE-9121

Course 5&6 - PEDAGOGY OF POLITICAL SCIENCE

Objectives: After completion of the course the student teachers will be able to –

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 79 -

1. Understand the nature of the discipline of Social Science.
2. Understand the nature, need and importance of Political Science in School curriculum.
3. Develop an understanding of relationship of Political Science with other school subjects.
4. Develop an understanding of aims and objectives of Political Science teaching.
5. Understand and adopt proper methods and techniques of teaching various topics of Political Science.
6. Understand the contributions of Indian and western Political Thinkers such as Kautilya, Mahatma
Gandhi, Bhimrao Ramjee Ambedkar, Plato, Aristotle, Rousseau, Marx.
7. Prepare Annual Plan, Unit plan and daily teaching plan in Political Science.
8. Conduct Pedagogical analysis of content for teaching in the classroom.
9. Develop the concept and skill needed for Diagnostic and Remedial Teaching.

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT- I Nature of Social Science as a Discipline –

1. Nature of Social Science as a discipline, NCF (2005) position paper of Social Science.
2. Importance of political science in school curriculum.
3. Developmental Perspectives of Political Science.
4. Contribution of eminent Political Thinkers-
a) Indian –Kautilya, Mahamta Gandhi, Bhimrao Ramjee Ambedkar
b) Western-Plato, Aristotle, Rousseau and Carl marx.

UNIT-II Political Science as a School subject –

2. Nature and scope of political science.
3. Aims and objectives of teaching of Political Science.
4. Co-relation of Political Science with other School Subjects.

UNIT –III Planning and strategies -

1. Annual plan, Unit plan, Daily Teaching Plan- Concepts and features.
1. Methods of Teaching Political Science
a) Lecture –cum demonstration method.
b) Project Method.
c) Problem Solving method.
d) Socialized Recitation method.
e) Discussion method.
2. Techniques and Devices of teaching Political Science.
a) Questioning Technique.
b) Interview Technique.
c) Illustration with example.
d) Role Playing Technique.

UNIT-IV Pedagogical Analysis and mode of Learning engagement –

1. Pedagogical analysis of the Units with reference to concepts, learning outcomes, activities and
learning experiences and evaluation techniques of following content at Secondary and Sr. Secondary
level.
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 80 -
 a) Liberty
b) Equality
c) Social Justice
d) Rights
e) Secularism
f) Nationalism
g) Citizenship
h) Peace

UNIT-V Assessment and evaluation in Political Science.

1. Purpose and concept of evaluation.
2. Preparation of an achievement test in Political Science along with Blue Print, Content analysis,
Scoring key and marking scheme.
3. Diagnostic testing and Remedial Programme.
4. Concept and advantages of continuous and comprehensive evaluation (CCE).

SESSIONAL WORK

Any two of the following:-

1. Make a Scrap Book on any National Political issue.

2. Construction of an achievement test with Blue Print, content analysis, marking scheme and scoring
key, its administration and interpretation.
3. A Power Point presentation related to any topic of Political Science.
4. Abstracts of two published papers related to Political issue.
5. To present a report of functioning of the institutions like municipal council/ gram panchayat/
coopertative society.
6. Life sketch and contribution of any one prominent Indian Political Thinker.

REFERENCES

1- Ck?ksyk] gsr flag ] O;kl gfj'kpUnz ¼1985½ ukxfjd 'kkL= f'k{k.k] t;iqj jktLFkku fgUnh xzaFk vdknehA
2- HkVukxj] xhrk ¼2007½] ukxfjd'kkL= f'k{k.k] t;iqj] bf.M;u ifCyf”kax gkmlA
3- xxZ Hkaojyky cD'kh m’kk ¼2008½] ukxfjd 'kkL= dk f'k{k.k] vkxjk] jk/kk izdk'ku eafnjA
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 81 -
4- dqnsfl;k] mes'kpUnz ¼2004½] ukxfjd 'kkL= f”k{k.k] vkxjk] fouksn iqLrd efUnjA
5- {kf=;ksa ds ¼2004½] ukxfjd'kkL= dk f”k{k.k] esjB] vkj-yky- cqd fMiksA
6- feÙky ,e-,y- ¼1993½ ukxfjd 'kkL= f'k{k.k esjB] yks;y cqd fMiksA
7- R;kxh] xq:”kj.knkl ¼2010½] ukxfjd 'kkL= f'k{k.k] vkxjk] fouksn iqLrd efUnjA
8- Bloom B.S. : Taxonomy of Educational Objectives-Cgnitive Domain Schools, New York.
9. Bining and Bining-(1951) Teaching of Social studies in Secondary Schools, New York.
10. Bourne H.E. (1972) Teaching of History and Civics, Bombay. Longmans 1972.
11. Higher G. (1951) The art of teaching, Methuen & Co. Ltd. London.
12. Harlikar-(1982-Teaching civics in India, Bombay, Padma Publication Ltd.
13. Landon Joseph (1912) The principles and practice of teaching and class management. Mickiejohn and
Sons London.
14. Kochhar, S.K. (2004) Teaching of Social Science,Sterling Publishers Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi.
15. Pandey, B.N. Khosla,D.N. (1974) student teaching evaluation NCERT.
16. White E.M. (1981) The teaching of modern civics George G. Harrald & Co. Ltd. London.

PAPER CODE-9122
Course 5&6 - PEDAGOGY OF ECONOMICS
Objectives: After completion of the course, the student teachers will be able to -
1. Understand the nature of the discipline of Social Science and Economics.
2. Understand Origin and Development of Economics.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 82 -

3. Understand the contributions of western and Indian Economists such as Marshal, Pigou, Robinson,
Chanakay, Amartaya Sen.
4. Understand Need and importance of Economic in School Curriculum.
5. Develop an understanding of the relationship of Economics with other subjects.
6. Develop an understanding of aims and objectives of Economics.
7. Develop an understanding of Pedagogy of Economics.
8. Develop ability to preparing Annual Plan, Unit Plan and Daily Teaching plan in Economics.
9. Understand and use different strategies for teaching Economics.
10. Develop an ability to construct an achievement test, Diagnostic and Remedial measures.

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT -I Nature of Discipline

1. Nature of Social Science, NCF 2005 position paper of Social science.
2. Meaning, Nature, Scope and importance of Economics
3. Origin and Development of Economics.
4. Methods of study in Economics-Economic Survey, Observation, Case Study and interview
5. Contribution of eminent economists-
a) Western - Thomas Malthus, Alfred Marshall, Adam Smith.
b) Indian- Chanakay, Amartaya Sen.
6. Human Values and Economics.

UNIT–II Economics as a Subject in School Curriculum.

1. Need and importance of Economics at secondary level.
2. Correlation of Economics with other subjects: Commerce, Geography, Mathematics, Statistics,
History, Civics etc.
3. Scope of Economics- Economic institutions such as Banking, Small Industry etc. Economic relation-
local, national and international level, Economical structure of a financial sector.

UNIT- III Pedagogy of Economics.

1. Aims and Objectives of Teaching Economics.
2. Pedagogical Analysis of the following topics of Economics -
a) Budget
b) Supply and Demand
c) Inflation and Deflation
d) Indian Marketing System
e) Money and Credit
f) Indian Economic Policy
g) Planning
h) Consumer Rights
i) Globalization with reference to Indian economics

UNIT -IV Planning and Strategies

1. Annual Plan, Unit Plan, Daily Teaching Plan–Concepts and features.
2. General principles and maxims of economics teaching.
3. Methods of teaching Economics –
a) Inductive and Deductive method

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 83 -

 b) Problem solving method
c) Project method
d) Discussion Method
e) Constructivism
4. Selection of appropriate techniques at secondary level in Economics Teaching
a) Illustration with examples
b) Questioning Technique
c) Data Representation and Interpretation
d) Computer Assisted Instruction(CAI)

UNIT -V Evaluation in Economics

1. Concept of Evaluation
2. Different Evaluation tools and techniques –Observation, Written Test, Open Book Test.
3. Achievement Test in Economics: Concept, Need and Steps for constructing achievement test.
4. Diagnostic testing and Remedial Teaching.
5. Continuous and Comprehensive Evaluation (CCE).

SESSIONAL WORK

Any Two of the following:

1) Preparation of a scrapbook related to any current issue of Economics.
2) A power point presentation related to any one topic of Economics.
3) Preparing a Radio or T.V. Script related to a current Economic issue.
4) Abstracts of two published papers related to Economics in reputed journals.
5) Market survey related to a product/economic activity.
6) Life sketch of an eminent economist.

REFERENCES
1. Aggarwal, J.C., Teaching of Economics – A Practical Appraoch, Vinod Pustak Mandir, Agra, 2005.
2. Bloom, B.S. et al.,(1967)Taxonomy of Educational Objective Handbook 1, Cognitive
Domain,Handbook 2, Affective Domain, London: Longman.
3. Bloom, B. S. Englehart, M. D., Furst, E. J., Hill, W. H. and Khrathwohl, D. R. (1964). Taxonomy of
Educational Objectives Handbook, 1, Cognitive Domain, Handbook, 2, Affective Domain, Longman
London.
4. Edited by Kadamari(2006) :Teaching of Economics of Economics? A Tripat Tuteja Commonwealth
Publishers.
5. Bruner, J. (1966). Toward a Theory of Instruction. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
6. Dale Edgar (1961) Audio-visual Methods in Teaching, New York: Holt Rinehart and Winston.
7. Dwivedi, D.N. (2002) Principles of Economics, New Delhi, Vikas Publishing.
8. Gunter, Mary Alice et.al.; Instruction: A Model‟s Approach- Fifth Edition; Pearson Education Inc.;
Boston; 2007.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 84 -

9. Husen.N (2003):Teacher Manual in Economics, Published by Regional college of Education, Ajmer.
10. Instructional Technology: A Systematic Approach to Education, Frederick G. Knirk, Kent L.
Gustafson, Holt, Rinehart and Winston, Inc, 1986.
11. Joyce, B. & Weil, M. and Calhoun, E. (2008). Models of teaching, 8th ed. Englewood Cliffs, NJ:
Prentice-Hall. (there is now a 9th, 2014 edition)
12. NCERT (1974), Teaching Units in Economics for High and Higher secondary Stage, New Delhi.
13. Sharma, Seema, Modern Teaching Economics, Anmol Publication Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi- 2004.
14. Sharma,S.R.(2009): Arthshastra shikshan, Arjun Publishing House
15. Siddiqi, M.H. (1998) Teaching of Economics: New Delhi; Ashish Publishing House.
16. Taba, H. (1962) Curriculum development; theory and practice. New York,: Harcourt Brace & World.
17. Twomey Fosnot, C. (1989). Enquiring teachers, enquiring learners: A constructivist approach for
teaching. New York: Teachers College Press.
18. Yadav, Anita, Teaching of Economics, Anmol Publication Pvt., Delhi.

19- lDlsuk fueZy ¼2008½ % vFkZ”kkL= f’k{k.k jktLFkku fgUnz xzUFk vdkneh] t;iqj
20- ukxj] fnO;k ¼2006½% vFkZ”kkL= f”k{k.k] jktLFkku izdk”ku] t;iqj
21- egrks] ,l-ds] vFkZ”kkL= f”k{k.k ds vk/kkj ¼2006½ % jk/kk izdk”ku efUnj izk-fy-] vkxjk
22- vfXugks=h Ñ’.k dqekj ¼2006½% vFkZ”kkL= f”k{k.k] izdk”ku& xks;y ifCyds” ku] t;iqj
23- jko] th- dkes’k ¼2005½% vFkZ”kkL= f”k{k.k] jk/kk izdk”ku efUnj] vkxjk&2
24- Okk’.ks;
Z jktho dqekj ¼2005½ % vFkZ”kkL= f”k{k.k] lkfgR; izdk”ku] vkxjk
25- R;kxh xq:”kj.knkl ¼1993½ % vFkZ”kkL= f”k{k.k] fouksn iqLrd eafnj] vkxjk
26- Ikk.Ms;] dkerk izlkn % vFkZ”kkL= f”k{k.k] esjB
27- flag gjukjk;.k ,oa flag jktsUnz % vFkZ”kkL= f”k{k.k] izdk”ku&y{ehukjk;.k vxzoky & vkxjk

INTERNET RESOURCES
Online! A Reference Guide to Using Internet Resources.
Wikipedia – online encyclopedia website - http://www.wikipedia.org/
E learning India Website - http://elearning-india.com/
Constructive approach -
http://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Constructivist_teaching_methods&oldid=436907250
PAPER CODE-9123

Course 5 & 6 - PEDAGOGY OF GEOGRAPHY

Objective: After completing the course the student teacher will be able to:

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 85 -

1. Develop understanding about social science as discipline
2. Understand the contribution of different schools of geography
3. Understand the characteristics of geography as a discipline.
4. Develop understanding about meaning, nature, scope and objectives of geography education.
5. Understand basic concepts of geography.
6. Understand the importance of geography education in schools.
7. Develop skills in planning and involving learner in inside and outside classroom activities.
8. Employ various techniques of 'Transaction of Geography'
9. Construct appropriate tools for evaluating geography teaching
10. Develop skills in organizing practical activities in geography.
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT-I Nature of Social science as a discipline
Nature of Social Sciences as a discipline. Position of Geography in social sciences, correlation of
geography with other disciplines, salients features of NCF (2005) Position Paper on Social
Sciences.
UNIT-II Geography as a subject in schools
1. Meaning and Nature of Geography, Modern concept and main branches, Contribution of different
schools in development of geography-determinist, possibilist & neo determinist, place of geography
in school curriculum, Importance of geography in daily life. Correlation of geography with other
school subjects.
2. Aims and Objectives of Teaching geography at Secondary and Senior Secondary Level. Role of
geography teaching in developing international understanding. Geogrpahy teaching in the light of
sustainable future.
UNIT-III Pedagogy of geography
1. Basic concepts of geography
a. Geosphere
b. Physical, human and regional geography
2. Pedagogical analysis of the following
a. Temperature zones of the earth
b. Weather, climate and season
c. Maps as tools in geography learning
d. Latitude and longitudes

UNIT-IV Planning for Teaching Geography

1. Analysis and organization of subject matter
2. Planning for teaching and learning-annual plan, unit plan and daily plans.
3. Important skills for classroom teaching – Lecture and narration questioning, discussion, dialogue,
demonstration.
4. Interactive, constructivist, critical pedagogies in geography.
5. Development of different skills – Observation, oral, practical and cartographical.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 86 -

6. Planning outdoor activities and geographical excursions.
7. Study of Local geography
8. Geography club.
UNIT-V Assessment in Geography
1. Evaluation in Geography - Need and importance
2. Continues and comprehensive evaluation in Geography.
3. Construction of Blue Print and achievement Test, Essay, Short Answer and objective type test.
4. Diagnoses of Learning difficulties and Organization of remedial teaching in geography.

SESSIONAL WORK
Any two out of the following
1. Preparation of a plan to study local geography
2. Construction of an achievement test in geography
3. Preparing a project report/field visit report related to geography.
4. Preparing a scrapbook related to some geographical issue.
5. Preparation of PPP slides on a topic of geography
6. Geographical interpretation of a toposheet.
7. Study of the activities of a geography club of a school.
8. Critical Analysis of RBSE Question Paper of Geography of Senior Secondary Examination.

REFERENCES

1- nqcs] ,l-ds- ¼2005½ % mPprj Hkwxksy f'k{k.k] cqd ,uDyso] t;iqjA

2- dkSf'kd ,-Mh-] 'kekZ ,-ds- ¼1995½ % HkkSxksfyd fopkj/kkjk,a ,oa fof/k&ra=] jLrksxh ifCyds'ku] esjB] ;w-ih-A
3- flag] ,p-,u- ¼1995½ % Hkwxksy f'k{k.k] fouksn iqLrd eafnj] vkxjkA
4- JhokLro dkafr eksgu ¼2008½ % Hkwxksy f'k{k.k&,d O;kogkfjd n`f"V] lkfgR; izdk'ku] vkxjkA
5- lkekftd foKku f'k{k.k % vk/kkj i= ¼2005½ % lkfgR; izdk'ku] vkxjkA
6- oekZ] ,y-,u- ¼2009½ % Hkwxksy f'k{k.k % lS)kafrd ,oa izk;ksfxd jktLFkku fgUnh xazFk] vdkneh] t;iqjA
7- oekZ] ts-ih- ¼2005½ % Hkwxksy f'k{k.k] fgeka'kq] ifCyds'ku] mn;iqj] fnYyhA
8- oekZ] ts-ih- ¼1995½ % Hkwxksy f'k{k.k] fgeka'kq ifCyds'ku] mn;iqj fnYyhA
9- A Hand book for geography Teachers-Scarefe, II-V, (1995) : London Methurn & Co.
10- Bhattacharya A.N. (2000) : Human geography of Mewar, Himanshu Publication, Udaipur, Delhi.
11- Boardman David (1964) :Graphicacy and geography Teaching, CROOM HELM, London, Sydney, Wolfeboro,
New Hampshire
12- Douglas Jackson W.A. (1956) :The shaping of our world-A human and cultural geography Jon Wiley & Sons,
New York.
13- Fairgrieve J. (1937) : Geography in school, University Tutorial Press, London.
14- Jha P.K. (2007) : Modern Methods of Teaching Geography, Rajat Publications, New Delhi.
15- Macnee EA (1937) : Suggestion for the Teaching of Geogrpahy in India, Oxford University Press, London.
16- NCF-2005-NCERT, New Delhi
17- Source Book for Teaching Geography (1970) : Paris, UNESCO
PAPER CODE-9124
Course 5&6 - PEDAGOGY OF ART
Objectives: After completion of the course the student-teachers will be able to:
1. Understand the nature of Art as a discipline.
2. Get acquainted with the origin and evolution of various Forms of Art.
3. Understand the place of Art in general education.
4. Understand the concept and basics of different art forms (visual and performing arts);

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 87 -

5. Develop the ability to use visual art processes to generate new knowledge, understanding and
perception of the world;
6. Understand the significant implications of art to nurture children‟s creativity and aesthetic
sensibilities through genuine exploration, experience and free expression;
7. Get acquainted with the strategies of classroom teaching of art.
8. Prepare Yearly plan, Unit-plan and teaching-plan for teaching art.
9. Prepare and use suitable teaching aids in the classroom effectively.
10. Understand the creative aspect of the Teaching of child art.
11. Understand the strategies of developing appreciation of beauty of nature and the basic elements of art
forms among the students;
12. Understand the strategies of developing ability to appreciate the inherent rhythm, beauty and harmony
in visual art forms: specifically regional, traditional and classical art forms among the students.
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT-I Concept, Nature, and Scope of art as a Discipline :
1. Meaning and Etymology of word „Art‟ (Indian and Western context)
2. Various forms of Visual Art: Art of Painting; Sculpture; and Architecture;
3. Concept of Art or Aesthetics (Indian and Western context)
4. Classifications of art:
a) Visual, Performing and Literary arts;
b) Classical, Traditional and Folk arts.
5. Appreciation of Art.
a) Elements of Art (Shadang ("kM+kax) - 6 elements of Indian Painting)
b) Principles of Aesthetic Order (Principles used in composing art work)
c) Language of Art (Special reference to Indian Art)
6. Art and Education:
a) Modern concept of Integrated Art or Aesthetic Education
b) The Changing status of art in general Education
c) Systematic study in Art-education.
d) Educational values of art and its relations with other school subjects.
7. Aims and objectives of teaching Art at secondary/senior secondary level.
UNIT-II Meaning and Nature of Visual Arts:
1. Meaning and concept of Visual Arts.
2. Evolution of various forms of Visual Arts.
3. Nature of Visual Arts:
I. Two dimensional Techniques of Visual Arts:
a. Drawing and Painting: Water colour, Oil colour and other mediums.
b. Collage, Mosaics, Print arts (Stencils, Lino-cut, Wood-cut, Colograph and Etching etc.).
c. Rajasthani Folk and Traditional Visual Arts – Mandana, Alpana, Rangoli, Phad and Kawad
Paintings, Murals, Rajasthani miniature and Pichwai Paintings etc
II. Three dimensional Techniques of Visual Arts:
a. Clay work, Paper mashie work, Creation with waste material, Mask making, Puppet making etc.
b. Rajasthani Kathputli, Terracotta sculptures (Molela)

UNIT-III Nurturing Creative Expression and Aesthetic Sensibilities of Child through Art activities:
1. Art and Creativity :
a) Concept and importance of creativity in human life
b) Art and creativity
c) Developing Self Expression through Creative art activities;
d) Role of Art in developing the child‟s creative personality;
e) Importance of creative art activities at various stages of school education.
f) Characteristics of the Child Art.
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 88 -
 g) The Child as creative Artist.
h) Different developmental stages of child‟s creative expression:
i) The Scribbling Stage (Beginning of Self-Expression)
j) The Pre-Schematic Stage (The stage of first representational attempts).
k) The Schematic Stage (The stage of achievement of form concept).
l) The stage of Dawning Realism (The Gang age).
m) The Pseudo-realistic stage. (The stage of Adolescent )
n) The stage of reasoning. (The Final stage of decision making).
2. Art and Aesthetics:
a) Concept and importance of Aesthetic Sensibility in human life.
b) Art and Aesthetics (Indian and Western context).
c) Developing Aesthetic values and Aesthetic Sensibilities through Art Teaching.
d) Developing harmonious personality of child through teaching of Art;

UNIT – IV Planning and Instructional Support System in Art:

1. Principles of classroom teaching of Art.
2. Planning of teaching Art:
a) Need and Importance of Planning in Teaching Art activity
b) Analysis and organization of Creative Art Activities.
c) Planning of Yearly, Unit and Daily teaching Plan in Teaching of various
Creative Art activities.
3. Classroom, its management and organization.
4. The methods of teaching in art:
a) Traditional method of teaching Art : Copy and Dictated method
b) Method of Free-Expression
c) Method of Assigned topic
d) Demonstration method.
e) Media Method

5. Innovative Practices in Teaching Art

a) Constructivist Approach
b) Group Teaching
6. Life history of eminent artists and their contribution-

UNIT – V Evaluation in Teaching of Art:

1. Purpose and Concept of Evaluation in Teaching of art.
2. Continuous and Comprehensive Evaluation
3. Techniques of Evaluation:
a) Teacher made test
b) Designing examination paper and Blue – Print
c) Development of test items- Various types of test questions (Essay, short answer, and objective
types) and their uses.
d) Progress assessment of development of art activities through:
e) Self evaluation;
f) Peer assessment;
g) Group evaluation.
h) Criteria-based checklist.
i) Self-reflection
j) Respond to the work of others
k) Portfolio
l) Evidence of learning: art works, performances, presentations, photographs, videos etc.
m) Preparation of achievement test - its administration, analysis and reporting.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 89 -

 SESSIONAL WORK

Any two of the following:

1. Prepare at least two innovative activity plans in either Collage; Mosaics or Print media.
2. Documentation of the processes of any one Visual Art form with the pedagogical basis such as Oil
Painting, Murals, Collage, Mosaics and Print making etc.
3. Prepare a scrap-book on the one of the great Tradition of Indian Painting, Sculptures and
Architectures with a write-up on its introduction, location and art works of the period with all types of
photographs and illustrations of the paintings, sculptures, and architectural monuments.
4. Life and contribution of any one eminent artist/Sculptor.
5. Submission of any two self prepared art works by the student teacher.
6. A critical review of any school of art (Indian or Western classical/ traditional/folk ar schools).

REFERENCES

1. Collingwood, R.G.: “The principles of Art, Oxford University Press, USA

2. Jefferson, B. (1959) : "Teaching Art to Children." Allan & Bacon Inc. Boston.
3. Jeswani, K.K. : Art in Education, Atma Ram & Sons Kashmiri Gate, Delhi-6;
4. Jeswani, K.K. : Appreciation of Art, Atma Ram and Sons, Kashmiri Gate, Delhi-6.
5. Road, H., Education through Art, Faber and Faber London;
6. Lowenfeld, V. :Creative and mental Growth, Macmillan Co., New York;
7. Tolstoy: What is Art? An essay on Art, Oxford University Press, New York;
8. Brown , Percy. : Indian Paintings;
9. Chilvers, Ian. : The Oxford Dictionary of Art;
10. Fechner, Lois. & Rathus: Understanding Art, Prentice-Hall International (U.K.) Ltd. London;
11. McDonald, R: : " Art as Education. " Henry Holt & Comp., New York.
12. Read, Herbert (1942):" Education through Art. : Faber & Faber, London.
13. Victor D‟Amico (1953): “Creative Teaching in Art; International Textbook Company, Scranton,
Pennsylvania.
14. Whit ford, W.G. (1929):" An Introduction to Art-Education. " D. Appleton & Co
15. t; nso vk;Z % dyk v/;kiu] y{eh ukjk;.k vxzoky] vkxjk&3A
16. ;”koUrh xkSM+ % dyk f”k{kk f”k{k.kA
17. dqlqe “kekZ % dyk f”k{kkA
18. jke pUnz ’kqDy% dyk dk n”kZu( dkWjksuk vkVZ ifCy”klZ] the[kkuk, esjB m-iz-
19. jke pUnz “kqDy% ^uohu Hkkjrh; fp=dyk f”k{k.k( fdrkc egy izk- fy- bykgckn
20. jk; Ñ".knkl% ^Hkkjr dh fp=dyk*( Hkkjrh Hk.Mkj] yhMj Ásl] bykgckn
21. MkW- vfouk”k cgknqj oekZ% Hkkjrh; fp=dyk dk bfrgkl( izdk”k cqd fMiks] cjsyh
22. bZ- dqekfjy Lokeh% ^Hkkjrh; fp=dyk vkSj dykdkj*( izdk”ku foHkkx] lwpuk vkSj izlkj.k ea=ky; Hkkjr
ljdkj] ifV;kyk g;kyk gkml] ubZ fnYyh
23. MkW- f”kodqekj “kekZ ,oa MkW- jkekorkj vxzoky% ^#iizn dyk ds ewyk/kkj* yk;y cqd fMiks] fudV xouZes.V
dkWyst esjB] m-iz-
24. ^Hkkjrh; fp=dyk dk vkykspukRed bfrgkl* yfyr dyk izdk”ku 27&,] lkdsr dkWykuh] vyhx<+
PAPER CODE-9125
Course 5&6 - PEDAGOGY OF MUSIC
The student teacher will be able to –
1. Develop an understanding of the nature of the discipline of Music.
2. Get acquainted with the meaning, basic concept importance and origin of Indian music Education.
3. Understand the importance of music in individual and social life.
4. Develop appreciation for Indian classical music.
5. Use music in stress management and development of aesthetic sense.
6. Develop an understanding of the relationship of music with other subjects.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 90 -

7. Develop skills in singing different ragas of Indian classical music.
8. Develop skill in evaluating music teaching and prepare diagnostic and remedial programme.
9. Encourage students to participate in music activities.
10. Develop skills for preparation of different types of teaching plans.
11. Understand evaluation techniques and Examination Reforms.
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT-I Nature of Discipline
1. Origin and development of Indian classical music from samved to present time as a discipline.
2. Relationship of music with other discipline such as Art, dance, theater and literature.
3. Muslim influence on Indian music.
4. Rejuvenation of Indian classical music & critical appraisal of the means adopted for the rejuvenation.
5. Role of music in developing social Harmony.
UNIT-II Music as a subject in school curriculum
1. Nature, scope and importance of music at school stage.
2. Correlation of music with other school subjects.
3. Characteristics of Indian classical music, main feature of Hindustani and South Indian styles of
music.
4. Aims and values of teaching music at secondary and senior secondary school.
5. Music and Aesthetic development.
6. Role of music in stress management.
7. Therapeutic values of music.

UNIT-III Pedagogy of Music

Pedagogical analysis of the following topics of music -
1. Raga
2. That
3. Taal
4. Swar

UNIT-IV Planning and Strategies

1. Principles of teaching music.
2. Developing Annual Plan, unit plan and daily teaching plan.
3. Methods and techniques of teaching of music:-
(i) Demonstration, explanation, questioning, & dramatization
(ii) Methods of teaching Indian classical music and folk music
4. Voice training, Ear training, mind training and aesthetic appreciation.

UNIT-V Concept of Evaluation in Music

1. Evaluation tools and techniques in music
(1) Written test (2) Practical tests
2. Preparation of an achievement test: Blue print, Types of questions and Scoring.
3. Diagnostic and remedial teaching of music.
4. Discovering musical talents and aptitude and their measurement.
SESSIONAL WORK
Any two out of the following-
1. Survey of activities of any music institution.
2. Collection of patriotic songs /CD (Five)
3. Developing a Remedial Programme in Music
4. Administration & Reporting of Musical aptitude test
5. Case study of musical talent
6. Collection of five Indian classical songs and writing their notations.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 91 -

 REFERENCES

1. Music Education : By Dinesh Swaroop

2. History of Music by Padma Iyer
3. A Historical study of Indian music by Swami Pragnanandan
4. Evaluation of Rag and Tal in Indian music by M.R. Gautam
5. Fundamentals of Indian music by Swatavitra Sharma
6. Music its form, Function and Value by Swami Pragnanandan
7. Music Education New Horizons by Manorma Sharma
8. Music Perception & Cognition by Padma Iyer
9. Psychology of music by R.C. Mehta
10. Voice culture by S.A.K. Durga
11. Indian Theatre by C.B. Gupta
12. Music Research by R.C. Mehta
13. Music in Indian Art by M. Hariharam
14. Indian Aesthetics & musicology by Prof. Prem Lata Sharma
15- laxhr 'kkL= foKku by MkW- iUukyky enu
16- laxhr f'k{kk vad lEiknd MkW- y{ehukjk;.k xxZ
17- Hkkjrh; laxhr vkSj euksfoKku Jherh olq/kk dqyd.khZ
18- Hkkjrh; laxhr dk bfrgkl ys[kd Hkxor 'kj.k 'kekZ
19- Hkkjrh; laxhr dk lkSUn;Z fo/kku] e/kqjyrk HkVukxj
20- fgUnqLrkuh laxhr i)fr Øfed iqLrd efYydk % 4] Hkkr[k.Ms
21- Hkkjrh; laxhr f'k{k.k iz.kkyh ,oa mdlk orZeku Lrj ys[kd MkW - e/kqckyk lDlsuk
22- 'kkL=h; laxhr dk fodkl] vferk 'kekZ
23- jk"Vªh; ,drk esa laxhr dh Hkwfedk % MkW- lR; HkkxZo
24- laxhr 'kkL= foKku] iUukyky enu
25- laxhr dk ;ksxnku ekuo thouds fodkl es]a mek'kadj 'kekZ
26- laxhr esa oSKkfud midj.kksa dk iz;ksx % vuhrk xkSre
PAPER CODE-9126
Course 5&6 - PEDAGOGY OF BUSINESS STUDIES
Objectives: After completion the course, the student teacher will be able to-
1. Understand concept, nature, and scope of Business Studies.
2. Know about the aims and objectives of teaching Business Studies.
3. Understand future perspectives of Business Studies.
4. Prepare annual plan, unit plan and daily teaching plan.
5. Acquire knowledge of the methods and devices of teaching Business Studies.
6. Understand and use I.C.T in teaching of Business Studies.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 92 -

7. Perform pedagogical analysis of various topics in Business Studies.
8. Develop and ability to construct and use an Achievement test, Diagnostic test and remedial teaching
in Business Studies.
9. Understand and use continuous and comprehensive assessment in Business Studies teaching.

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT– I Nature of Business as a Discipline:

1. Nature and concept ofBusiness.

2. Importance of studying commerce as a subject in the context of changing global scenario.
3. Scope of commerce education in developed and developing country like India.
4. Integrating values in Commerce education.
5. Contribution of Eminent Indian and Westernbusiness Personalities; Ghanshyam Dasirla,JamsetjiTata,
DherubhaiAmbani, AlanMichaclSugar,An Wang, A.AlferedTabumam,AnduerWillian Mello, Bill
Gates.

UNIT-II Business Studies as a school subject:

1. Nature, Concept and Scope of Business Studies Teaching.
2. Importance and essential characteristics of Business Studies.
3. Correlation with other subjects viz. Economics, Accountancy, Sociology, Psychology, Geography,
Statistics, and Science etc.
4. Aims of Business Studies.
5. Aims and objectives of teaching business Studies at senior secondary level.

UNIT-III Methodology and techniques of teaching of Business Studies:

1. Maxims of teaching and general principles of teaching Business studies
2. Concept, importance, and characteristics of Annual Plan.
3. Concept, importance, and various step of Unit Plan
4. Concept, importance, characteristics and essential point of daily teaching plan.
5. Methods for teaching Business Studies:
a) Lecture-cum - Demonstration Method
b) Project Method
c) Discussion Method
d) Problem Solving Method
6. Techniques of teaching Business Studies:-
a) Questioning technique
b) Drill technique
c) Illustration technique
d) Role-playing technique
e) Assignment technique
UNIT–IV Pedagogical analysis and mode of learning.
Pedagogical analysis with reference to:
1. Identification of concept involve
2. Learning behavioral outcomes
3. Teaching learning experiences
4. Evaluation techniques

Of the following topics at senior secondary RBSE/CBSE

1. Nature and Purpose of Business
2. Forms of Business Organisations
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 93 -
3. Public, Private and Global
4. Emerging Modes of Business
5. Sources of Business Finance
6. Internal Trade

UNIT-V Evaluation and Assessment of student performance in Business Studies.

1. Nature, Concept,Aims, Importance, and Functions of evaluation.
2. Various Tools, Devices and Techniques of evaluation.
3. Characteristics of Good Questions and Qualities of Good test.
4. Preparation of Achievement test along with blue print, content analysis, scoring key and marking
scheme.
5. Diagnostic test and remedial programs.
6. Continuous and comprehensive evaluation (CCE)

SESSIONAL WORK
Any Two of the following-

1) Preparation of Unit Test along with blue print, content analysis, scoring key and marking scheme.
2) Developing a set of transparencies on any one unit related to subject.
3) Study of reaction of consumers about the services surroundingthe malls.
4) Study of the Structure and functioning of a commercial activities / Institution.
5) Pedagogical analysis of any one topic / content.
6) A life sketch of leading Businessmen.
REFERENCES
1) Sharma B.L. (2007) Vanijyashikshan R.L. book Depot, Meerut.
2) Dr. Jain K.C.S.(2008) Vanijyashikshan, Rajasthan Hindi Academy, Jaipur.
3) ParsarAshish Ashok (2007) VanijyashikshanRadhaPrakashan, Agra
4) Singh I.B.(1968) Vanijyakaadhyayan, Laxmi Narayan, Agra .
5) Asubel D.P.(1963) “The Psychology of Meaningful Verbal Learning” N.V. Grune and Stration.
6) Agarwal J.C.(2003)- Teaching of commerce, Vikas publication, New Delhi.
7) Saxena, Udaiveer : Vanijyashikshan
8) Baghela, Het Singh : Vanijyashikshan
9) RaoSema – Teaching of Commerce, Anmol Publication Pvt. Ltd. 1995.
10) Jain, K.C.S. (1989).Work Shop Report (13 Feb. to 18 Feb.)
PAPER CODE-9127
Course 5&6 - PEDAGOGY OF FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING
Objectives: After completion the course, the student teacher will be able to-
1. Understand concept, nature, and scope of Financial Accounting.
2. Know about the aims and objectives of teaching Financial Accounting.
3. Understand future perspectives of Financial Accounting teaching.
4. Prepare annual plan, unit plan and daily teaching plan.
5. Develop the skills of preparing practice sets in Accountancy with the help of vouchers and business
documents.
6. Acquire knowledge of the approaches, methods and techniques of teaching Financial Accounting.
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 94 -
 7. Understand and use I.C.T in teaching of Financial Accounting.
8. Perform pedagogical analysis of various topics in Financial Accounting.
9. Develop an ability to construct and use an Achievement test, Diagnostic Test and remedial measures
in Financial Accounting.
10. Understand and use continuous and comprehensive assessment in Financial Accounting teaching.

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT – I Nature of Financial Accounting as a Discipline.

1. Nature and types of Accounting as a discipline with reference to Commerce.
2. Importance of studying Accounting as a subject in the context of changing global scenario.
3. Nature and Concept of Financial Accounting.
4. Development of Financial Accounting Education in India with reference to sr. secondary level.
5. Contribution of Important Institutions for developing in Accountancy-
a) The Institute of Chartered Accountants of India (ICAI).
b) Institution of Chartered Financial Analysis of India (ICFAI).
c) Institute of Cost Accountants of India (ICAI).
d) The Institute of Company Secretaries of India (ICSI).
e) American Institute of Certified Public Accounts (AICPA).

UNIT-II Financial Accounting as a School subject

1. Nature, Concept and Importance of Financial Accounting in school curriculum.
2. Essential characteristics of Financial Accounting as a subject.
3. Aims and objectives of Financial Accounting at senior secondary level.
4. Correlation of financial subject with other subjects viz. Business Studies, Banking, Economics,
Mathematics and Statistics.
5. Basic conceptual scheme & future perspectives of Financial Accounting.

UNIT-III Approaches and Methodology of teaching Financial Accounting

1. Various Approaches of teaching Financial Accounting:-
a) Equation Approach
b) Journal Approach
c) Ledger Approach
d) Cash Book Approach
e) Why and How Approach‟
2. Methods of teaching Financial Accounting –
a) Lecture –cum-Demonstration method
b) Discussion method
c) Problem Solving Method
d) Project Method
e) Modern Method of teaching (ICT)
f) Teaching through practice sets
3. Techniques and devices of teaching financial Accounting-
a) Questioning technique
b) Drill technique
c) Illustration technique
d) Role- playing technique
e) Assignment technique

4. Maxims of teaching and principles of teaching Financial Accounting.

5. Planning for teaching Annual Plan, Unit Plan and Daily Teaching Plan.
6. Difference between approach, method, technique and maxims.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 95 -

UNIT-IV Pedagogical Analysis and Mode of Learning in Financial Accounting.
1. Pedagogical analysis with reference to:
a) Identification of concepts involved
b) Learning behavioral outcomes
c) Teaching Learning experiences
d) Evaluation techniques
Of the following topics of senior secondary course prescribed by RBSE/CBSE-
a) Introduction to Accounting
b) Theory Base of Accounting
c) Recording of Business Transactions
d) Trial Balance and Rectification off Errors
e) Accounting for Bills of Exchange Transactions
f) Accounting for Not-for- Profit Organization‟s
2. Modes of learning in Financial Accounting
a) Providing opportunities for group activities for preparation of Practice Set including business
document vouchers
b) Group / Individual Presentation
c) Providing opportunities for sharing ideas
d) Knowledge and use of different Subsidiary Books of Accountancy.
e) Teaching aid and activity in laboratory work
f) Reflective written assignments
UNIT– V Evaluation &Assessment of student performance in Financial Accounting:
1. Importance and concept of evaluation.
2. Various devices of testing and their need.
3. Preparation of Achievement test along with blue print, content analysis, scoring key and marking
scheme.
4. Qualities of good test.
5. Diagnostic Test and remedial programs
6. Continuous and comprehensive evaluation.

SESSIONAL WORK

Any two of the following:

1. Preparation of Unit Test along with blue print, content analysis, scoring key and marking scheme.
2. Prepare practice sets on any one of the unit with solutions.
3. One Project related to any financial topic.
4. Study of a balance sheet of any business organization.
5. Report of a visit to a business organization with a view to study its financial system.

Assessment and Evaluation

1. Concept of continuous and comprehensive evaluation, Formative and Summative Evaluation
2. Different types of questions, Blue print and construction of Achievement Test.
3. Diagnostic and Remedial measures
4. Self Evaluation, Peer Group Evaluation and Teacher Evaluation
5. Assessment Indicators of practical examination in Chemistry Such as Handling of Apparatus,
following Systematic Approach, Correct Conclusion, Understanding Cause Effect Relationship of
given Experiment, Viva-Voce and Reporting.
PRACTICUM/SESSIONAL
Any Two from following -
Practicum No. 1 is compulsory for all

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 96 -

1. Preparation of kit for Demonstration of five experiments on any Topic related to chemistry covered in
the syllabus of class VI to X.
2. Preparation of a low cost apparatus/Improvised apparatus. (Other than submitted during internship)
3. Analysis of a given Salt – Identifying Acid and Basic Radicals
4. Identification of Protein, Carbohydrate, Fat in a given substance.
5. Identification of Adulteration in some food article such as Ghee, Oil, Milk, Red Chilli powder,
Turmeric powder and Pulses etc.
REFERENCES
Aggrawal J.C.(1990), Curriculum Reforms in India, Dasba House Delhi.
Carleton, R.H. – Chemistry for new age
Chauhan S.S. (1985), Innovation in teaching learning Process, Delhi, Vikas Publishing House.
Dani D.N. (1989), "Scientific Attitude and Cognitive Style", Northern Book Centre, New Delhi.
Das R.C. (1985), Science Teaching in School, Sterling Publishers Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
Das R.C., Passi B.K. & Singh, L.C. (1975) Effectiveness of Microteaching in Training f Teachers,
NCERT, Delhi
Geoffrey, Neuss, Chemistry course companion.
Gupta, S.K. ((1983). Technology of Science Education Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
Jenkins, E.W. (2000), Innovation in science and Technology Education Vol. VII, UNESCO, Parco
Mangal, S.K. (1995), Teaching of Phsycial and Life Science, AVG Book Depot, KarolBagh
Mishra, D.C. (2008), Teaching of Chemistry, Sahitya Prakashan Agra.
Mittal, Arun (2004), Teaching of Chemistry, Efficient Offset Pvt.
Morrison & Boyd – Organic Chemistry VI Edition
Natrajan, C. (Ed.) (1997), Activity based foundation course on Science Technology and Society Homi
Bhatia Centre for science Education, Mumbai.
NCERT, National Curriculum Framework-2005
NCERT, Position Paper of NCF on Teaching of Sciene-2005.
Nuffield, Chemistry Laboratory Investigation
Pandey (2003), Major Issues in Science Teaching, Sumit Publication , New Delhi.
Richardson John. S. – Science Teaching in Secondary Schools
Saxena, N.R. and Oberoi, S.C. – Technology of Teaching
Sharma R.C. (2006), Modern Science Teaching, Dhanpat Rai Publications, New Delhi.
Sharma, B.L. and Saxena V.M. Teaching of Chemistry
Sharma, H.S. Teaching of Chemistry
Singh, Yogesh (2003) Rasaya Shikstan, APH Publishing Corp.
Their, DH, (1973) Teaching Elementary School Science A Laboratory Approach Steering Publication
Pvt. Ltd.
Thurber, W.A. and Collets A.T.- Teaching Secondary Schools.
UNESCO – Source Book for Science Teaching.
Vaidya N., Science Teaching for 21st Centaury (1999)] Deep & Deep Publications.
Vaidya, N. – The impart Science Teaching
West. J. – New Oxford Modern Science Chemistry

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 97 -

 PAPER CODE-9128
Course 7 - DRAMA AND ART IN EDUCATION
(Internal Assessment)
Objectives: After completion of this course, the student teachers will be able to:
1. Understand the role of fine arts in enhancing the creative potentials of an individual;
2. Understand the concept and basics of different art forms (all the visual and performing arts);
3. Understand the significant implications for the role of art, music and drama in education, to nurture
children‟s creativity and aesthetic sensibilities through genuine exploration, experience and free
expression;
4. Respond to the beauty in different Art forms;
5. Develop ability to appreciate the inherent rhythm, beauty and harmony in visual and performing art
forms(specifically regional, traditional and classical art forms)
6. Enhance skills for integrating different Art forms across school curriculum at secondary level ;
7. Develop skill to create artistic pieces through waste materials;
8. Develop awareness regarding the rich cultural and artistic heritage of India and the specific regions;
9. Develop awareness regarding the role of arts and crafts in the society and day-to-day life situation;
10. Get acquainted with the life and work of the local artists/artistes;
11. Deepen understanding, appreciation and skills in one chosen medium through self work and evaluate
self as an artist;
12. Develop the ability to use drama and other visual and performing art processes to generate new
knowledge, understanding and perception of the world;
13. Get acquainted with the vast range of the regional and traditional art forms in the light of National
Integration.
14. Gets an opportunity for self expression resulting in emotional harmony.
15. Communicate important social issues through drama.

COURSE CONTENT
Note : The entire course will be based on practical oriented.
UNIT - I: Visual Arts and Crafts
Experiencing visual and plastic resources and means of creative expression:
1. Exploration and Experimentation with different „materials’ of two dimensional and three dimensional
Visual Arts - such as lines, strokes, colours, shades, tones, textures etc. by rendering through pencil,
charcoal, crayon and pastel, pen and ink, water, poster and acrylic colours, rangoli, alpana, and
mandana materials, clay and metal scraps wire, thread, cloured papers, printed materials from
magazines and news paper, cardboards and other available throw away materials.
2. Exploration, experimentation and expressing with different techniques of Visual Arts like Sketching;
Drawing; Painting; Poster making; Chart making; Block and Stencil printing; Collage and Mosaic
work with a variety of coloured papers and coloured printed pictures/ photographs from magazines
and news papers; Clay modeling; Hanging mobiles and Stables; Paper cutting and folding, and other
local crafts work etc.
3. Framing and displaying of Art works.

UNIT–II Performing Arts: Dance, Music, Theatre and Puppetry Performing arts: Music and Dance
Experiencing Rhythmic and Kinetic resources and means of creative expression through:
1. Exploration and Experimentation with the terms used in Music and Dance like-Nada, Swara (Shudha,
Komal, Tivra), Saptak, Sargham, Mandra, Madhyama, Tar, Arohi Avarohi, Raga, Ragini, Laya,
Maatra, Tal, Avartal, Mishra Sam Tal, Gati, Padghat, Classical, Regional and Folk forms of Music
and Dance and other related elements.
2. Listening/viewing and exploring Regional Art forms of music and dance through live and recorded
performances.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 98 -

3. Viewing/listening to live and recorded performances of Classical, Traditional and Folk Performing
Art forms.
4. Participation and performance in any one of the Regional forms Music/ Dance.

1. Drama: Creative drama

Experiencing all the visual, plastic, Rhythmic, Kinetic and Verbal resources and means of creative
expression through:
1. Exploration and Experimentation with terms used in drama like – Movement (Gati), Gestures
(Mudra), Mime (Mukabhinaya), Mono-acting, Improvisation, Acting (Abhinaya) : (Angika, Vachika
Aharya and Satwika Abhinaya), Emotions (Bhava), Dialogue (samvad), Play (Nataka), One-act play
(Ekanki), Drama-script (Natyalekha), Characterization (Charita chitran), Stage setting (Manch sajja),
Stage props (Manch samagri), Costume (Vaish bhusha), Stage lighting (Manchiya prakash) and
related elements.
2. Explore and Experiment with observing, Improvising and re-creating the various characters from
society by participating in group workshop.
3. Listening/viewing and exploring Regional theatrical and puppetry forms through live and recorded
performances.
4. Viewing/listening to live and recorded performances of Modern and Folk drama through live and
recorded performances.
5. Participate in live performance in any one of the stage performance of drama prepared during the
work shop conducted or for staging on annual function or any cultural event of the institute.
6. Planning stage-setting, costumes designing, make-up and light designing for a
performance/presentation prepared by the student-teacher during the work shop or staging on annual
function or any cultural event of the institute.

UNIT - III: APPRECIATION OF ARTS

1. Meaning and concepts of Arts and aesthetics and its significance at secondary level of school
education (based on group discussion and expert‟s lectures).
2. Difference between Education in Arts and Arts in Education (based on group discussion and expert‟s
lectures).
3. Heritage of Indian visual and performing arts (based on discussion in the group with the help of the
sets of slides, selected for the purpose).
4. Identification of different performing Art forms and Artists; dance, music and musical instrument,
theatre, puppetry, etc. (based on a set of slides, selected for the purpose and watching live
performances of these forms in while performed in your region).
5. Knowledge of Indian Craft Traditions and its relevance in day-to-day life and education (based on a
set of slides, selected for the purpose and visiting the local craft bazaars).
6. Knowledge of Indian Contemporary Arts and Artists; Visual Arts (based on a set of slides, selected
for the purpose).
7. Indian and Regional festivals and its artistic significance (based on group or panel discussions in
classroom).
FOLLOWING WORKSHOPS WILL BE CONDUCTED:

One for visual arts and one for Performing arts and drama, conducted of half a day each, of one week
duration, for working with artists/artisans to learn basics of Arts and Crafts and understand its
pedagogical significance. The Art forms learnt during the course should be relevant to the student-
teachers in their profession. Activities, such as drawing, and painting, rangoli, clay modeling, pottery,
mixed collage, woodcraft, toy making, drama, puppetry, dance, music, etc. specifically regional forms
should be given more emphasis for making arts learner-centered. The focus of the workshops should
be on how art forms can be used as tool/ method of teaching-learning of Languages, Social Sciences,
Mathematics and Sciences.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 99 -

 SESSIONAL WORK

Any one of the following:

1. Theme-based projects from any one of the curricular areas covering its social, economic, cultural and
scientific aspects integrating various Arts and Craft forms;
2. Textbook analysis to find scope to integrate Art forms either in the text or activities or exercises;
3. Documentation of the processes of any one Art or Craft form with the pedagogical basis such as
weaving or printing of textiles, making of musical instruments, folk performances in the community,
etc. on the basis of –
1. how the artist design their products;
2. manage their resources, including raw materials;
3. marketing, problems they face; and
4. how make them aware of these aspects of historical, social, economic, scientific and environmental
concerns;
5. Student-teacher should prepare at least two lesson plans in their respective streams of subjects (
Science/ Maths / Social Sciences/ Languages etc.) while integrating different art forms.
6. To prepare a scrap-book on the great artists, musicians, dancers theatricians and craftsman with a
write-up on their introduction and art work with all types of photographs and illustrations of their
paintings, sculptures, musical concerts, musical instruments, performances and artifacts.

NOTE: In this paper there will be no external examination. Internally college will conduct a written
examination carrying a weightage of 10 marks and a practical examination carrying a weightage of 20
marks, Viva Voce carrying a weightage of 10 marks and 10 marks will be awarded for sessional work.

College will conduct Internally

Total Marks: 50 Internal

Assessments: 50

Written examination 10 Marks

Practical examination(VISUAL ARTS AND CRAFTS 20 Marks
PERFORMING ARTS: DANCE, MUSIC, THEATRE AND
PUPPETRY APPRECIATION OF ARTS )

Viva Voce 10 Marks

PRACTICUM/SESSIONAL WORK 10 Marks

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 100 -

SUGGESTED RESOURCES FOR CONDUCTING THIS COURSE
 Gradually a Resource Centre for Arts and Crafts should be develop in institution, where materials,
including books, CDs, audio and video cassettes, films, software, props, art works of Regional and
National level, books and journals must be displayed for the purpose of reference and continuous
motivation. For this institutions can take help from Internet and other art education centers like SIERT,
CCRT, RIEs, State Lalit Kala, Sangeet Natak and Sahitya Academies etc.
SUGGESTED REFERENCES:
(N.C.E.R.T.) Publcations
1. Creative Drama at the Primary Level, Virmani J.D.; NCERT Pblication
2. ACurriculum in Arts, A conceptual Framework, Virmani J.D.; Dept. of Education in Social
Sciences and Humanities, NCERT Pblication
3. Teacher handbook of Art Education: Class VI: NCERT Pblication
4. Let us Sing Together, vkvks feydj xk,a ; 1999 Education: NCERT Pblication
5. Sangeet ka Laharata Sagar ; Vishnu Digam Paluskar (Hindi): NCERT Pblication
6. Hindustani Shastriya Sangeet ke pramukh Kanth Sangeetagya.: NCERT Pblication
7. Uttar Bhartiya Shastrriya Kanth Sangeet : Ek Adhyyan.: NCERT Pblication
8. Raja Ravi Verma (Hindi): NCERT Pblication
9. Kala Shiksha ki Shikshak Sndarshika (Class V): NCERT Pblication
10. Fun with Art and Crafts : NCERT Pblication
Central Inst. Of Educational Technology (CIET) Publication
11. Audio-Visual Materials on visual and performing arts.
Center for Cultural Resources and Training (CCRT) Publication
Audio-Visual Materials:
12. Oddisi dance Part – 1 & 2
13. Bharat Natyam Dance – 1 & 2
14. Rass Manipuri Dance
15. Khajuraho (World Heritage)
16. Mahabalipuram (World Heritage)
Audio Cassettes:
17. Azadi ke geet (song of freedom movement)
18. My pledge to freedom
19. Regional songs Part – 1 & 2
Colour Slides:
20. Slides on Performing Arts
21. Slides on Plastic Arts
22. Forts, Palaces and Havelies of Rajasthan
23. Traditional toys
24. Art of Puppetry
25. Musiacal Instruments of India Part – 1 & 2
26. Traditional Theatre forms of India Part – 1 & 2
Publication:
27. Indian Classical Dance ; Kapila Vatsayan
28. Living Dolls: Story of Indian Puppets ; Jiwan Pani
29. The Language of Music ; V. K.Narayan Menon
National Book Trust of India Publication:
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 101 -
30. Indian Folk arts and crafts: Jasleen Dhamija
31. Indian Painting ; Srinivasan Murti
32. Art : The basis of Education ; Devi Prasad
33. Performance Tradition of India; Suresh Awasthi
34. Creative Drama and Puppetry in Education; R. Contractor
35. f’k{kk dk okgu dyk % nsohizlkn( us’kuy cqd VªLV izdk’ku
36. :iizn dyk ds ewyk/kkj MkW- f'kodqekj 'kekZ ,oa Mk- jkekorkj vxzoky] yk;y cqd fMiks]a fudV xouZes.V
dkfyt] esjB (m-iz-
37. dyk ds ewy rRo MkW- fpjathyky >k] y{eh dyk dqVhj] u;k xat] xkft;kckn (m- iz- 201001
38. f'kYi dFkk uUnyky clq] lkfgR; Hkou fy-] bykgkckn (m- iz-) 341
39. dyk vkSj dye MkW- fxjkZt fd'kksj vxzoky] Hkkjrh; fp=dyk dk vkykspukRed bfrgkl yfyrk dyk
izdk'ku] 27&,] lkdsr dkyksuh] vyhx<
40. Hkkjr dk ewfrZf'kYi MkW- pkYlZ ,y] Qkcjh] jktiky ,.M lUl] d'ehjh xsV] fnYyh& 110 006

PAPER CODE-9129
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 102 -
 Course: 8 CRITICAL UNDERSTANDING OF ICT
(Internal Assessment)
Objectives The student teacher will be able to :-
1. Understand the use of ICT in education.
2. Use computer for enhancing teaching learning process.
3. Have access to information and plan teaching learning according.
4. Effectively use ICT tools, software applications and digital resources.
5. Integrate ICT into teaching-learning and evaluation.
6. Acquire, organize and create digital resources.
7. Use ICT for making classroom process more inclusive and to address multiple learning abilities.
8. Use internet to communicate and collaborate with others.
9. Get acquainted with the new trends in ICT.
10. Use ICT for joyful and participatory learning.
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT- I ICT in Education
1. Concept of ICT.
2. Need and importance of ICT in Education and E-Learning.
3. Scope of ICT: Teaching learning Process, Academic Support, Evaluation, Research and
Administration, Publication.
4. Role of ICT in following areas :
a) Curriculum Development
b) Curriculum Transaction
c) Classroom Environment
d) Education Management
e) Evaluation

UNIT -II ICT based Resources

Concept, Use, Functioning of the Following ICT resources
1. Computer- Block Diagram, Generation, Characteristics and Uses of Computer, Peripheral Devices,
Functions and Types of Operating System, Computer Care: - Viruses, Security, Maintenance and PC‟s
and its Brief Specifications as per current Technologies.
2. Radio, TV, News Papers, Overhead Projector, LCD Projector, Slide Projector, Visualiser, Smart
Board, Smart Phones, Tablets.
3. Introduction of Networking and Wi-Fi Zone.
4. Recent developments in ICT.

Unit III: Use of ICT in School

1) Using Word Processor, PowerPoint and Excel, using open source Software.
2) Computer as a Teaching Machine – CAI, CBI, CMI, CALT.
3) Internet: - Introduction, Internet Surfing, Search Engine, Web Browsers, Educational Websites,
Social Networking, Cloud Computing, E-Mail, Server, Virtual Classroom, Video Conferencing,
Teleconferencing, E-Governance.
4) Challenges in Integrating ICT in School Education.

Practical
1. Use of internet for educational content-(a) Use of search engines (b) Searching of e- content-
tutorials, PPT, Articles etc.
2. Word Processor-(a) Working with Notepad, WordPad and Paint (b) Working with files and folders:
creating, copying, remaining deleting etc.(c) Creating a document in Word, saving remaining, deleting,
Cut, Copy ,Paste (d) Applying basic formatting on to a word document, Alignment, Fonts, Boarders
and Shadings ,Headers and Footers, Print settings and Previewing (e) Inserting Tables and Chart

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 103 -

 (f)Mail Merge (g) Creating a Biodata, Letter Head, Newspaper Advertisement (h) Creating Interview
Call Letters using Mail Merge
3. Excel (spreadsheet)-(a) Creating a worksheet, entering data in a work sheet (b) Inserting formula and
functions using
Formula (c) Inserting graphs and charts into a worksheet (d) Sorting and subtotals (e) Creating a mark
sheet
4. PowerPoint presentation-(a) creating a new slide show, opening an existing slide show, running a slide
show (b) Changing slide design and layout, inserting custom animation (c) Inserting pictures,
Diagrams, Movies and sounds, Chart, Table.
SESSIONAL WORK
Activity Based Sessional (Any One)
1. Prepare an E-Learning Lesson using Internet educational resources in any teaching subject.
2. Prepare mark-sheet and marks register of a class and its statistical analysis and graphical presentation.
3. Prepare a Biodata and a calendar and time table of a school.
NOTE: In this paper there will be no external examination. Internally college will conduct a
written examination carrying a weightage of 10 marks and a practical examination carrying a
weightage of 20 marks, Viva Voce carrying a weightage of 10 marks and 10 marks will be
awarded for sessional work.

College will conduct Internally

Internal Assessment Internal

Assessments: 50

Written examination 10 Marks

Practical examination 20 Marks

Viva Voce 10 Marks

PRACTICUM/SESSIONAL WORK 10 Marks

External Assessments Total Marks 50

Theory External Examination 50 Marks

Total External + Internal 100 Marks

REFERENCES
1. Abbott Chris, Falmer Routledge (2001). ICT: Changing Education
2. Arora Bansal. Computer Fundamentals.
3. Dyne, Nand kishore. Information Technology.
4. Kishore, Chavan. Information and Communication.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 104 -

5. Kozma B. Robert (2003). Technology, Innovation and Educational Change: A Global Perspective : a
Report of the Second Information Technology in Education Study, Module 2.
6. Mohanty, Laxman and Vohra, Niharika. ICT Strategies for schools, SAGE.
7. Rajasekar, S. Computer Education and Educational Computing. Neelkamal Publications. Hyderabad.
8. S.Sangman(2001).Microsoft Office 2000 for Windows,Pearson Education
9. Sinha, P.K. (1992). Computer Fundamentals. New Delhi: BPB.
10. Subramanian, N (1988). Introduction to Computers. New Delhi: Tata Mc Graw Hill
11. Sudhak, V, Varanasi and Mrunalini. Computer Education. Neelkamal Publications. Hyderabad.
12- Ckxqy lqjs”kpUnz] lwpuk izkS|ksfxdh ,oa usVodZ iz.kkyhA jkor izdk”kuA
13- gjiky “kekZ] dEI;wVj dkWlZl s A caly fizUVlZ] vyojA

Journals:-
 Educational Technology and Society, Vol. 13, No. 2, April 2010. Rodriguez, Patricio ; Nussbaum,
Misguel ; Lopez, Ximena; Sepulveda, Marcos. A Monitoring and Evaluation Scheme for an ICT –
Supported Education Program in schools.
 International Journal of Education and development using Information and Communication
Technology, Vol. 9, No. 1 , April 1, 2013. Fu, Jo Shan. ICT in Education: A critical Literature
Review and its Implications.

Web Links
 www.learn-ict.org.uk
 www.elmoglobal.com
 www.teachersofindia.org
 www.teach.ict.com
 www.adobe.com

PAPER CODE-9130
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 105 -
 Course 9- OPEN AIR SESSION / SUPW CAMP
Every college will organize 5 days camp in the first year of B.Ed. Course. Participation in such camp will
be compulsory for all students.
Performance of students will be evaluated internally.
Objectives of the camp will be as follows:-

1. To develop understanding about local environment and Community for connecting classroom
teaching with outside world.
2. To develop sensitivity towards self, society and environment.
3. To develop feeling of togetherness and working collaboratively.
4. To develop organizational skills and leadership abilities.
5. To develop skill of conducting surveys.
6. To develop an understanding about sustainable future.
7. To develop dignity of labour through community service.

Suggested activities for Open Air Session/SUPW Camp

1. Study of the local environment/ socio cultural issues through survey.
2. Community awareness performance – cleanliness campaigns, plantation, value education, etc.
3. Participation in Health and Spiritual activities like morning Assembly, Yoga, P.T., Meditation,
Silence hour.
4. Participation in Aesthetic and recreational activities.
5. Documentation and organization of exhibition for local community.
6. Productive and creative craft activities.

Note : Student teachers will participate in the above mentioned activities in collaborative manner (to
develop the feeling of working and living together)

Guideline for assessment Max Marks 50

S. No. Activity Marks

1. Participation in preparation of Camp 5
2. Presentation of report of survey/ creative work 20
3. Participation in Community Awareness Programme 15
4. Participation in organizational process/community
10
living/cultural and aesthetic activities
Total Marks
50

PAPER CODE-9131
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 106 -
 Course : 10 INTERNSHIP PROGRAMME (School Intership Phase-I)
School Internship is designed to lead to the development of broad repertoire of perspectives, professional
capacities, teacher dispositions, sensibilities and skills. During the internship, a student-teacher shall
work as a regular teacher and participate in all the school activities, including planning, teaching and
assessment, interacting with school teachers, community members and children.
Objectives –
After completion of the Internship the student - teachers will be able to –
1. Develop the understanding of the school and its management.
2. Develop the ability to plan and manage the class-room teaching.
3. Develop the sensibility towards diverse needs of learners in school.
4. Develop ability to discharge various responsibilities expected from a teacher.
5. Organize and conduct the co- curricular activities.
6. Get acquainted with various school records maintained by the school.
7. Maintain records expected from a teacher.
8. Develop skills of conducting community contact programmes.
9. Get acquainted with the functioning of SMC.

Execution of the Internship Programme

The internship programme shall be divided into 2 years. In the first year, 4 weeks will be allotted.
This will include one week of school observation and three weeks of practice - teaching during which
each student - teacher has to teach 2 periods per day (one period each for 2 pedagogy subjects). Besides
teaching, the student - teacher has to complete his/her tasks and assignments related to the courses
mentioned in the first year. The three weeks practice teaching will also include the delivery of criticism
lessons (one in each pedagogy subject) and also observation of 5 lessons of peers of each of the two
subjects.
This practice of teaching programme is adopted so as to give a proper training of teaching skills
and thorough guidance to the student-teachers by the subject lecturer.
Execution of the Internship Programme
I Year
(4 Weeks)

(1 Week) (3Weeks)

Practice teaching in both pedagogy

 School Observation (Understanding subjects in schools
the School Environment and  Teaching the units in both subjects
observing the Class room teaching of (20 DLP)
regular teachers)  Preparation of Unit Plan
 Engagement with the field to  Blue print + Achievement test +
complete the tasks and assignments Remedial teaching
related to the prescribed courses  2 Criticism lessons (1 in each of the 2
subjects)
 Preparation of TLM
 Lesson observations by the peers (5-5
lesson in both subjects)

Marks Distribution for Internship Programme (Phase-I)

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 107 -
 Practice Teaching

(C) Peer group lesson observation 10

Ordinary + Criticism – 5 lesson in each round (5+5)

(D) Practice Teaching two round one in each subject

In each subject 13 lesson + 1 test + 1criticism

Lessons- (50 + 50) = 100

Test - (10 + 10) = 20
Criticism- (10 + 10) = 20
Total = 150

PAPER CODE-9132
Course: 11 EXTERNAL ASSESSMENT
ONE FINAL LESSON OF PEDAGOGY OF A SCHOOL SUBJECT
[I YEAR]
4. The weightage of final lesson will be 100 marks. Final lesson will be conducted at the end of first
academic year i.e. after the completion of 1st phase of internship.
5. During the final practical examination each candidate will have to teach one Lesson in any one
of the two teaching subjects. However, he shall have to prepare lesson plan in both the teaching
subjects and should be prepared to deliver lesson in both the subjects if required.
6. The Board of examiners for external examination will consist of:
d) The Principle of the college concerned.
e) One senior member of the college.
f) Two external examiners appointed by the university.
Note: - The selection of the faculty member and two examiners be such that, as for as possible, Board
of Examiners represent all the three faculties-Humanities, Languages and Science.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 108 -

External Practical Exam

Presentation in one subject - 100 Marks

SECOND YEAR

Course 12 Pedagogy of a School Subject One – Part II

Course 13 Pedagogy of a School Subject Two – Part II

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 109 -

Course 14 Knowledge and Curriculum

Course 15 Assessment for Learning

Course 16 Educational Management and Creating an Inclusive School

Understanding the Self

Course 17
Internal assessment

Optional Course*
1. Vocational/Work Education
2. Health and Physical Education
3. Peace Education
Course 18
4. Guidance and Counseling
5. Innovations and Action Research

School Internship 16 Weeks

Internal assessment
Course 19
Engagement with the Field: Tasks and Assignments
for
III. Course 12 & 13
Peace Education
IV. Guidance and Counseling
V. Innovations and
External Action research
Assessment
Course 20
Viva-Voce for School Internship

Course – 12 & 13

To opt for the pedagogy of a school subject, the student teacher shall have to offer any two
teaching subjects out of the following papers, which he/she has studied at Graduation /P.G. level
for at least two years:

1- Pedagogy of Hindi.
2- Pedagogy of English.
3- Pedagogy of Sanskrit.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 110 -

 4- Pedagogy of Urdu.
5- Pedagogy of Rajasthani.
6- Pedagogy of Mathematics.
7- Pedagogy of General Science.
8- Pedagogy of Physics.
9- Pedagogy of Chemistry.
10- Pedagogy of Biology.
11- Pedagogy of Home Science.
12- Pedagogy of Computer Science
13- Pedagogy of Social Science.
14- Pedagogy of Sociology
15- Pedagogy of Psychology
16- Pedagogy of History.
17- Pedagogy of Political Science.
18- Pedagogy of Economics.
19- Pedagogy of Geography.
20- Pedagogy of Art.
21- Pedagogy of Music.
22- Pedagogy of Business Studies
23- Pedagogy of Financial Accounting

PAPER CODE-9201
Course 12 & 13 - fgUnh dk f'k{k.k 'kkL=
izf'k{k.kkFkhZ bl ikB~;Øe dks i<+us ds mijkUr&
1- fgUnh ikB~;p;kZ fuekZ.k ds fl)kar tku ldsx a sA
2- fgUnh ikB~;p;kZ ,oa ikB~;iqLrd dks tku ldsx a sA
3- fgUnh Hkk"kk ds ewY;kadu dh izfØ;k dks tku ldsx a sA
4- ek/;fed f'k{kk cksMZ }kjk izLrkfor ikB~;p;kZ dk lekykspukRed fo'ys"k.k dj ldsx
a sA
5- ,d vPNh fgUnh dh ikB~; iqLrd dh fo'ks"krk tku ldsx a sA
6- fgUnh Hkk"kk f'k{kd dh fo'ks"krk tku ldsx a sA
7- fgUnh iz'uksa ds vk/kkj fcUnq tku ldsaxAs
8- fgUnh iz'u i= fuekZ.k ,oa vadu izfØ;k dks tku ldsaxAs
9- fgUnh Hkk"kk f'k{kd dh O;olkf;d ,oa uSfrd ftEesnkfj;ksa dk fuoZgu dj ldsx
a sA
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 111 -
10- fgUnh Hkk"kk f'k{kd ds 'kSf{kd mUu;u gsrq fofo/k mikxeksa dh tkudkjh izkIr dj ldsx
a sA
ikB~;Øe&fo"k;oLrq
bdkbZ&I fgUnh f'k{k.k esa ewY;kadu
1- ewY;kadu dk vFkZ] egRo ,oa fo'ks"krk,¡
2- ewY;kadu dh fof/k;k¡] fyf[kr] ekSf[kd o l`tukRed ¼ikBkUrxZr ,oa ikBksijkUr½ lrr~ ,oa O;kid
ewY;kadu] iqucZyu] ikjLifjd lewg] bdkbZ okj] oLrqfu"B] vfr y?kwÙkjkRed] y?kwÙkjkRed o
fucU/kkRedA
3- iz'uksa ds vk/kkj fcUnq& leL;k lek/kku iz'u] l`tukRed fpUru okys iz'u] dkYifud] fopkjksÙa kstd]
ifjos'kh; ltxrk okys iz'u rFkk xfrfof/k vk/kkfjr iz'uA iz'u i= fuekZ.k] uhy i=] fo"k; oLrq dk
fo'ys"k.k] iz'u i=] vadu] ;kstuk ,oa mÙkj dqathA

bdkbZ& II fgUnh dh ikB~;p;kZ ,oa ikB~;iqLrd

1- fgUnh ikB~;p;kZ fuekZ.k ds fl)karA
2- jktLFkku f'k{kk cksMZ }kjk izLrkfor ek/;fed@mPp ek/;fed d{kkvksa dh ikB~;p;kZ dk
lekykspukRed fo'ys"k.kA
3- ,d vPNh fgUnh Hkk"kk dh ikB~;iqLrd dh fo'ks"krk,¡A
4- jktLFkku ek/;fed f'k{kk cksMZ }kjk izLrkfor ek/;fed@mPp ek/;fed d{kkvksa dh fgUnh ikB~;iqLrd
dh lekykspukA
5- {ks=h; lkfgR;dkjksa dh thouh] O;fDrRo ,oa d`frRoA

bdkbZ& III fgUnh Hkk"kk f'k{kd

1- fgUnh Hkk"kk f'k{kd dh fo'ks"krk,aA
2- Hkk"kk f'k{kd dh O;olkf;d ,oa uSfrd ftEesnkfj;kaA
3- fgUnh f'k{kd ds 'kSf{kd mUu;u gsrq mikxe&
 lsokjr izf'k{k.k dk;ZØe
 laxksf"B;ka ,oa dk;Z'kkyk,sa
 O;olkf;d laxBuksa dh lnL;rk ,oa lgHkkfxrk
 egkfo|ky; esa ifjppkZ
 iqLrdky; ,oa okpuky; dk mi;ksx
 vkWu ykbZu oSpkfjd vknku iznku
l=h; dk;Z fuEukafdr esa ls ¼dksbZ ,d½
1- fdlh ,d fgUnh nSfud lekpkj i=& lekpkj i=ksa ds fofHkUu LrEHkksa dh leh{kk djrs gq, 'kSf{kd
mikns;rk dks /;ku esa j[kdj izfrosnu rS;kj djukA
2- fdlh ,d cky fQYe@cky lkfgR; dk leh{kkRed v/;;uA
3- {ks=h; fdlh ,d lkfgR;dkj ds O;fDrRo ,oa d`frRo ij ys[k fyf[k;s ¼lekt laLd`fr] 'kkafr f'k{kk]
ukjh f'k{kk esa ;ksxnku½
4- Hkk"kk f'k{k.k ds nkSjku vkus okyh leL;k ij fØ;kRed vuqla/kku dk fØ;kUo;u dj izfrosnu rS;kj
djukA
5- nks o"khZ; izf'k{k.k dky ds nkSjku tks lh[[email protected] fd;k mldks /;ku esa j[krs gq, izfrosn u rS;kj
djukA

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 112 -

 lanHkZ iqLrdsa
1- 'kekZ] ch-,u- ¼1997½ ^^fgUnh f'k{k.k** lkfgR; izdk'kuA
2- frokjh] mn;ukjk;.k ¼1999½ ^^Hkk"kk f'k{k.k**&fouksn iqLrd eafnj] vkxjkA
3- ukxnk] Hkaojyky ¼2000½ ^^fgUnh Hkk"kk esa orZuh ,oa mPpkj.k lEcU/kh =qfV;ka ,oa mipkj**] Dykfldy
ifCyf'kax daiuh] ubZ fnYyhA
4- ik.Ms; jke'kdy ¼2004½ ^^uwru fgUnh f'k{k.k**] fouksn iqLrd eafnj] vkxjkA
5- flag] fujatu dqekj ¼2006½ ^^ek/;fed fo|ky;ksa esa fgUnh f'k{k.k**] jktLFkkuh fgUnh xzaFk vdkneh
t;iqjA
6- cD'kh] ,u-,l- ¼2007½ ^^fgUnh f'k{k.k**] izsj.kk izdk'ku lsDVj 14] jksfg.kh] ubZ fnYyhA
7- 'kekZ ,oa xqIrk ¼2007½ ^^fgUnh f'k{k.k**] lkfgR;xkj] t;iqjA
8- ukxnk] Hkoajyky ¼2007½ ^^f'k{kk ds uwru vk;ke** vadqj izdk'ku] mn;iqjA
9- HkkbZ ;ksxUs nzthr ¼2008½ ^^fgUnh Hkk"kk f'k{k.k**] fouksn iqLrd eafnj] vkxjkA
10- 'kekZ ,oa 'kekZ ¼2008½ ^^fgUnh Hkk"kk rRo ,oa mipkjkRed dk;Z** Jqfr ifCyds'ku] t;iqj&6A
11- 'kekZ ,e-Mh- ^^fgUnh ekr` Hkk"kk f'k{k.k**] vxzlus f'k{kk izdk'ku] t;iqjA
12- tks'kh vkse izdk'k ¼2008½ ^^fgUnh Hkk"kk lkfgR; f'k{k.k**] jkW;y ifCyds'ku] t;iqjA
13- ik.Ms;] jke'kdyk ¼2008½ **fgUnh f'k{k.k**] fouksn iqLrd eafnj] vkxjkA
14- xq:] dkerk izlkn ¼2009½ ^^fgUnh O;kdj.k** lkfgR;xkj] t;iqjA
15- xq: dkerk izlkn ¼2009½ ^^o`gn fgUnh O;kdj.k**] lkfgR;xkj] t;iqjA
16- ukxnk] Hkaojyky ¼2011½ ^^fgUnh Hkk"kk =qfV;ka ,oa mipkj**] Dykfldy ifCyf'kax dEiuh] ubZ fnYyhA
17- ukxnk] Hkaojyky ukxnk] MkW- }kfjdk izlkn ¼2015½ ^^fØ;kRed vuqla/kku ,oa lkaf[;dh**] vadqj
izdk'ku] mn;iqjA

PAPER CODE-9202
Course 12 & 13 - PEDAGOGY OF ENGLISH

PEDAGOGY OF TEACHING ENGLISH

OBJECTIVES:
4. To enable the student -teachers to know and understand the basic concepts related to the
resources for ELT , status ,issues , problems and challenges of ELT ( English Language
Teaching) , assessment and evaluation , and remedial work .
5. To enable the student -teachers to apply the knowledge and understanding of the basic
concepts of ELT in the actual classroom conditions .
6. To enable the student-teachers to grow as teachers of ELT .

Course Content:
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 113 -
UNIT -1 RESOURCES : Audio Aids: radio, tape recorder, lingua-phone,
language lab
Visual Aids: pictures, word cards, flash cards, charts, picture strips,
models, textbooks, workbooks, flannel board, blackboard, objects,
projectors, newspapers, „realia‟ , advertisements, and dictionary.
A.V Aids: computer, T.V. mobile phone, and websites for ELT.
Multilingualism as a resource : basic concept, scope , need , basic
procedure/process of using multilingualism in the classroom, precautions
, merits and demerits.
UNIT -2 STATUS, ISSUES, PROBLEMS AND CHALLENGES : Status of ELT
in the curriculum at the elementary school stage and secondary school
stage , policy related issues, actual problems in the field and
strategies for dealing with the present and future challenges.
UNIT -3 ASSESSMENT AND EVALUATION : Basic concept , types , need ,
scope, difference between assessment and evaluation, approaches to
assessment and evaluation , methods ,techniques and strategies for
assessment and evaluation at the elementary and secondary stage,
testing of language content and language skills, and Unit -test .
Remedial Work : Basic concept, types ,need ,scope and strategies.
Sessional work

Any one of the following:

1. A critical analysis of any one of the English Textbooks prescribed at the elementary stage or
secondary stage or senior secondary stage .
2. A critical analysis of the previous two years Question papers of English used at the elementary
stage or secondary stage or senior secondary stage in Rajasthan .
3. Submission of three recently published articles on ELT and their abstracts.

A List of Suggested Readings:

1. Baruah, T.C. (1985). The English Teacher’s Handbook. New Delhi: Sterling Publishing Pvt. Ltd.

2. Bright, J. A. and McGregor, G. P. (1970). Teaching English as Second Language. London:

Longman.

3. Brumfit, C.J. (1984). Communicative Methodology in Language Teaching. Cambridge:

Cambridge University Press.

4. Crystal ,David ( 2003). The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the English Language. Cambridge :
C.U.P.

5. Doff, A. (1988). Teaching English. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

6.. Freeman, Diane-Larsen. (2000). Techniques and Principles in language Teaching. Oxford: Oxford
University Press.

7. Krishnaswamy, N. and Krishnaswamy, Lalitha. (2005). Methods of Teaching English. New

Delhi: Macmillan.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 114 -

 8. Krishnaswamy, N. and Krishnaswamy, Lalitha. (2005). Teaching English: Approaches, Methods
and Techniques. New Delhi: Macmillan.

9. Lado, R. (1971). Language Teaching. New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill Publishing.

10. NCF 2005 .New Delhi: NCERT .

11. Paliwal, A.K. (2012). Methodology of Teaching English as a Second Language. Jaipur:
Kalpana Publications.

12. Raimes, Ann. (2010). Techniques in Teaching Writing. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

13. Richards, J.C. and Rodgers, T.S. (2014). Approaches and Methods in Language Teaching
.Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

14.Venkteshwaran, S. ( 1995) .The Principles of Teaching. English.Vikas Publishing House :New

Delhi .
15. Yadav, Saryug. (2014). Challenges of Teaching English Language and Literature in the Age
of Globalization. New Delhi: Lakshi Publishers.

===========================================

PAPER CODE-9203
Course 12 & 13 - laLd`r dk f”k{k.k ”kkL=
mn~ns”; & ikB~;dze iw.kZrk ds i”pkr izf”k{k.kkFkhZ %&
1- laLd`r dh /ofu;ksa] “kCnksa] OkkD;ksa dk oxhZdj.k dj iz;ksx dj ldsaxsA
2- laLd`r ds fo}kuksa] laLFkkvksa dk ifjp; izkIr dj izsj.kk xzg.k dj ldsx
a sA
3- laLd`r dh if=dkvksa dh leh{kk dj ldsx
a sA
4- laLd`r f”k{kd ds xq.kksa ,oa nkf;Roksa dks le> ldsaxs
5- laLd`r f”k{kd dh O;olkf;d n{krk ds dk;Zdzeksa esa lgHkkxkh cu ldsaxsA
6- laLd`r f”k{kd dh ewY;&lanfHkZr tokcnsgh dks le> ldsaxsA
7- laLd`r d{k dh vko”;drk o lkt&lTtk dks le> ldsaxsA
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 115 -
8- laLd`r ikB~;dzeksa dh leh{kk dj ldsxsA
9- ikB~;iqLrdkas dh leh{kk dj ldsx
a sA
10- Nk=ksa dh laLÑr lEcU/kh mPpkj.k] orZuh vFkok okD; jpuk lEcU/kh =qfV;ksa dk fujkdj.k djus gsrq
mipkjkRed f”k{k.k ;kstuk fuekZ.k dj ldsx
a sA
11- laLd`r f”k{k.k ds vuqHkwr leL;kvksa ds fujkdj.k gsrq fdz;kRed vuql/a kku (Action Research) ds vkdYi
dk fuekZ.k dj ldsx
a sA
fo’k;oLrq

bdkbZ & I laLd`r ikB~;dze ,oa ikB~;iqLrd

1- ikB~;p;kZ ,oa ikB~;dze dk lEcU/k] ikB~;dze dk lEizR;;] ek/;fed] mPp ek/;fed d{kkvksa ds laLÑr
ikB~;Øe dh leh{kk ¼jk-ek-f”k-cksMZ }kjk izLrkfor½
2- vPNh laLd`r ikB~;iqLrd dh fo”ks’krk,a] ek/;fed] mPp ek/;fed d{kkvksa ds laLÑr ikB~; iqLrd dh
leh{kk ¼jk-ek-f”k- cksMZ }kjk izLrkfor½

bdkbZ& II laLÑr f”k{k.k gsrq f”k{k.k&vf/kxe lkexzh &

1- lgk;d lkexzh & nz”;] JO; lkexzh] ,ylhMh]ihihVh] lai’sz k.k rduhdh fuekZ.k ,oa iz;ksxA
2- iqLrdky;] i=if=dk,a] Kku dks’k] “kCn dks’k vkfnA
3- Hkk’kk iz;ksx”kkyk
4- lkeqnkf;d lalk/ku

bdkbZ & III laLd`r f”k{kd

1- laLÑr f”k{kd dh fo”ks’krk,a
2- laLÑr f”k{kd dh O;kolkf;d uSfrdrk
3- laLÑr f”k{kd ds O;kolkf;d mUu;u gsrq mikxe& lsokjr izf”k{k.k dk;ZØe] laxks’Bh]isuy ppkZ] dk;Z”kkyk]
vkfn esa lgHkkfxrk] O;kolkf;d laxBuksa dh lnL;rk] egkfo|ky; esa ifjppkZ] vkWu ykbZu oSpkfjd
vknku&iznkuA
4- laLd`r Hkk’kk ifj’kn] laLd`r laHkk’k.k lewg] laLd`r &vfHku;hdj.k]l`tukRed ys[ku Dyc vkfnA
l=h; dk;Z
fuEukfdr esa ls fdlh ,d xfrfof/k dk p;u dj izfrosnu rS;kj djukA
1- laLÑr dh fdlh ,d iqLrd dh leh{kkA
2- laLd`r f”k{kk ls lEcfU/kr ,d vuqHkwr leL;k ds fujkdj.k gsrq fdz;kRed ;kstuk rS;kj djukA
3- laLd`r dh ekud (Standard) if=dk ls fdUgha nks ys[kksa dk lkjka”k laLd`r esa rS;kj djukA
4- jktLFkku ds fdlh ,d laLd`r fo}ku@laLFkku dk ifjp; ,oa ;ksxnku ij lk{kkRk~dkj vk/kkfjr izfrosnu
rS;kj djukA
lUnHkZ iqLrdsa
1- vkIVs]oh-,l-¼2008½ laLd`r fgUnh dks”k] t;iqj] jpuk izdk”ku
2- Hkalkyh] vk”kk ¼2004½ laLd`r f”k{k.k ds u;s vk;ke] tks/kiqj] jktLFkkuxzUFkkxkj
3- nos] ve`ryky ,oa “kekZ] MkW-fu:iek ¼2012½lw{e f”k{k.k ds fl}kUr ,oa vH;kl] vkxjk]jk/kk izdk”ku efUnj izk -
4- nos] ve`ryky] ikVuh] m’kk ,oa ukxnk] mn;yky ¼2013½ laLd`r dk f”k{k.k “kkL=] vkxjk] jk/kk izdk”ku
efUnj izk-fyfeVsM
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 116 -
5- f}osnh] dfiy nso ¼2008½ jpukuqokndkSeqnzh] t;iqj fo”ofo|ky; izdk”ku
6- xks;y] izhfrizHkk ¼2000½ laLd`r O;kdj.k] tks/kiqj jktLFkku xzUFkkxkj
7- tks”kh] eksrhyky ,oa “kekZ] eatq ¼2002½ laLd`r f”k{k.k] p.Mhx<+ ] nsoukjk;.k izdk”ku
8- d.kZflag ¼1997) laLd`r f”k{k.k] y[kheiqj&[khjh] xksfoUn izdk”ku
9- feJ] izHkk”kadj ¼1984½ laLd`r f”k{k.k] p.Mhx<+] gfj;k.kk xzaFk vdkneh
10- feÙky] larks’k ¼2007½ laLd`r f”k{k.k] esjB] vkj-yky] cqd fMiks
11- ik.Ms;] jke”kdy ¼1995½] laLd`r f”k{k.k] vkxjk] fouksn iqLrd efUnj
12- lQk;k] vkj-,u-¼1990½ laLd`r f”k{k.k ] tkya/kj fdrkc ?kj
13- lkEcf”koewfrZ] dEcEikVh ¼2006½ laLd`r f”k{k.ka] t;iqj ] nhif”k[kk izdk”ku
14- lR;nso flag ,oa “kekZ] “kf”kdyk ¼2014½ laLd`r f”k{k.k vkxjk] vxzoky ifCyds”kUl
15- lkrosydj] Jhikn] nkeksnj ¼2004½ Lo;a&f”k{kd] fnYyh] jktiky ,.M lUl
16- “kekZ] eqjyh/kj ¼2003½ laLd`r f”k{k.k leL;k] fr:ifr] jk’Vªh; laLd`r laLFkku
17- “kekZ] ,u-ds- ¼2008½ laLd`r f”k{k.k] ubZ fnYyh] ds-,l-ds ifCy”klZ ,oa fMfLVªC;wVlZ
18- “kkL=h] oklqnso ¼1996½ fdz;kRed laLd`r f”k{k.k] uonsgyh] jk’Vªh; laLd`r laLFkku
19- f=ikBh] czãkuUn ¼2003½ vuqoknpfUnzdk] okjk.klh] pkS[kEck lqjHkkjrh izdk”ku
20- f=ikBh] jekdkUr ¼2002½ vuqokn jRukdkj] okjk.klh] pkS[kEck fo|kHkou
21- f=ikBh] jkeukjk;.k ¼1970½ laLd`r v/;kiu fof/k] vkxjk y{ehukjk;.k vxzoky
22- mik/;k;] cynso ¼1982½ laLd`r lkfgR; dk bfrgkl] okjk.klh] “kkjnk fudsru
23- fo”okl ¼2004½ dkS”kycksf/kuh] ubZ fnYyh] laLd`r Hkkjrh
24- O;kl] Hkksyk”kadj ¼1999½ laLd`r Hkk’kk] fnYyh] pkS[kEck fo|kHkou
25. Apte, D.G and Dongre, P.K (1960), Teaching of Sanskrit in Secondary School, Baroda, Acharya
Book Depot.
26. Huparikar ( ) Problems of Sanskrit Teaching
27. Kumar, Krishna (1998) The Child‟s Language and the Teacher-A handbook, New Delhi, National
Book Trust
28. Mishra, K.K (1997) Sanskrit Studies in India, New Delhi, Rashtriya Sanskrit Sansthan
29. National Curriculum Framework, 2005, Position Paper on Teaching of Indian Language, NCERT,
New Delhi
30. Report of Sanskrit Commission (1958) Govt of India, New Delhi
31. Report of Official Language Commission (1958) Govt of India, New Delhi.
PAPER CODE-9204
Course 12 & 13 - PEDAGOGY OF URDU
Objectives: After completion of the course the student-teachers will be able to:
1. understand the relation of language and literature;
2. understand the relation between literature and language;
3. understand role and importance of translation;
4. develop insight and appreciation through examining authentic literary and non literary texts in Urdu
literature;
5. develop and use teaching aids in the classroom both print and audiovisual material, and ICT (Internet
and Computer Technology);
6. acquire knowledge of the process of Language assessment: concept of continuous evaluation system,
its various techniques, diagnostic testing and Remedial measures;
7. develop an insight into the symbiotic relationship of curriculum, syllabus and textbooks;
8. understand need and function of language lab;

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 117 -

9. understand the nature and mechanism of Urdu Language;

COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT - I Curriculum and Text Book in Urdu language
1. Cognitive Map of Concepts and Curricular elements in Teaching of Urdu language.
2. Principles of developing curriculum in Urdu language.
3. Selection of subject matter-subjective and objective approach.
4. Organization of subject matter.
5. Critical appraisal / evaluation of present syllabus of Urdu language prescribed by RBSE/ CBSE.
6. Characteristics and selection criteria of a text book of Urdu language.
7. A Critical review of a text book of Urdu language prescribed by RBSE/CBSE for secondary/ senior
secondary classes.

UNIT –II Learning Resources in Urdu language.

1. Media and media integration: - use of audio –visual aid, ICT including multimedia, OHP,Computer
interaction board,LCD Projector, Internet, E-learning, social media, networking etc.in Urdu language
teaching.
2. Using community resources for Urdu language, teaching-Interaction with persons of Urdu language
profession.
3. Library resources and dictionary
4. Concept and design of Urdu language Laboratory.
5. Recreational Activities through language Club related to Urdu language teaching-
Exhibition; Fair; Models; Games; Field –Trip.

UNIT–III Professional development of English language Teacher:

1. Qualities, responsibilities and ethics of a Urdu language teacher.
2. Role and functions of a Urdu language teacher.
3. Developing competencies of a Urdu language teacher.
4. Professional growth of a Urdu language teacher- Inservice Education Programmes, Inhouse
discussions, study of library resources, contribution in professional Journals, membership and
participation in professional organization, Use of library resources, newspapers etc.
5. Developing and use of Action Research Plan.

SESSIONAL WORK

Any one of the following:

1. Prepare a short deewan on collection of work of classical or modern poets/ story writers of your
choice with a brief introduction and biography of the selected artists.
2. Take any two pieces of creative writing from any other language. Read these pieces carefully and
then translate these pieces in Urdu.
3. Develop the instructional materials for teaching Urdu language to Non-Urdu students.
4. Study and write a detail report on the qualities and aesthetic values of Urdu Drama of pre and post
independence period of India.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 118 -

5. Do a comparative study of one textbook of Urdu from any class (VI to VII) developed by any two
states.
6. Write a report on the contribution of Urdu poetry in independence movement of India with
appropriate examples.
7. Analyse the question papers of Urdu language (Previous 3 Years) of Classes X and XII (of any
board) in the light of new approach of assessment.

REFERENCES
1. Afzal Hussain : Fun-e-Taleem aur Tarbeeat; Makazi Maktab Islam,Delhi
2. Afazal Hyssain Fun-e-Ataleem aur Tarbeet Makazi Maktaba IslamDelhi.
3. Ansari Akhtar Ghazai and Dara-e National Council for Promotion of Urdu Langauage, West
Block R.K. Puram, New Delhi.
4. Ansari Akhtar: Ghazal Aur Ghazal ki Taleem; New Delhi. Taraqqi-e-Urdu Board
5. Ansari Akhtar(1950); Studies in Language and Language Teaching, Aligarh, Friends Book House
6. Husain, Aijaz (1975) : Mukhtasar Tareekh-e-Urdu, Urdu Kitab Ghar Delhi
7. Inamullah Sharwani Tadres-e-Zaban-e-Urdu Usmania Book Depot 1, 25,RabindraSaraud Kolkatta.73
8. Maulvi Abdul Quwaid-e-Urdu Anjuman Taraqqi Urdu (Hindi) New Delhi.
9. Moulvi Saleem : Urdu Kaise Padhaen , Chaman Book Depot, Delhi
10. Muenuddin Hum Urdu Kaise Padhen National Council for Promotion of Urdu Language West Block,
RK Puram, New Delhi.
11. Muenuddin Urdu Zaban Ki Tadrees National Council for Promotion of Urdu Language,West Block,
RK Puram, New Delhi.
12. Rasheed Hasan Hum Urdu Kaise Likhaen Maktaba Jamia Limited Jamia Nagar, New Delhi
13. Rasheed Hasan Urdu Imla Maktaba Jamia Limited Jamia Nagar ,New Delhi

PAPER CODE-9205
Course 12 & 13 - jktLFkkuh dk f'k{k.k 'kkL=
izf'k{k.kkFkhZ bl ikB~;Øe dks i<+us ds mijkUr&
1- jktLFkkuh ikB~;p;kZ fuekZ.k ds fl)kar tku ldsx a sA
2- jktLFkkuh ikB~;p;kZ ,oa ikB~;iqLrd dks tku ldsx a sA
3- jktLFkkuh Hkk"kk ds ewY;kadu dh izfØ;k dks tku ldsaxAs
4- ek/;fed f'k{kk cksMZ }kjk izLrkfor ikB~;p;kZ dk lekykspukRed fo'ys"k.k dj ldsx a sA
5- ,d vPNh jktLFkkuh dh ikB~; iqLrd dh fo'ks"krk tku ldsx a sA
6- jktLFkkuh f'k{kd dh fo'ks"krk tku ldsx a sA
7- jktLFkkuh iz'uksa ds vk/kkj fcUnq tku ldsx a sA
8- jktLFkkuh iz'u i= fuekZ.k ,oa vadu izfØ;k dks tku ldsx a sA
9- jktLFkkuh Hkk"kk f'k{kd dh O;olkf;d ,oa uSfrd ftEesnkfj;ksa dk fuoZgu dj ldsx a sA
10- jktLFkkuh Hkk"kk f'k{kd ds 'kSf{kd mUu;u gsrq fofo/k mikxeksa dh tkudkjh izkIr dj ldsxa sA
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 119 -
 ikB~;Øe&fo"k;oLrq
bdkbZ izFke&jktLFkkuh f'k{k.k esa ewY;kadu
1- ewY;kadu dk vFkZ] egRo ,oa fo'ks"krk,¡
2- ewY;kadu dh fof/k;k¡] fyf[kr] ekSf[kd o l`tukRed ¼ikBkUrxZr ,oa ikBksijkUr½ lrr~ ,oa O;kid
ewY;kadu] iqucZyu] ikjLifjd lewg] bdkbZ okj] oLrqfu"B] vfr y?kwÙkjkRed] y?kwÙkjkRed o
fucU/kkRedA
3- iz'uksa ds vk/kkj fcUnq& leL;k lek/kku iz'u] l`tukRed fpUru okys iz'u] dkYifud] fopkjksÙa kstd]
ifjos'kh; ltxrk okys iz'u rFkk xfrfof/k vk/kkfjr iz'uA iz'u i= fuekZ.k] uhy i=] fo"k; oLrq dk
fo'ys"k.k] iz'u i=] vadu] ;kstuk ,oa mÙkj dqathA

bdkbZ f}rh;&jktLFkkuh dh ikB~;p;kZ ,oa ikB~;iqLrd

1- jktLFkkuh ikB~;p;kZ fuekZ.k ds fl)karA
2- jktLFkku f'k{kk cksMZ }kjk izLrkfor ek/;fed@mPp ek/;fed d{kkvksa dh ikB~;p;kZ dk
lekykspukRed fo'ys"k.kA
3- ,d vPNh jktLFkkuh Hkk"kk dh ikB~;iqLrd dh fo'ks"krk,¡A
4- jktLFkku ek/;fed f'k{kk cksMZ }kjk izLrkfor ek/;fed@mPp ek/;fed d{kkvksa dh jktLFkkuh
ikB~;iqLrd dh lekykspukA
5- {ks=h; jktLFkkuh lkfgR;dkjksa dh thouh] O;fDrRo ,oa d`frRoA

bdkbZ r`rh;&jktLFkuh Hkk"kk f'k{kd

1- jktLFkkuh Hkk"kk f'k{kd dh fo'ks"krk,aA
2- jktLFkkuh f'k{kd dh O;olkf;d ,oa uSfrd ftEesnkfj;kaA
3- jktLFkkuh f'k{kd ds 'kSf{kd mUu;u gsrq mikxe&
 lsokjr izf'k{k.k dk;ZØe
 laxksf"B;ka ,oa dk;Z'kkyk,sa
 O;olkf;d laxBuksa dh lnL;rk ,oa lgHkkfxrk
 egkfo|ky; esa ifjppkZ
 iqLrdky; ,oa okpuky; dk mi;ksx
 vkWu ykbZu oSpkfjd vknku iznku
l=h; dk;Z fuEukafdr esa ls ¼dksbZ ,d½
1- fdlh ,d fgUnh nSfud lekpkj i=& lekpkj i=ksa ds fofHkUu LrEHkksa dh leh{kk djrs gq, 'kSf{kd
mikns;rk dks /;ku esa j[kdj izfrosnu rS;kj djukA
2- fdlh ,d cky fQYe@cky lkfgR; dk leh{kkRed v/;;uA
3- {ks=h; fdlh ,d jktLFkkuh lkfgR;dkj ds O;fDrRo ,oa d`frRo ij ys[k fyf[k;s ¼lekt laLd`fr]
'kkafr f'k{kk] ukjh f'k{kk esa ;ksxnku½
4- jktLFkkuh f'k{k.k ds nkSjku vkus okyh leL;k ij fØ;kRed vuqla/kku dk fØ;kUo;u dj izfrosnu
rS;kj djukA

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 120 -

lanHkZ iqLrdsa
¼1½ esukfj;k] MkW- eksrhyky ^^jktLFkkuh Hkk"kk ,oa lkfgR;**] jktLFkkuh xzaFkkxkj] tks/kiqjA
¼2½ ukxnk] Hkaojyky] ^^f'k{kk ds uwru vk;ke**] vadqj izdk'ku] mn;iqjA
¼3½ dqekj lqfufr] ^^jktLFkkuh Hkk"kk** dkWyst cqd fMiks] t;iqjA
¼4½ 'kekZ] jktdqekj] ^^jktLFkkuh Hkk"kk vkSj lkfgR;** dkWyst cqd fMiks] t;iqjA
¼5½ Lokeh ujksÙke] ^^jktLFkkuh Hkk"kk** jktLFkkuh xzaFkkxkj] tks/kiqjA
¼6½ yky lhrkjke] ^^jktLFkkuh 'kCn dks"k**] jktLFkkuh xzaFkkxkj] tks/kiqjA
¼7½ Lokeh ujksÙke] ^^jktLFkkuh O;kdj.k** jktLFkkuh xzaFkkxkj] tks/kiqjA
¼8½ pq.M+kor] y{eh dqekjh] ^^ dSpp s dok ckr** jktLFkkuh xzaFkkxkj] tks/kiqjA
¼9½ frokjh] Hkksyus kFk] ^^Hkk"kk foKku** fdrkc egy] bykgkcknA
¼10½ ukxnk] Hkaojyky ¼2011½ ^^fgUnh Hkk"kk =qfV;ka ,oa mipkj**] Dykfldy ifCyf'kax dEiuh] ubZ fnYyhA
¼11½ ukxnk] Hkaojyky ukxnk] MkW- }kfjdk izlkn ¼2015½ ^^fØ;kRed vuqla/kku ,oa lkaf[;dh**] vadqj
izdk'ku] mn;iqjA
PAPER CODE-9206
Course 12 & 13 - PEDAGOGY OF MATHEMATICS
Objectives: After completion of course the student teachers will be able to-
1. Identify difficulties in learning concepts and generalization, and provide suitable remedial measures.
2. Develop ability to teach proof of theorems and to develop mathematical skills to solve problems.
3. Develop understanding of the strategies for teaching exceptional students in mathematics.
4. Develop capacity to evaluate and use instructional materials in mathematics education.
5. Develop skills to be a successful mathematics teacher.
6. Construct appropriate assessment tools for evaluating mathematics learning.
7. Familiarize with the development of curriculum in mathematics.
8. Understand and use of learning resources in Mathematics.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT-I Mathematics curriculum at Secondary Level
1. Principles and approaches of curriculum construction.
2. New trends in mathematics curriculum.
3. A critical appraisal of existing mathematics curriculum at secondary stage prescribed by board of
secondary education Rajasthan.
4. Enrichment in mathematics teaching for developing creativity.
5. Some highlights of curriculum like vision of school mathematics, main goals of mathematics
education, core areas of concerns in school mathematics, curricular choices at different stages of
school mathematics education
UNIT-II Learning resources in mathematics
3. Recreational Activities
a. Mathematics Club:
b. Mathematics Fairs
c. MathematicalGames
d. Mathematical Quiz
e. Mathematical Puzzles
f. Mathematical Project
g. Mathematical Model

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 121 -

4. Importance and Setting up of Mathematics Laboratory.
5. Importance of Support Material: On-line and off-line Resources.

a) Text books of Mathematics.

b) Reference Material -Journals ,Reference books, Encyclopedia, News Letters and on line resources
c) Using community resources for mathematical teaching e.g. interviewing local persons to know the
indigenous knowledge of Mathematics etc.

UNIT-III Professional Development of Mathematics Teacher

1. Importance of in-service programmes for mathematics teacher.
2. Role of mathematics teacher‟s association.
3. Development of professional competencies of mathematics teacher.
4. Professional ethics of mathematics teacher.
5. Research in teaching and learning of mathematics.
SESSIONAL WORK
Any one of the following
1. Identification of learning difficulties experienced by students in a unit.
2. Preparing a report of a remedial teaching programme.
3. Preparing an Action research project proposal related to Mathematics teaching.
4. A case study of slow/ gifted learner in mathematics.
5. Preparing a working model related to mathematics.
6. A project report on any Topic at Sec. Level.
SUGGESTED READINGS
1- Ñ’.k dUgS;ky lDlsuk] ¼2007½ xf.kr f”k{k.k] ;wfuoflZVh cqd gkml] t;iqj
2- eaxy % xf.kr f'k{k.k] vk;Z cqd fMiks] ubZ fnYyh
3- lh/kq % xf.kr f'k{k.k] fouksn iqLrd Hk.Mkj] vkxjk
4- gsrflag c?ksyk] ¼2005½] iquhr izdk”ku] t;iqj
5- ,e-,l- jkor] ¼2009½] fouksn iqLrs iqLrd Hk.Mkj] vkxjk
6- fotsUnz dqekj ekgs”ojh] ¼1997½] yks;y cqd fMiks] esjB
7- ts-,l- usxh] ¼2005½] xf.kr f'k{k.k] fouksn iqLrd Hk.Mkj] vkxjk
8- Aggarwal S.M. : (2005), Teaching of Modern Mathematics, Dhanpat Rai and Sons, Delhi.
9- Aiyangar and Kuppuswami, (1999), N. : A teaching of mathematics in the new education universal
publication.
10- Butler and Wren : (2000), The teaching of Secondary Mathematics, MC Graw Hill Book Company.
11- Cooney, Thomas J. and Others (1975), Dynamics of Teaching Secondary School Mathematics,
Boston : Honghton Mifflin.
12- Grouws, D.A. (ed) (1992) Handbook of Research on Mathematics Teaching and Learning.
13- Jagdguru Swami : (2000), Sri Bharti Krisna Tirthji Vedic mathematics, Moti Lal Banarsids
Publisher Delhi.
14- Kapur, J.N. : (1997), Modern mathematics for teachers, Arya Book Depot., New Delhi.
15- Lester, F.K. (Ed.) (2007). Second Handbook of Research on Mathematics Teaching and Learning,
Charlotte, NC : NCTM & Information Age Publishing.
16- Mager, Robert (1962) Preparing instructional objectives. Palo Alto, CA : Fearon.
17- Marshall, S.P. (1995) Schemes in Problem-solving. NY : Cambridge University Press.
18- Moon, B. & Mayes, A.S. (eds) (1995). Teaching and Learning in Secondary School. London :
Routedge.
19- Mangal, S.K. : (2001) Teaching of Mathematics Prakash Brothers Ludhiana.
20- Nickson, Marilum (2000). Teaching and Learning Mathematics : A Guide to Recent Research and its
Applicantions, NY : Continuum.
21- Numes, T. and Bryant, P. (Eds) (1997). Learning Mathematics : An International Perspective,
Psychology Press.
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 122 -
22- Poly, George (1957) How to solve it, Princeton, NJ : Princeton University Press.
23- Sudhir Kumar, (2006), Teaching of Mathematics.
24- S.M.S.G. & N.M.P. : Text Books Teacher‟s Guides.
25- UNESCO : Trends in Mathematics Teaching
26- Butler, C. H. & Wren, K. H. (1980). The teaching of Secondary Mathematics, New York: McGraw-
Hill Book Comp.
27- Carey L.M. (1975). Measuring and Evaluating School Learning, Boston: Allyn and Bacon.
28- Copeland, R.W. (1979). How Children Learn Mathematics, New York: McMillan Pub. Comp.
29- Dave, R. H. & Saxena, R. C. (1970). Curriculum and Teaching of Maths in Secondary Schools, A
Research Monograph. Delhi: NCERT
30- David Wood (1988). How Children Think and Learn, Oxford U.K.: Blackwell Publishers Ltd.
31- Davis D.R. (1951). The Teaching of Mathematics, London: Addison Wesclyh Press.
32- Intel (2003). Intel innovation in Education, Intel Tech to the Future- Students Work Book
33- J.N. Kapur (1991). Suggested Experiments in School Mathematics, New Delhi: Arya Book Depot
34- Jain, S. L. (1973). Ganit Shikshan, Jaipur: Hindi Granth Academy
35- Joanna O. Masingila & Frank K. Lester (1988). Mathematics via Problem Solving (Student
Resource), New York: Printice Hall Inc.
36- Kapoor, J. N. (1988). Vidyalaya Ganik ke Liye San Prayog, New Delhi: Arya Book Depot
37- Kulshrestha, A. K. (2007). Teaching of Mathematics. Meerut: R. Lall Book Depot
38- Mangal, S. K. (2007). Teaching of Mathematics, New Delhi: Arya Book Depot
39- Shankaran & Gupta, H. N. (1984). Content-cum-Methodology of Teaching Mathematics, New Delhi:
NCERT
40- Thomas A. S. (1993). Mathematics for Elementary Teachers (An Interactive Approach), Florida: HBJ
Publishers
41- The Teaching of Mathematics- Roy Dubush, John Wiley and Sons INC, New York and London, 1963
42- Teaching of Mathematics by Butler and Wren, Mc Graw Hill Book Company, INC, New York and
London, 1960
43- The Teaching of Secondary Mathematics by Claude H. Brown, Harper& Brothers, publisher, New
York (1953)
44- Teaching Mathematics in The Secondary School, Reinhart & Company, INC, New York , 1954.
45- Mathematics Discovery (Volume I and II), George Polya, John Wiley & sons INC, New York and
London,1962 (I), 1955 (II)
46- Teaching Mathematics in Elementary School by C.G. Corle, The Ronalal Press Company, New York,
47- Activity for Junior High School and Middle School Mathematics, Vol. II NCTM, USA, 1999
48- Geometry- History, Culture and Techniques, J.L. Heilborn, Oxford University, Prss-2000
49- Mathematics, Part I and II Textbook for Class XII, 2007, NCERT, New Delhi
50- Mathematics, Part I and II Textbook for Class XI, 2006, NCERT, New Delhi
51- Mathematics, Part I and II Textbook for Class X, 2007, NCERT, New Delhi
52- Mathematics, Part I and II Textbook for Class IX, 2006, NCERT, New Delhi
53- Secondary School Curriculum, 2006, CBSE, New Delhi
54- Mathematics Laboratory in school- towards joyful learning, 2006 CBSE, New Delhi
55- Guidelines for Mathematics Laboratory in school for class IX, 2006 CBSE, New Delhi
56- Guidelines for Mathematics Laboratory in school for class X, 2006 CBSE, New Delhi
57- Mathematics for Class VIII, 2008, NCERT, New Delhi
58- Mathematics for Class VII, 2007, NCERT, New Delhi
59- Mathematics for Class VI, 2006, NCERT, New Delhi
60- National Curriculum Framework- 2005, NCERT
61- Position Paper of NFG on Teaching Mathematics-2005, NCERT
62- Position Paper of NFG on Habitat and Learning-2005, NCERT
63- Position Paper of NFG on Examination Reforms-2005, NCERT
64- Position Paper of NFG on Aims of Education-2005, NCERT
65- Position Paper of NFG on Gender Issues in Education-2005, NCERT
66- Position Paper of NFG on Education and Peacs-2005, NCERT
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 123 -
Journals:
1. Teaching Children Mathematics(TCM), NCTM, USA
2. Mathematics Teaching in the Middle School(MTMS), NCTM, USA
3. Journal of Mathematics Teacher Education, Springer Netherlands
Web Links:
http://WWW. mathforum.org/dr.math
http://WWW. sakshat.ac.in
http://web.utk.edu
http://www.confluence.org
http://www.nationalmathtrail.org
http://www.qsh.org/lists/hilites.html
http://www.kn.pacbell.com./wired/bluewebn
http://www.qsh.org/pr
http://www.education-world.com
http://www.nctm.org
PAPER CODE-9207
Course 12 & 13 - PEDAGOGY OF GENERAL SCIENCE
Objectives :- After completion of the course the student teachers will be able to :-
1. Develop ability to evaluate the existing syllabus of General Science.
2. Develop an understanding of curriculum construction.
3. Use audio-visual aids, community resources and ICT in teaching-learning of General Science.
4. Organize co-curricular activities related to General Science teaching.
5. Develop abilities to equip and manage General Science laboratory and organize practical work in
General Science.
6. Construct and use instructional / learning materials.
7. Understand responsibilities, qualities and professional ethics of General Science teacher.
8. Understand the modes of professional development of General Science Teacher

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT – I Curriculum and text books of General Science

1. Principles and steps of curriculum construction.
2. Trends in General Science curriculum
3. Critical appraisal of General Science curriculum at Sr. Secondary level prescribed by RBSE/CBSE.
4. Criteria of a good General Science text book.
5. Review of a text book of General Science prescribed by RBSE/CBSE.

UNIT – II Learning resources in General Science

1. Text book, community resources, organization and importance of – Science club, Science Fair,
Science Exhibition, field trips and science quiz.
2. Teaching Learning Resources- Chart, models, Specimen, Bulletin Boards, flannel Board, Slide
Projector, O.H.P., L.C.D., Transparencies, slide, Computer and Internet.
3. Organization and Managing of General Science laboratory, Precautions and safety measures in
laboratory.
4. Conducting practical work in General Science

UNIT –III Professional development of General Science Teacher

1. General Science teacher – Qualities, responsibilities and professional ethics of General Science
teacher

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 124 -

2. Professional development programs for General Science teacher, In service education programs,
Participation in seminars, conferences, on line sharing, membership and participation in activities of
professional organization, in house discussions.

SESSIONAL WORK

Any one of the following

1. Preparation of a plan of field trip / Science Fair.
2. Preparation of a Science puzzle.
3. Power point presentation of any topic of General Science.
4. Review of a standard book on science.
5. Preparation of a herbarium.

REFERENCE

1 dqyJs"B ,l-ih- 2010 'kSf{kdrduhdh ds ewyvk/kkj] fouksniqLrdHk.Mkj] vkxjk

Kulshrasth S.P. 2010 ShakshikTeachiningkaMulAadhar, Vinod ustakBhandar, Agra
2 eaxy ,l-ds- 1996 foKkuf'k{k.k] vk;ZcqdfMiks] ubZfnYyh
Mangal S,K, 1996 VigyanSikshan, Arya Book Depo, New Delhi
3 'kekZvkj-,- 2003 f'k{kk ds rduhdhvk/kkj] vkjykycqdfMiks] esjB
Sharma R.A. 2003 SokshaKaTachnigiAadhar, R.L. Book DepoMeeruth
4 'kekZvkj-lh- 2005 foKkuf'k{k.k] /kuirjk; izdk'kudEiuhizk-fy- ubZfnYyh
Sharma R.C. 2005 VigyanSikshan, DhanpatRoaPrakashan Company Pvt. Ltd. New
Delhi
5 oktis;h] xksyoydj 2007 foKkuf'k{k.k] 'kkjnkiqLrdHk.Mkj] bZykgkckn
,oavU; 2007 GolwalkarVigyanSikshanPustakBhandar,
Vijhayee Allahabad and other

6 Aggrawal J.C. 1990 Curriculum Reforms in India, Dasba House, Delhi

7 Bloom, Benjamin 1965 Taxonomy of Educational objectives. The classification of
and others Educational goals, Handbook 1-
Cognitive Domain. New York, David Mckay Company
Inc.
8 Broudy, Harry and 1966 Examples of Teaching method. Chicago, Second Printing,
Palmer, John R. Rand McNally& Co.
9 Chauhan S.S. 1985 Innovation in teaching learning process, Delhi, Vikas
Publishing House
10 Dale Edgar 1962 Audio Visual Methods in Teaching, New York, Revised
edition Hold, Rivehart and winston.
11 Dani D.N. 1989 “Scientific Attitude and Cognitive Style”, Northern Book
Centre, New Delhi.
12 Dave, R.H. 1969 Taxonomy of Educational objectives & Achievement, testing
London University Press London.
13 Edger. Marlow & 2003 Teaching Science Successfully, Discovery publishing House,
Rao, D.B. New Delhi
14 Gupta S.K. 1983 Technology of Science Education Vikas Publishing House Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi
15 Jenkins, E.W. 2000 Innovation in Science & Technology Education Vol. VII
UNESCO, Parco
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 125 -
16 Kulsherstha, S.P. 1988 Teaching of General Science, Loyal Book Depot. Meerut.
17 NCERT National Curriculum Framework-2005
18 NCERT Position Paper of NCF on Teaching of Science-2005
19 Sharma R.C. 2005 Science Teaching, Dhanhat Rai publishing Company (P.) Ltd.
New Delhi
20 Sharma, L.M. 1977 Teaching of Science & Life Science, Dhanpat Rai & Sons,
Delhi
21 Singh U.K. 2003 Science Education, Common wealth Publishers Daryaganj,
&Nayab, A.K. New Delhi
22 Sood J.K. 1987 Teaching Life Science, Kobli Publisher, Chandigarh
23 UNESCO Source Book for Science Teaching.
24 Vadav, M.S. 2000 Modern methods of teaching Science, Anmol Publisher, Delhi
25 Venkataih S. 2001 Science Education in 21st Century, Anmol Publishers, Delhi
PAPER CODE-9208

Course 12 & 13 - PEDAGOGY OF PHYSICS

Objectives: On completion of the course, the student teacher will be able to :

1. Critically appraise Physics curriculum at senior secondary level.

2. Study science laboratory in schools, facilities and materials available in class that facilitate learning of
Physics.
3. Plan, manage physics laboratory and organize physics practical work
4. Analyse the text book with reference to the content, its organization, learning experiences and other
characteristics
5. Select and effectively make use of multi media and other learning resourses in classroom teaching
6. Conduct Physics related activities through science clubs, science fairs, science exhibitions during
school attachment
7. Conduct physics practicals prescribed by RBSE
8. Become aware of various professional organizations and professional development programs for
Physics Teacher.
9. Identify themes in Physical Science for which community can be used as a learning resource

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT – I Curriculum and text books of Physics

1. Principles and steps of curriculum construction.
2. Critical appraisal of Physics curriculum at Sr. Secondary level prescribed by RBSE/CBSE.
3. Criteria of a good Physics text book.
4. Review of a text book of Physics prescribed by RBSE/CBSE.

UNIT – II Learning resources in Physics

1. Text book, organization and importance of – Science club, Science Fair, Science Exhibition, field
trips and science quiz.
2. Teaching Learning Resources- Chart, models, Bulletin Boards, flannel Board, Slide Projector, O.H.P.,
L.C.D., Transparencies, slide, Computer and Internet.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 126 -

3. Science Lab. – Structure and design of Physics laboratory. Organization and Managing of Physics
laboratory, Precautions and safety measures in laboratory
4. Low cost apparatus
5. Conducting practical work in Physics.

UNIT –III Professional development of Physics Teacher

1. Physics teacher – Qualities, responsibilities and professional ethics of Physics teacher
2. Professional development programs for Physics teacher, In service education programmes,
Participation in seminars, conferences, on line sharing, membership and participation in activities of
professional organization, In house discussion on current issues related to Physics teaching

SESSIONAL WORK
Any one of the following:
1. Case study of any one Senior Secondary School Laboratory of Physics.
2. Planning , conducting and reporting an innovative project in Physics
3. Critical review of a book on physics.
4. Conducting one experiment prescribed by RBSE for senior secondary classes and preparing a report.

REFERENCE
Aicken,Frederick(1984).The Nature of Science,London: Heinemann Educational Books.
Anderson R.D. (1970). Developing Children’s Thinking Through Science,New Delhi: Prentice Hall.
Chauhan, S.S. (2000). Innovation in Teaching Learning ProcessNew Delhi: Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.
Das, R. C. (1985).Science Teaching in SchoolsNew Delhi: Sterling Publishers Pvt. Ltd.
Dave , R.H.( ).Taxonomy of Educational Objectives and Achievement Testing,London: London
University Press.
Edigar M. and Rao D.B. (1996). Science Curriculum,New Delhi: Discovery Publishing House.
Gronlund,Norman,E(1968). Constructing Achievement Tests, New York: Prentice Hall Inc.
Gupta, N.K. (1997). Research in Teaching of Science,New Delhi: APH Publishing Corporation.
Kochar, S.K. (1997). Methods and Techniques of Teaching,New Delhi: Sterling Publishers Pvt. Ltd.
Maitre, K. (1991). Teaching of Physics,New Delhi: Discovery Publishing House.
Mukalel, J.C. (1998). Creative Approaches to Classroom Teaching,New Delhi: Discovery Publishing House.
Prakash, R. and Rath, T.N. (1996).Emerging Trends in Teaching of Physics, New Delhi: Kanisha Publishers.
Radha Mohan (2003). Innovative Science Teaching for Physical ScienceTeachers,New Delhi:Prentice Hall
Pvt.Ltd.
Rao, D.B. (1997). Reflections on Scientific Attitudes,New Delhi: Discovery Publishing Hosue.
Romey, W.D. (1968). Inquiry Technique for Teaching of Science,New Jersey: Prentice Hall.
Sharma, R.C. (1981).Modern Science Teaching,Delhi: Dhanpat Rai and Sons.
Sharma, R. C. (1990). Modern Science Teaching, New Delhi: Dhanpat Rai & Sons Singh,Hemlata
(1990).Scientific Temper and Education,New Delhi:Common Wealth Publishers.
Sood, J.K. (2005). Teaching of Science -A Book of Methods,Chandigarh: Kohli publishers.
Sood,J.K.(1989). New Directions in Science Teaching, Chandigarh:Kohli Publisher.
Sood,J.K.(2004-5).Teaching Science for understanding and Application,Agra:Vinod Pustak Mandir.
Thurber, W. A. & Collette, A. T. (1967),Teaching Science in Today’s Secondary Schools, New Delhi:
Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.
UNESCO (1980). Handbook for Science Teachers
Vaidya , N. (1996). Science Teaching For the 21 st Century. New Delhi: Deep and Deep Publishers
Vaidya, N.(1997).The Impact of Science Teaching,New Delhi: Oxford and IBH Publishing comp.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 127 -

Vanaja, N. (1999). Inquiry Training Model, New Delhi: Discovery Publishing House.
Venkataiah, N. (1993). Curricular Innovations for 2000 AD, New Delhi: Ashish Publishing House.

PAPER CODE-9209

Course 12 & 13 - PEDAGOGY OF CHEMISTRY TEACHING

Objectives: After completion of the course the student teacher will be able to-
1. Understand qualities and ethics of Chemistry Teacher.
2. Foster creativity through Teaching of Chemistry.
3. Relate chemistry to conservation of environment
4. Review a chemistry text book.
5. Organize various activities related to chemistry viz field trip, Science Fair, Science Club, Science
Quiz.
6. Create Awareness in community through various programmes about the issues such as Food
Adulteration, Superstitions, Hazards from Chemical substances and Chemical Industries etc.

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT – I Curriculum and text books of Chemistry

1. Principles and steps of curriculum construction.
2. Critical appraisal of Chemistry curriculum at Sr. Secondary level prescribed by RBSE/CBSE.
3. Criteria of a good Chemistry text book.
4. Review of a text book of Chemistry prescribed by RBSE/CBSE.

UNIT – II Learning resources in Chemistry

1. Text book, organization and importance of – Science club, Science Fair, Science Exhibition, field
trips and science quiz.
2. Teaching Learning Resources- Chart, models, Bulletin Boards, flannel Board, Slide Projector,
O.H.P., L.C.D., Transparencies, slide, Computer and Internet.
3. Science Lab. – Structure and design of Chemistry laboratory. Organization and Managing of
Chemistry laboratory, Precautions and safety measures in laboratory
4. Low cost apparatus
5. Conducting practical work in Chemistry.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 128 -

UNIT –III Professional development of Chemistry Teacher
1. Chemistry teacher – Qualities, responsibilities and professional ethics of Chemistry teacher
2. Professional development programs for Chemistry teacher, In service education programmes,
Participation in seminars, conferences, on line sharing, membership and participation in activities of
professional organization, In house discussion on current issues related to chemistry teaching
SESSIONAL WORK
1. Organization and reporting of any one activities -
Science exhibition, Science quiz, Science Fair and Field Trip
2. Review a standard book of Chemistry.
3. Power-Point Presentation of any topic of Chemistry.

REFERENCES
Aggrawal J.C.(1990), Curriculum Reforms in India, Dasba House Delhi.
Carleton, R.H. – Chemistry for new age
Chauhan S.S. (1985), Innovation in teaching learning Process, Delhi, Vikas Publishing House.
Dani D.N. (1989), "Scientific Attitude and Cognitive Style", Northern Book Centre, New Delhi.
Das R.C. (1985), Science Teaching in School, Sterling Publishers Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
Das R.C., Passi B.K. & Singh, L.C. (1975) Effectiveness of Microteaching in Training f Teachers,
NCERT, Delhi
Geoffrey, Neuss, Chemistry course companion.
Gupta, S.K. ((1983). Technology of Science Education Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
Jenkins, E.W. (2000), Innovation in science and Technology Education Vol. VII, UNESCO, Parco
Mangal, S.K. (1995), Teaching of Phsycial and Life Science, AVG Book Depot, KarolBagh
Mishra, D.C. (2008), Teaching of Chemistry, Sahitya Prakashan Agra.
Mittal, Arun (2004), Teaching of Chemistry, Efficient Offset Pvt.
Morrison & Boyd – Organic Chemistry VI Edition
Natrajan, C. (Ed.) (1997), Activity based foundation course on Science Technology and Society Homi
Bhatia Centre for science Education, Mumbai.
NCERT, National Curriculum Framework-2005
NCERT, Position Paper of NCF on Teaching of Sciene-2005.
Nuffield, Chemistry Laboratory Investigation
Pandey (2003), Major Issues in Science Teaching, Sumit Publication , New Delhi.
Richardson John. S. – Science Teaching in Secondary Schools
Saxena, N.R. and Oberoi, S.C. – Technology of Teaching
Sharma R.C. (2006), Modern Science Teaching, Dhanpat Rai Publications, New Delhi.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 129 -

Sharma, B.L. and Saxena V.M. Teaching of Chemistry
Sharma, H.S. Teaching of Chemistry
Singh, Yogesh (2003) Rasaya Shikstan, APH Publishing Corp.
Their, DH, (1973) Teaching Elementary School Science A Laboratory Approach Steering Publication
Pvt. Ltd.
Thurber, W.A. and Collets A.T.- Teaching Secondary Schools.
UNESCO – Source Book for Science Teaching.
Vaidya N., Science Teaching for 21st Centaury (1999)] Deep & Deep Publications.
Vaidya, N. – The impart Science Teaching

PAPER CODE-9210
Course 12 & 13 - PEDAGOGY OF BIOLOGY
Objectives :- After completion of the course the student teachers will be able to :-
1. Develop ability to evaluate the existing syllabus of Biology.
2. Develop an understanding of curriculum construction.
3. Use audio-visual aids, community resources and ICT in teaching-learning of Biology.
4. Organize co-curricular activities related to Biology teaching.
5. Develop abilities to equip and manage biology laboratory and organize practical work in Biology.
6. Construct and use instructional / learning materials.
7. Understand responsibilities, qualities and professional ethics of biology teacher.
8. Understand the modes of professional development of Biology Teacher

COURSE CONTENT
UNIT – I Curriculum and text books of Biology
1. Principles and steps of curriculum construction.
2. Trends in Biology curriculum such as BSCS, Nuffield Science Project.
3. Critical appraisal of Biology curriculum at Sr. Secondary level prescribed by RBSE/CBSE.
4. Criteria of a good biology text book.
5. Review of a text book of Biology prescribed by RBSE/CBSE.

UNIT – II Learning resources in Biology

1. Text book, community resources, organization and importance of – Science club, Science Fair,
Science Exhibition, field trips and science quiz.
2. Teaching Learning Resources- Chart, models, Specimen, Bulletin Boards, flannel Board, Slide
Projector, O.H.P., L.C.D., Transparencies, slide, Computer and Internet.
3. Organization and Managing of Biology laboratory, Precautions and safety measures in laboratory.
4. Conducting practical work in Biology

UNIT –III Professional development of Biology Teacher

1. Biology teacher – Qualities, responsibilities and professional ethics of Biology teacher

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 130 -

2. Professional development programs for Biology teacher, In service education programmes,
Participation in seminars, conferences, on line sharing, membership and participation in activities of
professional organization, in house discussions.

SESSIONAL WORK

Any one of the following

1. Preparation of a plan of field trip / Science Fair.
2. Preparation of a Science puzzle.
3. Power point presentation of any topic of Biology.
4. Review of a standard book on science.
5. Preparation of a herbarium.

REFERENCE
1 dqyJs"B ,l-ih- 2010 'kSf{kdrduhdh ds ewyvk/kkj] fouksniqLrdHk.Mkj] vkxjk
Kulshrasth S.P. 2010 ShakshikTeachiningkaMulAadhar, Vinod PustakBhandar, Agra
2 eaxy ,l-ds- 1996 foKkuf'k{k.k] vk;ZcqdfMiks] ubZfnYyh
Mangal S,K, 1996 VigyanSikshan, Arya Book Depo, New Delhi
3 'kekZvkj-,- 2003 f'k{kk ds rduhdhvk/kkj] vkjykycqdfMiks] esjB
Sharma R.A. 2003 SokshaKaTachnigiAadhar, R.L. Book DepoMeeruth
4 'kekZvkj-lh- 2005 foKkuf'k{k.k] /kuirjk; izdk'kudEiuhizk-fy- ubZfnYyh
Sharma R.C. 2005 VigyanSikshan, DhanpatRoaPrakashan Company Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi
5 oktis;h] xksyoydj 2007 foKkuf'k{k.k] 'kkjnkiqLrdHk.Mkj] bZykgkckn
,oavU; 2007 GolwalkarVigyanSikshanPustakBhandar,
Vijhayee Allahabad
and other
6 Aggrawal J.C. 1990 Curriculum Reforms in India, Dasba House, Delhi
7 Bloom, Benjamin 1965 Taxonomy of Educational objectives. The classification of Educational goals,
and others Handbook 1-
Cognitive Domain. New York, David Mckay Company Inc.

8 Broudy, Harry and 1966 Examples of Teaching method. Chicago, Second Printing, Rand McNally& Co.
Palmer, John R.
9 Chauhan S.S. 1985 Innovation in teaching learning process, Delhi, Vikas Publishing House

10 Dale Edgar 1962 Audio Visual Methods in Teaching, New York, Revised edition Hold,
Rivehart and winston.
11 Dani D.N. 1989 “Scientific Attitude and Cognitive Style”, Northern Book Centre, New Delhi.

12 Dave, R.H. 1969 Taxonomy of Educational objectives & Achievement, testing London
University Press London.

13 Edger. Marlow & 2003 Teaching Science Successfully, Discovery publishing House, New Delhi
Rao, D.B.
14 Gupta S.K. 1983 Technology of Science Education Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 131 -

15 Jenkins, E.W. 2000 Innovation in Science & Technology Education Vol. VII UNESCO, Parco

16 Kulsherstha, S.P. 1988 Teaching of Biology, Loyal Book Depot. Meerut.

17 NCERT National Curriculum Framework-2005

18 NCERT Position Paper of NCF on Teaching of Science-2005
19 Sharma R.C. 2005 Science Teaching, Dhanhat Rai publishing Company (P.) Ltd. New Delhi
20 Sharma, L.M. 1977 Teaching of Science & Life Science, Dhanpat Rai & Sons, Delhi
21 Singh U.K. &Nayab, 2003 Science Education, Common wealth Publishers Daryaganj, New Delhi
A.K.
22 Sood J.K. 1987 Teaching Life Science, Kobli Publisher, Chandigarh
23 UNESCO Source Book for Science Teaching.
24 Vadav, M.S. 2000 Modern methods of teaching Science, Anmol Publisher, Delhi
25 Venkataih S. 2001 Science Education in 21st Century, Anmol Publishers, Delhi

PAPER CODE-9211
Course 12 & 13 - PEDAGOGY OF HOME SCIENCE
Objectives : After completion of the course the student teachers will be able to –
1. Develop an understanding of Home Science curriculum development
2. Develop an ability to evaluate the existing curriculum of Home Science.
3. Construct and use Instructional/ Learning material.
4. Develop an ability to use community resources in teaching of Home Science.
5. Organize various activities related to Home Science viz Field Trip, Home Science Fair, Exhibitions
and Home Science Club.
6. Use audio visual aids and ICT in teaching of Home Science.
7. Develop abilities to equip and manage Home Science laboratory and organize practical work in Home
Science.
8. Develop an understanding of responsibilities and professional ethics of Home Science teacher.
9. Develop an understanding of modes of professional development of Home Science teacher.
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT –I Curriculum and Text Book –
1. Principles and steps of Curriculum Development.
2. Critical appraisal of Home Science Curriculum at Senior Secondary level prescribed by RBSE/CBSE.
3. Text book- Importance and qualities of a good textbook of Home Science.
4. Review of Home Science Textbook at Senior Secondary Level prescribed by RBSE/CBSE.
UNIT-II Teaching and Learning Resources –
1. Use of Library Resources: Textbook, Newspapers, Journals, Books and references, Magazines.
2. Community resources: Organization and importance of Home Science Club, Home Science Fair,
Home Science Exhibition and Field trips.
3. Use of audio visual aids-charts, models, bulletin boards, flannel board, overhead projector, radio,
television, computer and e-learning.
4. Organizing and managing Home Science Laboratory and safety measures.
UNIT-III Professional Development of Home Science Teacher-

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 132 -

1. Home Science teacher: Qualities, responsibilities and professional ethics of Home Science teacher.
2. Professional development of Home Science teacher (In service education programmes, In house
discussions, participation in Seminar, conferences, workshop, online sharing, membership of and
participation in activities of professional organization - Home Science Association of India (HSAI)
SESSIONAL WORK
Any one of the following –
1. Review of any standard book on Home Science.
2. Report of any study of an in- service education program organized by an IASE/CTE/ SIERT related to
Home Science.
3. A study of training needs of a Home Science teacher.
4. Organize an exhibition on hand made articles and reporting.
5. Power point presentation/ Slide/ Film presentation on any topic of Home Science.
6. Visit to any one institution related to Home Science and report submission (Aanganwadi Centre,
School of Special Children, Orphanage Centre, Nutrition and Diet Counseling Centre, Food
Preservation Centre, NGO‟s working for child welfare etc).
REFERENCES

1- 'kekZ jek] ¼2006½ % x`g foKku f”k{k.k] t;iqj] xks;y ifCyds”kUlA

2- 'kekZ vkj-lh- ¼2005½ % foKku f”k{k.k] ubZ fnYyh] /kuirjk; izdk”ku dEiuh izk-fy-A
3- 'kekZ vkj-,- ¼1994½ % ikB~;Øe fodkl] esjB] bZxy cqDl bUVjus”kuyA
4- 'kekZ jek ,oa feJk ,e-ds- ] ¼2009½ % x`g foKku f”k{k.k] ubZ fnYyh] vtqZu ifCyf”kx gkmlA
5- 'kekZ 'kdqUryk ¼2007½ % x`g foKku f”k{k.k] t;iqj] viksyks izdk”ku A
6- 'kSjh th-ih- ,oa lju Mh-ih- ¼1991½ % x`g foKku f”k{k.k] vkxjk] fouksn iqLrd efUnjA
7- lqf[k;k ,l-ih- ,oa egjks=k ih-oh- ¼1976½] x`g foKku f”k{k.k] paMhx<+ ] gfj;k.kk fgUnh xzUFk vdknehA
8- 'kekZ jktdqekjh ,oa 'kekZ] fu:iek ¼2014½ x`g foKku dk f”k{k.k 'kkL=] vkxjk] jk/kk izdk”ku efUnj izk-fy-A
9- vLFkkuk] ,l-vkj- ¼2007½ ^x`g foKku dk v/;kiu*]vkxjk] y{ehukjk;.k vxzoky izdk”ku A
10- -dqekjh] MkW- foeys”k ¼2007½ ^x`g foKku f”k{k.k*]ubZ fnYyh] fMLdojh ifCyf”kax gkml] A
11- 'kekZ] Jherh jktdqekjh o frokjh] Jherh vatuk ¼2006½ x`g foKku f”k{k.k] vkxjk] jk/kk izdk”ku efUnj]
12- Okktis;h] xksyoydj ,oa vU; ¼2007½ % foKku f”k{k.k] bykgkckn] 'kkjnk iqLrd Hk.MkjA
13- Dale Edgar (1962) Audio Visual Methods in Teaching, New York, Revised edition Hold Rivehart and
Winston.
14- Dars, R.R. and Ray Binita (1979) “Teaching of Home Science”, New Delhi, Sterling Publisher Pvt.
Ltd.
15- Devdas R.P. (1976) Methods of Teaching Home Science, Coimbatore, Poineer Press.
16- Mangal S.K. (1996), Science Teaching, New Delhi, Arya Book Depot.
17- Sharma R.C. (2005), Science Teaching, New Delhi, Dhanpat Rai Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd.
18- Sood J.K. (1987), Teaching Life Sciences, Chandigarh, Kohli Publishers.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 133 -

 PAPER CODE-9212
Course 12 & 13 - PEDAGOGY OF COMPUTER SCIENCE
Objectives: After completion of course the student teachers will be able to-
1. Develop an understanding of Computer Science curriculum development.
2. Develop an ability to evaluate the existing curriculum and text books of computer science.
3. Develop an ability to use community resources in teaching computer science.
4. Develop an ability to use computer based resources in teaching computer science.
5. Develop abilities to equip and manage Computer Science laboratory and organize practical work in
Computer Science.
6. Understand the responsibilities and professional ethics of Computer Science teacher.
7. Develop an understanding of mode of professional development of computer science Computer
Science.

COURSE CONTENT
UNIT -I Curriculum and Text book -
1. Concept, Principles and steps of development of computer science curriculum.
2. Recent trends in Computer Science curriculum.
3. A critical appraisal of existing computer science curriculum at secondary/senior secondary level
prescribed by RBSE/CBSE.
4. Text book-criteria of a good text book of computer science, critical review of the text book of
computer science prescribed by RBSE/CBSE.

UNIT –II Teaching and Learning Resources in computer science

1. Library resources- Text Books, Journals, Magazines, Self Instructional Material, and computer
assisted instructional material and e-learning.
2. Community Resource – Importance of IT fair and exhibition.
3. Laboratory- Organizing and managing computer science laboratory and safety measures.
4. Computer based resources –
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 134 -
 a. Networking and Multimedia as a Teaching-Learning Support System.
b. Social networking: Advantages and Disadvantages.
c. Internet: tutorial, web based instructions, You tubes, smart classes

UNIT -III Professional Development of Computer Science Teacher

1. Qualities, Responsibilities and Professional ethics of computer science teacher.
2. Professional development of computer science teacher (In service Education Programs, Participation
in Seminar, Conferences, Workshop, in house discussion membership of and participation in
activities of professional organization and on-line sharing).
3. Researches in teaching and learning of computer science.

SESSIONAL WORK
Any one of the following –
1- Prepare program instruction material with the help of hyperlink.
2- Power point presentation on any topic of Computer Science.
3- Review of any standard book on Computer Science.

REFERENCE

1. Apter,Michael,J.(1968).The New Technology of Education.London:MacMillan

2. Hunt, R. and Shelley, J. (1988) : “Computers and Common Sense”, PHI Publication, Delhi.
3. J.C. Aggarwal,(2004)Principles, Methods&Techniques of teaching ,Vikas Pub House PVT LTD
4. Mehra,Vandana(2000)Educational Technology,New Delhi:S S Publishers
5. Mukhopadhaya(2005)Education Technology Knowledge Assessment,New Delhi:Shipra Publications
6. Romesh Verma;Suresh Sharma,(1998)Modern trends in Teaching Technology,Anmol Publications
New Delhi
7. Sharma,L.(2000) Computer Education .Ferozpur CanttL:Wintech Publications
8. Singh,Arjinder(2009).Modern Approach to Computer Education.Jalandhar:Modern Publisher
9. Singh, Tarsem(2009).Basic Computer Education .Ludhiana:Tondon Brothers
10. Sinha, P.K. (1990): “Computer Fundamentals”, New Delhi: BPB Publications.
11. Subramaniam. N. (1988): “Introduction to computers. New Delhi : Tata McGraw Hill.
12. Yashpal,(2004) Methods of Teaching,Sanjay Prakashan.New Delhi

Web Links
1. http://code.org/educate/20hr
2. www.computingataeschool.org.uk/.../case...
3. Csta.acm.org/.../CSmethodologyCoureSY
4. www.cs.manchester.ac.uk/study/.../course
5. www.ucd.ie/.../problembasedlerning/

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 135 -

6. www.researchgate.net/.../what_are_the_best_methods
7. www.informatics-europe.org/.../research_
8. page.mi.fu-berlin.del/…/1994-17.pdf
9. www.csd.cs.cmu.edu/colloquium/
10. thevirtualexplorer.blogspot.com/…/
11. www.crito.uci.edu/tlc/

PAPER CODE-9213
Course 12 & 13 - PEDAGOGY OF SOCIAL SCIENCE
Objectives: After completion of the course the student teachers will be able to –

1. Develop an understanding of Principles of Social Science curriculum development.

2. Develop an ability to evaluate the existing curriculum of Social Science.
3. Construct and use Instructional/ Learning material.
4. Develop an ability to use community resources in teaching of Social Science.
5. Use audio visual aids and ICT in teaching of Social Science.
6. Develop an understanding of responsibilities and professional ethics of Social Science teacher.
7. Develop an understanding of modes of professional development of Social Science teacher.

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT – I Curriculum and Text Book –

1. Principles and steps of Curriculum Development .

2. Critical appraisal of Social Science Curriculum at Secondary level prescribed by RBSE/CBSE.
3. Characteristics of Good Text Book of Social Science.
4. Review of Text Book of Social Science prescribed by RBSE/CBSE.

UNIT-II Teaching and Learning Resources –

1. Use of Library Resources: Textbook, Newspapers, Journals, Books and references, Magazines,
Encyclopedia and Dictionary.
2. Community Resources: Use of local diversity and contents (Gram Sabha, Gram Panchayat, Municipal
Corporation), Community Library and Museum.
3. Organization of tours and exhibition of a social issue.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 136 -

4. Use of audio visual aids-charts, models, bulletin boards, flannel board, overhead projector, radio,
Maps, Models, Film Strips, Documentaries Films, Black Board, OHP, Computer, LCD Projector etc.

UNIT-III Professional Development of Social ScienceTeacher-

1. Social Science teacher: Qualities, responsibilities and professional ethics of Social Science teacher.
2. Professional development of Social Science Teacher-
a. In service education programs-
b. in house discussions,
c. e-sharing of Ideas,
d. Use of library resourses
e. Involvement with professional organization or agencies such as Indian Social Science
Associations, Rajasthan Social Science Association, Indian Council of Social Science Research,
f. Participation in Seminar, Conference etc.

SESSIONAL WORK
Any one of the following –
1. Write a report on functioning of any one Local NGO/local body.
2. Critical review of a book on Social Science.
3. Write a script for drama on any one Social Issue.
4. Write a term paper on education and social change.

REFERENCES

1- tSu] vehpUn ¼1983½ % lkekftdKku f”k{k.k] t;iqj jktLFkku fgUnh xzUFk vdknehA

2- 'kekZ] ch-,y- ekgs”ojh ¼2003½ % lkekftdKku f”k{k.k] esjB vkj- yky cqd fMiksA

3- 'kekZ] vkj-,- ¼2003½% lkekftdKku f”k{k.k] esjB vkj- yky cqd fMiksA

4- flagd.kZ ¼2004½ % lkekftdfoKku f”k{k.k] f[keiqj xksohUnizdk”kuA

5- R;kxh] xq:”kj.knkl ¼1985½ % lkekftdfoKku f”k{k.k] vkxjk] fouksn iqLrd efUnjA

6- Aggrawal, J.C. (1994); Teaching of Social Study, New Delhi :Vikas Publishing House Pvt.Ltd.

7. Aggrawal, J.C. (1989); Teaching of Social Study, New Delhi : (A Practical Approach)Vikas
Publishing House Pvt.Ltd.

8. Bening&Bening (1952) : Teaching the Social Studies in Secondary Schools, Bombay, Tata Mekgra
hills Publishing Company.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 137 -

9. Bhattacharya, S. and D.R. Darji (1966); Teaching of Social Studies in Indian Schools. Baroda:
Acharya Book Depo.

10. Hemming, James; The Teaching of Social Studies in Secondary School. New York: London
Longmans Green and Co.

11. Jarolimek, John; (1977) Social Studies High School Education. New York: Mc. Millan Co.

12. Kochhar, S.L.; The Teaching of Social Studies. New Delhi: Sterling publishers Ltd. -16.

13. Moffat, M.P. (2004). Social Studies Instruction. New York: Prentice – Hall Inc.

PAPER CODE-9214
Course 12 & 13 - PEDAGOGY OF SOCIOLOGY

Objectives: After completion of course the student teacher will be able to-

1. Develop a conceptual understanding about curriculum development with special reference to Teaching
of Sociology.
2. Use Learning Resources in teaching learning process.
3. Develop professional understanding required as sociology teacher
4. Develop an understanding of modes of Professional development of Sociology Teacher.

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT- I Curriculum and Text Book

1. Principles of Curriculum Development
2. Critical Appraisal of Sociology Curriculum prescribed by RBSE
3. Characteristics of a good text book
4. Critical Appraisal of Sociology Text book prescribed by RBSE

UNIT -II Teaching and Learning Resources

1. Use of Library Resources: News Paper, Journals, Books and References and Magazines and
encyclopedia.
2. Community Resources-use of local diversity and content, Community library, Museums.
Organization of Tours and Exhibition of a Social Issue
3. E-Learning –Social Media and networking
Use of Audio Visual Aids and ICT in Teaching Sociology – OHP, Computer , Visualizer, Interactive
Board, LCD Projector etc.

UNIT- III Professional Development of Sociology Teacher

1. Qualities of Sociology Teacher
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 138 -
2. Ethics of Sociology Teacher
3. Professional development of Sociology teacher.
4. In-service Education Programmes, In House discussions, e-Sharing of Ideas, use of Journals,
Encyclopedia etc.
5. Involvement with Professional organization or agencies such as -India Sociological Association,
Rajasthan Sociological Association, Indian Council of Social Science Research , Manikyalal Varma
Tribal Research Institute, Anthropological Survey of India.

SESSIONAL WORK
Any one of the following
1. Prepare Abstracts of two recent Articles published in reputed Sociological Journals.
2. Prepare a Power Point Presentation of teaching a topic of sociology prescribed in senior secondary
syllabus.
3. Critical review of a book on sociology
REFERENCES
Agrawal,J.C.(1994),Teaching Social Studies, Vikas Publication House Pvt.Ltd.New Delhi.
Bening,A.C. and Bening Devid H.(1952),Teaching the Social Studies in Secondary School, Tata,Mekgra
Hill Publishing, Bombay.
Comte, Augeste (1855), The Positive Philosophy of Auguste Comte (Translated,H,Marineau), New York.
Goode ,William, Hatt,Paul (1952), Methods in Social Research, Mc Graw Hill,New York.
Hamming,James, Teaching of Social Studies in Secondary Schools,Longmans green and Co., New York.
Inkels, Alex (1965),What is Sociology, Prentice Hall, New Delhi.
Jain, Amir Chand(1983), Samajik Gyan Shikshan, Rajasthan Hindi Granth Akadmi,Jaipur.
Johnson,H.M.(1963), Sociology-A systematic Introduction, Routledge and kegan paul, Landon.
Kochhar,S.L.,Teaching Social Studies, Sterling Publishers Ltd., New Delhi.
Muffat,M.P.(2004), Social Studies instruction, Prentice Hall Inc., New York.
NCERT Sociology Book of Class XI and XII.
NCERT, National Curriculum Framework-2005
NCERT, Position Paper of NCF on Teaching of Social Sciene-2005.
Ram Ahuja(), Samajik Samasyaye, Rawat Publication, New Delhi and Jaipur.
Rawat,Harikrishna (),Samajshashtriya Sabdkosh, Rawat Publication, New Delhi and Jaipur.
Rawat,Harikrishna(2001),Samajshashtriya Chintak avm Siddhankar,Rawat Publication, New Delhi and
Jaipur.
Sharma, R.A.(2003), Samajik vigyan Shikshan,R.Lal Book Depot, Merauth.
Sharma, Virendra Prakash (2005), Samajshastriya Chinten ke Muladhar, Panchasheel Prakashan, Jaipur.
Sharma,D.D.,Gupta,M.L.(), Samajik Samasyaye, Sahitya Bhawan Publications, Agra.
Sharma,D.D.,Gupta,M.L.(2012), Samajik Vicharak, Sahitya Bhawan Publications, Agra.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 139 -

Sharma,D.D.,Gupta,M.L.(2012), Samajshash, Sahitya Bhawan Publications, Agra.
Singi,N.K.,Goswami, V.(2002), Samajshastra Vivechan, Rajasthan Hindi Granth Akadmi, Jaipur.
Tyagi,Gursaran Das(1985), Samajik vigyan Shikshan, Vinod Pustak mandir,Agra.
Vidyabhushan,Sachdeva, D.R.(1997), Samajshastra ke Siddhant, Century Printers, Allahabad.
Weber, Max( 1947), Theory of Social and Economic Organisation (Translated by Handerson and
Parsons), New York, Oxford University Press.

PAPER CODE-9215
Course 12 & 13 - PEDAGOGY OF PSYCHOLOGY

Objectives: After completion of the course the student teachers will be able to –
1. Develop an understanding of Principles of psychology curriculum development.
2. Develop an ability to evaluate the existing curriculum of psychology.
3. Develops various skills for the use and construct of different audiovisual aids and Instructional/
Learning material.
4. Develop an ability to use community resources in teaching of psychology.
5. Use audio visual aids and ICT in teaching of psychology.
6. Develop an understanding of humanity and professional ethics of psychology teacher.
7. Develop an understanding of modes of professional development of psychology teacher.

COURSE CONTENT
UNIT – I Curriculum and Text Book –
1. Principles and steps of Curriculum Development .
2. Critical Review of existing curriculum of Psychology at Senior Secondary level.
3. Characteristics of Good Text Book of Psychology.
4. Review of Text Book of Psychology prescribed by RBSE.

UNIT-II Teaching and Learning Resources –

1. Use of Library Resources : Textbook, Newspapers, Journals, Books and references, Magazines,
Encyclopedia and Dictionary.
2. Psychology Room / Lab
3. Psychology Club-Concept, Importance and activities
4. Teaching Aids : Visual (OHP, Slide Projector, Charts, Models), Audio (Radio, Tape Recorder), &
Audio Visual (TV, LCD, Film Projector),Importance and Limitation of each aid

UNIT-III Professional Development of Psychology Teacher-

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 140 -
1. Psychology teacher : Educational Qualifications, Proficiency, Efficiency and professional ethics.
2. Necessary Skills to be a successful psychologist.
3. Teaching psychology to eliminate social evils like prejudice, social conflicts, unhealthy life style,
injustice etc. 
4. Teaching Psychology for the development of egalitarianism, democratic spirits, healthy interpersonal
relationship, group and community living and familial and social adjustment 
5. Professional development of Psychology Teacher-
a) In service education programs- workshop, symposium etc.
b) in house discussions,
c) e-sharing of Ideas,
d) Use of e-library recourses
e) Involvement with professional organization or agencies such as Indian School Psychology
Association, Society of Indian Psychologists , Indian Association of Positive Psychology (IAPP),
National Academy of Psychology (NAOP), Indian Association of Clinical Psychology (IACP),
National Positive psychology Association.
6. Participation in International and National Seminar, Conference etc.

SESSIONAL WORK
Any one of the following –
1. Write a report on functioning of any one Local NGO/local body work as clinical psychology.
2. Critical review of a book on psychology at Sr. Secondary level.
3. Attend a national or international seminar of psychology and present a paper.
 To observe human behaviour in everyday life and interpret from psychological points of view 
 To help people solve everyday problems with their psychological knowledge at various spheres of
life.

REFERENCE

1. Anastadi, A., (1982). Psychological Testing, New York; Macmillan

2. Cox Tom, (1978). Strees London, The McMillan Press Ltd.
3. Hilgard, E. R. (1978). Introduction to Psychology (6th Edition), New York; Harcourt Brac and Co.
4. Milard, Atkinson and Atkinson, (1979). Introduction to Psychology, New York; Harcourt Brace
Hovanoboich Inc.
5. Kendle, H. H. (1963). Basic Psychology Application, Century, Crofts
6. Lazarus P. S. (1969). Patterns of Adjustment and Human Effectiveness, New York; McGraw Hill
Book Co.
7. Lindgren, Fyrne and Petrinovich, (1966). Psychology – An Introduction to a Behavioural
Science, (4th Edition), New York; John Wiley & Sons Inc.
8. Morgan, C. T., (1975). A Brief Introduction to Psychology, New York; John Wiley

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 141 -

 Publication
9. Sahakin, W. S. (1975). History and Systems of Psychology, New York; John Wiley and Sons
10. http://www.iapp.org.in/
11. http://www.aiansip.org/
12. http://www.naopindia.org/
13. http://www.iacp.in/2012/01/past-office-bearers.html
14. http://nppassociation.org

PAPER CODE-9216
Course 12 & 13 - PEDAGOGY OF HISTORY
Objectives : After completion of the course the student teachers will be able to –
1. Develop an understanding of principles of development of curriculum of history.
2. Develop an ability to evaluate the existing curriculum of History.
3. Construct and use Instructional/ Learning material.
4. Develop an ability to use community resources in teaching of History.
5. Use audio visual aids and ICT in teaching of History.
6. Develop an understanding of responsibilities and professional ethics of History teacher.
7. Develop an understanding of modes of professional development of History teacher.

COURSE CONTENT
UNIT – I Curriculum and Text Book –
1. Principles and steps of Curriculum Development.
2. Different Approaches to organize the curriculum of History: Chronological, Biographical, Topical
and Concentric.
3. Critical appraisal of History Curriculum at Senior Secondary level prescribed by RBSE/CBSE.
4. Characteristics of Good Text Book of History.
5. Critical Analysis of Text book of History prescribed by Board of RBSE/CBSE.

UNIT-II Teaching and Learning Resources –

1. Use of Library Resources: Textbook, Newspapers, Journals, Books and references, Magazines,
Encyclopedia and History Dictionary.
2. Community Resources: Organization and importance.
3. History room, Club.
4. Visits of Historical Sites and Museums.
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 142 -
5. Use of audio visual aids-charts, models, bulletin boards, flannel board, overhead projector, radio,
timeline, Maps, Models, Film Strips, Battle Plans, Documentaries Films, Coins, Puppets and Black
Board.

UNIT-III Professional Development of History Teacher-

1. History teacher: Qualities, responsibilities and professional ethics of History teacher.
2. Professional development of History Teacher.
3. In service education programmes, in house discussions, e-sharing of Ideas, Use of Journals,
Encyclopedia.
4. Involvement with professional organization or agencies such as Indian History Associations,
Rajasthan History Association, Indian Council of Social Science Research, Participation in Seminar,
Conference etc.

SESSIONAL WORK
Any one of the following –

1. Review of any standard book of History.

2. Report of any study of an in service education program organized by an IASE/CTE/SIERT for history
teacher.
3. Visit to any one Historical site/ museum and prepare a report of the visit.
4. A study of training needs of History teachers.
5. A study of a historical development of a village/community/town.

REFERENCES

1- nhf{kr] misUnzukFk vkSj c?ksyk] gsr flag- ¼1982½ bfrgkl f”k{k.k] t;iqj] jktLFkku xzUFk vdkneh
2- ?kkVs] oh-Mh- ¼1981½% bfrgkl f”k{k.k] gfj;k.kk] lkfgR; vdkneh p.Mhx<+-
3- 'kekZ vkj-,- ¼1994½% bfrgkl f”k{k.k] esjB] ykW;y cqd Mhiks
4- R;kxh] xq:”kj.k- ¼2010½% bfrgkl f”k{k.k] vkxjk] vxzoky ifCyds”kUl-
5. Aggrawal, J.C.; Teaching of History, New Delhi :(A practical Approach),VikasPublishing House
Pvt.Ltd.
6. Choudhary, K.P.; Effective teaching of History in India, NCERT.
7. Ghate, V.D.; Suggestions for the teaching of History in India.
8. Ghose, K.D.; (1951) Creative Teaching of History. PUP,
9. Kochhar, S.K.; (1979) Teaching of History. New Delhi :SterlingPublishers Pvt.
10. Pathak,S.P.; (2005) Teaching of History . New Delhi: Kanishka Publisher.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 143 -

11 Singh, Y.K; (2004) Teaching of History, New Delhi.APH, PublishingCorporation.
12. Shaida, B.D.; Singh Sahab , (2005 )Teaching History. New Delhi: DhanPatRai Publishing Co.
Pvt.Ltd, X.
13. Verjeshwary, R. ; Hand Book for History teacher in India.

PAPER CODE-9217
Course 12 & 13 - PEDAGOGY OF POLITICAL SCIENCE
Objectives: After completion of the course the student teachers will be able to –

1. Develop an understanding of curriculum construction.

2. Develop ability to evaluate the existing curriculum in Political Science at the Sr. Secondary level.
3. Use ICT and community resources in teaching of Political Science.
4. Organize Co-curricular activities related to Political Science teaching.
5. Develop an ability to construct and use instructional/ learning material.
6. Develop professional understanding required as Political Science teacher.
7. Develop an understanding of modes of professional development of Political Science teacher.
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT-I Curriculum and Text Book –
1. Principles of curriculum construction in Political Science.
2. Critical appraisal of Political Science curriculum at Secondary and Sr. Secondary Level prescribed by
RBSE/CBSE.
3. Text book-importance and qualities of a good text book of Political Science.
4. Review of Political Science text book at Secondary and Sr. Secondary Level prescribed by
RBSE/CBSE.

UNIT – II Learning Resources in Political Science –

1. Use of Library Resources : Text book, News papers, Journals, Books and References, Magazines,
Encyclopedia.
2. Organization of Tours and Exhibition

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 144 -

3. Use of Audio-Visual Aids and ICT including multi-media in Teaching Political Science-OHP,
Computer, LCD Projector etc.

UNIT-III Professional development of Political Science –

1. Political Science teacher-Qualities, responsibilities and professional ethics of Political Science
teacher.
2. In Service Education Programmes, In house discussion, e-sharing of ideas, Use of Journals,
Encyclopedia.
3. Professional development programme, the Political Science teacher, Participation in Seminar,
conferences, membership of professional organization.

SESSIONAL WORK

Any one of the following –

1. Review of any standard book on Political Science.

2. Report of a study of an in service education programme organized by an I.A.S.E./ C.T.E./ S.I.E.R.T.
in political science.
3. A study of training needs of Political Science teachers.

REFERENCES

9- Ck?ksyk] gsr flag ] O;kl gfj'kpUnz ¼1985½ ukxfjd 'kkL= f'k{k.k] t;iqj jktLFkku fgUnh xzaFk vdknehA
10- HkVukxj] xhrk ¼2007½] ukxfjd'kkL= f'k{k.k] t;iqj] bf.M;u ifCyf”kax gkmlA
11- xxZ Hkaojyky cD'kh m'kk ¼2008½] ukxfjd 'kkL= dk f'k{k.k] vkxjk] jk/kk izdk'ku eafnjA
12- dqnsfl;k] mes'kpUnz ¼2004½] ukxfjd 'kkL= f’k{k.k] vkxjk] fouksn iqLrd efUnjA
13- {kf=;ksa ds ¼2004½] ukxfjd'kkL= dk f”k{k.k] esjB] vkj-yky- cqd fMiksA
14- feÙky ,e-,y- ¼1993½ ukxfjd 'kkL= f'k{k.k esjB] yks;y cqd fMiksA
15- R;kxh] xq:lj.knkl ¼2010½] ukxfjd 'kkL= f'k{k.k] vkxjk] fouksn iqLrd efUnjA
16- Bloom B.S. : Taxonomy of Educational Objectives-Cgnitive Domain Schools, New York.
9. Bining and Bining-(1951) Teaching of Social studies in Secondary Schools, New York.
10. Bourne H.E. (1972) Teaching of History and Civics, Bombay. Longmans 1972.
11. Higher G. (1951) The art of teaching, Methuen & Co. Ltd. London.
12. Harlikar-(1982-Teaching civics in India, Bombay, Padma Publication Ltd.
13. Landon Joseph (1912) The principles and practice of teaching and class management. Mickiejohn and
Sons London.
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 145 -
14. Kochhar, S.K. (2004) Teaching of Social Science,Sterling Publishers Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi.
15. Pandey, B.N. Khosla,D.N. (1974) student teaching evaluation NCERT.
16. White E.M. (1981) The teaching of modern civics George G. Harrald & Co. Ltd. London.

PAPER CODE-9218
Course 12 & 13 - PEDAGOGY OF ECONOMICS
Objectives: After completion of the course, the student teachers will be able to -
1. Develop the ability to evaluate the present curriculum in economics at the Secondary and Senior
Secondary level.
2. Use Learning Resources in teaching learning process.
3. Develop professional understanding required as economic teacher.
4. Develop an understanding of modes of Professional development of Economic Teacher.
5. Develop awareness about recent advancements in teaching of Economics.

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT- I Curriculum and Text Book of Economics

1. Principles of Curriculum Development
2. Critical Appraisal of Economics Curriculum at Secondary and Sr. Secondary level prescribed by
RBSE/CBSE.
3. New trends in economics curriculum-
4. Text book- Importance and qualities of a good text book of economics.
5. Review of Economics Text book at Secondary and Sr. Secondary level.

UNIT -II Teaching and Learning Resources

1. Use of Library Resources : Text Book, News Paper, Journals, Books and References, Magazines,
Encyclopedia and Economics Dictionary (Glossary).
2. Community Resources- Post Office, Bank, Cottage industries, Community library etc.
3. Organization of Tours and Exhibition
4. E-Learning –Social Media and networking
5. Use of Audio Visual Aids and ICT including multi-media in Teaching Economics – OHP, Computer,
Interactive Board, LCD Projector, etc.

UNIT- III Professional Development of Economics Teacher

1. Qualities of Economics Teacher
2. Ethics of Economics Teacher
3. Professional development of Economics teacher.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 146 -

 In-service Education Programmes, In House discussions, e-Sharing of Ideas, use of Journals,
Encyclopedia etc.
4. Involvement with Professional organization or agencies such as Institute of Economic Growth, Centre
for Policy Research , Policy Commission, Indian Economical Association, Rajasthan Economical
Association, Indian Council of Social Science Research, Manikyalal Varma Tribal Research
Institute, Economical Survey of India.

SESSIONAL WORK
Any one of the following

1. Review of any standard book on economics.

2. Report of a study of an in service education program organized by an I.A.S.E./C.T.E/ S.I.E.R.T.
3. A study of training needs of economics teachers.
4. Report of a study of a program organized by MGNREGA/Sampoorna Grameen Rozgar
Yojana(SGRY)/ Pradhan Mantri Gramodaya Yojana.
REFERENCES
1. Aggarwal, J.C., Teaching of Economics – A Practical Appraoch, Vinod Pustak Mandir, Agra, 2005.
2. Bloom, B.S. et al.,(1967)Taxonomy of Educational Objective Handbook 1, Cognitive
Domain,Handbook 2, Affective Domain, London: Longman.
3. Bloom, B. S. Englehart, M. D., Furst, E. J., Hill, W. H. and Khrathwohl, D. R. (1964). Taxonomy of
Educational Objectives Handbook, 1, Cognitive Domain, Handbook, 2, Affective Domain, Longman
London.
4. Edited by Kadamari(2006) :Teaching of Economics of Economics? A Tripat Tuteja Commonwealth
Publishers.
5. Bruner, J. (1966). Toward a Theory of Instruction. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
6. Dale Edgar (1961) Audio-visual Methods in Teaching, New York: Holt Rinehart and Winston.
7. Dwivedi, D.N. (2002) Principles of Economics, New Delhi, Vikas Publishing.
8. Gunter, Mary Alice et.al.; Instruction: A Model‟s Approach- Fifth Edition; Pearson Education Inc.;
Boston; 2007.
9. Husen.N (2003):Teacher Manual in Economics, Published by Regional college of Education, Ajmer.
10. Instructional Technology: A Systematic Approach to Education, Frederick G. Knirk, Kent L.
Gustafson, Holt, Rinehart and Winston, Inc, 1986.
11. Joyce, B. & Weil, M. and Calhoun, E. (2008). Models of teaching, 8th ed. Englewood Cliffs, NJ:
Prentice-Hall. (there is now a 9th, 2014 edition)
12. NCERT (1974), Teaching Units in Economics for High and Higher secondary Stage, New Delhi.
13. Sharma, Seema, Modern Teaching Economics, Anmol Publication Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi- 2004.
14. Sharma,S.R.(2009): Arthshastra shikshan, Arjun Publishing House
15. Siddiqi, M.H. (1998) Teaching of Economics: New Delhi; Ashish Publishing House.
16. Taba, H. (1962) Curriculum development; theory and practice. New York,: Harcourt Brace & World.
17. Twomey Fosnot, C. (1989). Enquiring teachers, enquiring learners: A constructivist approach for
teaching. New York: Teachers College Press.
18. Yadav, Anita, Teaching of Economics, Anmol Publication Pvt., Delhi.
19- lDlsuk fueZy ¼2008½ % vFkZ’kkL= f’k{k.k jktLFkku fgUnz xzUFk vdkneh] t;iqj
20- ukxj] fnO;k ¼2006½% vFkZ’kkL= f’k{k.k] jktLFkku izdk’ku] t;iqj
21- egrks] ,l-ds] vFkZ’kkL= f’k{k.k ds vk/kkj ¼2006½ % jk/kk izdk’ku efUnj izk-fy-] vkxjk

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 147 -

22- vfXugks=h Ñ’.k dqekj ¼2006½% vFkZ’kkL= f’k{k.k] izdk’ku& xks;y ifCyds’ku] t;iqj
23- jko] th- dkes’k ¼2005½% vFkZ’kkL= f’k{k.k] jk/kk izdk’ku efUnj] vkxjk&2
24- Okk’.ks;
Z jktho dqekj¼2005) % vFkZ’kkL= f’k{k.k] lkfgR; izdk’ku] vkxjk
25- R;kxh xq:’kj.knkl ¼1993) % vFkZ’kkL= f’k{k.k] fouksn iqLrd eafnj] vkxjk
26- Ikk.Ms;] dkerk izlkn % vFkZ’kkL= f’k{k.k] esjB
27- flag gjukjk;.k ,oa flag jktsUnz % vFkZ’kkL= f’k{k.k] izdk’ku&y{ehukjk;.k vxzoky & vkxjk
Internet Resources:
Online! A Reference Guide to Using Internet Resources.
Wikipedia – online encyclopedia website - http://www.wikipedia.org/
E learning India Website - http://elearning-india.com/
Constructive approach -
http://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Constructivist_teaching_methods&oldid=436907250
PAPER CODE-9219
Course 12 & 13 - PEDAGOGY OF GEOGRAPHY

Objective: After completing the course the student teacher will be able to:
1. Develop understanding about Principles of Curriculum construction in geography.
2. Develop skill in constructing & analyzing geography curriculum
3. Develop skills in using different resource for teaching geography
4. Understands importance of Professional development of geography teachers
5. Develop skills to be a successful geography teacher
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT-I Geography curriculum and Text books Principles of Curriculum construction, criteria for
Analysis of geography curriculum.
Critical appraisal of geography curriculum at Secondary and Senior Secondary stage in Rajasthan.
Geography text books and work books – Review of existing text books and workbook prescribed by
RBSE at Senior Secondary level.

UNIT-II Learning Resource in Geography

1. Use of Audio-visual aids and ICT
2. Use of maps and map interpretation
3. Geography laboratory and equipment
4. Practical work in geogrpahy

UNIT-III Professional development of Geography Teachers

1. Development of Professional competence in Geography Teachers.
2. Professional Commitment and ethics of geography Teacher

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 148 -

3. Agencies of professional development of Teachers.
4. Importance of in-service education programme participation in Seminar/workshop membership in
professional organization, in-home discussion.
5. Importance of Journals, professional organizations.

SESSIONAL WORK
Any one out of the following
1. Conduct survey of organization of geography Lab in a school
2. Review of a standard book on geography.
3. Abstracts of any two papers on geography published in reputed journals.
4. Identification of learning difficulties in geography.

REFERERNCES

1- nqcs] ,l-ds- ¼2005½ % mPprj Hkwxksy f'k{k.k] cqd ,uDyso] t;iqjA

2- dkSf'kd ,-Mh-] 'kekZ ,-ds- ¼1995½ % HkkSxksfyd fopkj/kkjk,a ,oa fof/k&ra=] jLrksxh ifCyds'ku] esjB] ;w -ih-A
3- flag] ,p-,u- ¼1995½ % Hkwxksy f'k{k.k] fouksn iqLrd eafnj] vkxjkA
4- JhokLro dkafr eksgu ¼2008½ % Hkwxksy f'k{k.k&,d O;kogkfjd n`f"V] lkfgR; izdk'ku] vkxjkA
5- lkekftd foKku f'k{k.k % vk/kkj i= ¼2005½ % lkfgR; izdk'ku] vkxjkA
6- oekZ] ,y-,u- ¼2009½ % Hkwxksy f'k{k.k % lS)kafrd ,oa izk;ksfxd jktLFkku fgUnh xazFk] vdkneh] t;iqjA
7- oekZ] ts-ih- ¼2005½ % Hkwxksy f'k{k.k] fgeka'kq] ifCyds'ku] mn;iqj] fnYyhA
8- oekZ] ts-ih- ¼1995½ % Hkwxksy f'k{k.k] fgeka'kq ifCyds'ku] mn;iqj fnYyhA
9- A Hand book for geography Teachers-Scarefe, II-V, (1995) : London Methurn & Co.
10- Bhattacharya A.N. (2000) : Human geography of Mewar, Himanshu Publication, Udaipur, Delhi.
11- Boardman David (1964) :Graphicacy and geography Teaching, CROOM HELM, London, Sydney,
Wolfeboro, New Hampshire
12- Douglas Jackson W.A. (1956) :The shaping of our world-A human and cultural geography Jon Wiley
& Sons, New York.
13- Fairgrieve J. (1937) : Geography in school, University Tutorial Press, London.
14- Jha P.K. (2007) : Modern Methods of Teaching Geography, Rajat Publications, New Delhi.
15- Macnee EA (1937) : Suggestion for the Teaching of Geogrpahy in India, Oxford University Press,
London.
16- NCF-2005-NCERT, New Delhi
17- Source Book for Teaching Geography (1970) : Paris, UNESCO

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 149 -

 PAPER CODE-9220
Course 12 & 13 - PEDAGOGY OF ART
Objectives: After completion of the course the student-teachers will be able to:
1. Develop understanding about Principles of Curriculum Construction in Art.
2. Develop Skill in constructing and analyzing Art curriculum.
3. Understands importance of Professional development of Art Teachers
4. Develop skill to be a successful Art Teacher.
5. Understand the significant role and Educational values of Art Room; Art Museums, Art Exhibitions
and Art Galleries.
6. Understand the role of Art in society, culture and international understanding.
7. Develop awareness regarding the rich cultural and artistic heritage of India and the specific regions;
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT –I Curriculum Construction and Textbook
1. Concept and Relationship of Curriculum, Syllabus and Text materials;
2. Principles of Curriculum Construction in Teaching of Art.
3. Components of Art curriculum: Art Production; Art History; Art Criticism and Aesthetic Values.
4. Criteria for Art curriculum at Primary, Secondary and Senior Secondary level (in view of various
developmental stages of creative expression).
5. Critical appraisal of Art curriculum at Secondary and Senior Secondary stages prescribed by R.B.S.C.
6. Characteristics of a good text-book of Art education;
7. Selection of materials for a good text-book of Art teaching at Senior Secondary level;
8. Review of existing textbook prescribed by RBSE/CBSE
UNIT –II Support System of teaching Art
5. The Art-Teacher:
a. Specific qualities of an Art-Teacher
b. Role of Art-Teacher in classes of creative art activities.
c. Development of Professional competencies in Art Teachers.
d. Professional Commitment and ethics of Art Teachers.
e. Importance of in-service education programme for Art Teachers: Participation in
Seminar/Workshop/Art Exhibitions; membership in professional Artists organizations; in-house
discussions.
6. Learning Resources in teaching of art:
a. Use of Audio-visual aids and ICT;
b. Use of Art museums/Art exhibitions/Art galleries
c. Use of Art Objects;
d. Use of Exhibits;

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 150 -

 e. Use of Reproductions, Photographs and Other Visual aids.
7. Art Room:
a. Importance and necessity of a separate Art Room in Schools;
b. The equipments needed for an Art Room.
UNIT –III Educational Values of Art
6. Educational values of :
a) Art-Exhibition;
b) Art-Museum
c) Art-Galleries.
7. Art and Community:
a) Art and society;
b) Art and culture;
c) Art and National integration
d) Art and international understanding
SESSIONAL WORK

Any one of the following:

1. Prepare a report on the critical appraisal on the rich artistic heritage of India.
2. Review the process, technique and specific features of Ajanta/ Mughal miniature paintings/
Rajasthani Paintings with suitable illustrations.
3. Visit any Art Exhibition/Art museum/Art gallery and prepare a report on the educational importance
of these institutions.
4. Critically examine the role of Art in society/culture/promoting National integration/promoting
International understanding with suitable illustrations.
5. Write a detail Essay on the various stages of Child‟s Creative Expression.

REFERENCES
1. Collingwood, R.G.: “The principles of Art, Oxford University Press, USA
2. Jefferson, B. (1959) : "Teaching Art to Children." Allyan & Bacon Inc. Boston.
3. Jeswani, K.K. : Art in Education, Atma Ram & Sons Kashmiri Gate, Delhi-6;
4. Jeswani, K.K. : Appreciation of Art, Atma Ram and Sons, Kashmiri Gate, Delhi-6.
5. Road, H., Education through Art, Faber and Faber London;
6. Lowenfeld, V. :Creative and mental Growth, Macmillan Co., New York;
7. Tolstoy: What is Art? An essay on Art, Oxford University Press, New York;
8. Brown, Percy. : Indian Paintings;
9. Chilvers, Ian. : The Oxford Dictionary of Art;
10. Fechner, Lois. & Rathus: Understanding Art, Prentice-Hall International (U.K.) Ltd. London;
11. McDonald, R: “Art as Education. “ Henry Holt & Comp., New York.
12. Read, Herbert (1942):” Education through Art. : Faber & Faber, London.
13. Victor D‟Amico (1953): “Creative Teaching in Art; International Textbook Company, Scranton,
Pennsylvania.
14. Whit ford, W.G. (1929):” An Introduction to Art-Education. “ D. Appleton & Co
15. t; nso vk;Z % dyk v/;kiu] y{eh ukjk;.k vxzoky] vkxjk&3A
16. ;’koUrh xkSM+ % dyk f”k{kk f”k{k.kA
17. dqlqe “kekZ % dyk f”k{kkA
18. jke pUnz “kqDy% dyk dk n”kZu( dkWjksuk vkVZ ifCy”klZ] the[kkuk, esjB m-iz-
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 151 -
19. jke pUnz “kqDy% ^uohu Hkkjrh; fp=dyk f”k{k.k( fdrkc egy izk- fy- bykgckn
20. jk; Ñ".knkl% ^Hkkjr dh fp=dyk*( Hkkjrh Hk.Mkj] yhMj Ásl] bykgckn
21. MkW- vfouk”k cgknqj oekZ% Hkkjrh; fp=dyk dk bfrgkl( izdk”k cqd fMiks] cjsyh
22. bZ- dqekfjy Lokeh% ^Hkkjrh; fp=dyk vkSj dykdkj*( izdk”ku foHkkx] lwpuk vkSj izlkj.k ea=ky;, Hkkjr
ljdkj- ifV;kyk g;kyk gkml ubZ] ubZ fnYyh
23. MkW- f”kodqekj “kekZ ,oa MkW- jkekorkj vxzoky% ^#iizn dyk ds ewyk/kkj* yk;y cqd fMiks] fudV xouZes.V
dkWyst] esjB] m-iz-
24. ^Hkkjrh; fp=dyk dk vkykspukRed bfrgkl* yfyr dyk izdk”ku] 27&,] lkdsr dkWykuh] vyhx<+

PAPER CODE-9221
Course 12 & 13 - PEDAGOGY OF MUSIC
Objectives: After completion of the course the student teachers will be able to-
1. Develop understanding of principles of curriculum development of music.
2. Develop ability in preparing and critically reviewing the curriculum of music.
3. Develop skill in organizing music room and related resources.
4. Appreciate the contribution of role models in music.
5. Understand different modes of professional development of music teachers.
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT-I Curriculum and Text book
1. Principles of curriculum development in Music.
2. Critical appraisal of music curriculum at Sr. Secondary level prescribed RBSE.
3. Characteristics of good text book
4. Review of music text book at Sr. Secondary level prescribed RBSE.
UNIT-II Teaching and Learning Resources
1. Use of Audio visual Aids in teaching music
2. Music room and equipments
3. Important instruments of Indian music Harmonium, Tabla, Tanpura etc.
4. Use of folk song and local resources.
5. Handling and maintenance of musical instruments.
UNIT-III Professional Development of Music Teacher
1. Qualities of music teacher , their professional and ethical responsibilities.
2. Role models of Indian classical music and their contribution in Indian classical music (listing the
performances of role model)
(a) Pt. Vishnu Digambar Paluskar (b) Pt. V.N. Bhatkhande (c) Pt. Bhimsen Joshi
(d) Pt. Jasraj (e) Dr. Kishori Amonkar (f) Dr. Prabha Atrey
3. Role of professional organization in promoting music education
(a) Prayag Sangeet Samitee (b) Gandharva Mahavidhyalaya
4. Modes of professional development of music teacher (in service education programmes, in house
discussion, participation in Seminar, conferences, Workshop, online sharing, membership of and
participation in professional organization , attending musical concerts / conferences.
SESSIONAL WORK
Any one of the following -
1. Life Sketch of any two role model of Indian classical music.
2. Analysis of learning difficulties of music students.
3. Writing a report and collection of local folk song/dance

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 152 -

4. Participation and report of a classical music concert
REFERENCES
1. Sangeet Shiksahn, Dr. Shobhana Shah
2. Sanget Vishard by vasant, Hathras Prakashan
3. High School Sangeet Shastra by Bhagwat Sharan Sharma
4. Bharty Sangeet Ka Itihas by Bhagwat Sharan Sharma
5. Sangeet Parikha Ank Patrika Ad. Dr. Lakshmi Narayan Garg
6. Sangeet Shiksha Ank Patrika Ad. Dr. Lakshmi Narayan Garg
7. Bhartiya Sangeet Shikshan Pranali or Uska Vartman Star Dr. Madhubala Saxsena
8. Hkhelsu tks'kh] O;fäRo vkSj laxhr % eksgu ukMd.khZ
9. Bhat Khande's contribution to music : S. Nayar
10. Music Education New Horizons : Manorma Sharma
11. Music Education by Dinesh Swaroop
PAPER CODE-9222
Course 12 & 13 - PEDAGOGY OF BUSINESS STUDIES
Objectives:-After completion 0f the course the student teacher will be able to:
1. Understand and use of concept mapping and curricular elements in Business Studies teaching.
2. Develop the ability to plan Curriculum in Business Studies at senior secondary level.
3. Undertake a critical appraisal of existing Business Studies curriculum at sr.secondary stage prescribed
by RBSE / CBSE.
4. Know the qualities of text book of Business Studies.
5. Understand and use I.C.T. in Business Studies Teaching.
6. Develop the ethics & Professional growth of a Business Studies teacher.
7. Organize various activities related to Commerce viz. Field trip, Commerce club, Commerce
Exhibition, Commerce Fair.
8. Understand and uselearning resources in Business Studies.

COURSE CONTENTS

UNIT-I Curriculum and Text Book in Business Studies:

1. Cognitive Map of Concepts and Curricular elements in Teaching of Business Studies
2. Principles of developing curriculum in Business Studies.
3. Selection of subject matter-subjective and objective approach.
4. Organization of subject matter.
5. Critical appraisal/Evaluation of present syllabus of Business Studies prescribed by RBSE/CBSE.
6. Characteristics and selection criteria of a good text book of Business Studies.
7. Review a critical appraisal of the text book prescribed by RBSE/CBSE for senior secondary classes.

UNIT II Learning Resources in Business Studies:-

1. Media Integration in Business Studies teaching :-Use of Audio – Visual aids and ICT including Multi
Media in teaching Business Studies OHP, Computer interactions boards, LCD Projector , Internet.
2. Use of Community Resources e.g. Interaction with Business personalities of Business houses.
3. Research articles from journals on Business Studies education.
4. Concept and Design of Business Studies Laboratory.
5. Recreational Activities through Business Studies Club:
a. Commerce Exhibition
b. Commerce Fair
c. Business Games
d. Business Studies Model
e. Field Trip
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 153 -
 f. E-Learning, Social Media, T.V. channels (Business channels) & Networking.

UNIT III Professional development of Business Studies Teacher.

1. Qualities and responsibilities of a Business Studies Teacher.
2. Role and functions of a Business Studies teacher.
3. Ethics of a Business Studies teacher.
4. Importance and participation of in-service programs for Business Studies teacher.
5. Professional growth of a Business Studies teacher- In- service Education programs, In- house
discussions, Use of library resources and studying subject based new papers and
magazines,contribution in professional Journals, membership and participation in professional
organizations.

SESSIONAL WORK

Any one of the following:

1. Action plan for Commerce lab / Commerce exhibition / Commerce fair.
2. Preparing Scrap book related to business activities.
3. Planning, organization and reporting of Panel discussion on any current issue related to Business.

REFERENCES

1. Sharma B.L. (2007) Vanijyashikshan R.L. book Depot, Meerut.

2. Dr. Jain K.C.S.(2008) Vanijyashikshan, Rajasthan Hindi Academy, Jaipur.
3. ParsarAshish Ashok (2007) VanijyashikshanRadhaPrakashan, Agra
4. Singh I.B.(1968) Vanijyakaadhyayan, Laxmi Narayan, Agra .
5. Asubel D.P.(1963) “The Psychology of Meaningful Verbal Learning” N.V. Grune and Stration.
6. Agarwal J.C.(2003)- Teaching of commerce, Vikas publication, New Delhi.
7. Saxena, Udaiveer : Vanijyashikshan
8. Baghela, Het Singh : Vanijyashikshan
9. RaoSema – Teaching of Commerce, Anmol Publication Pvt. Ltd. 1995.
10. Jain, K.C.S. (1989).Work Shop Report (13 Feb. to 18 Feb.)

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 154 -

 PAPER CODE-9223
Course 12 & 13 - PEDAGOGY OF FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING
Objectives:-After completion 0f the course the student teacher will be able to:

1. Develop an understanding and use concept mapping and curricular elements in Financial Accounting
teaching.
2. Develop the ability to plan Curriculum in Financial Accounting at senior secondary level.
3. Undertake Critical appraisal of existing Financial Accounting curriculum at senior secondary stage
prescribed by RBSE / CBSE.
4. Know the qualities of text book of Financial Accountancy.
5. Develop necessary skills to prepare and use various instructional/learning methods and Media
Integration.
6. Develop the ethics & Professional growth of a Financial Accounting teacher.
7. Develop an Understandingand use learning resources in Financial Accounting.
8. Organize various activities related to Financial Accounting subject viz.Field trip, Exhibition, Fair,
Financial Games.

COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT-I Curriculum and Text Book in Financial Accounting
1. Cognitive Map of Concepts and Curricular elements in Teaching of Financial Accounting.
2. Principles of developing curriculum in Financial Accounting.
1. Selection of subject matter-subjective and objective approach.
2. Organization of subject matter.
3. Critical appraisal / evaluation of present syllabus of Financial Accounting prescribed by RBSE/
CBSE.
4. Characteristics and selection criteria of a text book of Financial Accounting.
5. A Critical review of a text book of financial accounting prescribed by RBSE/CBSE for senior
secondary classes

UNIT –II Learning Resources in Financial Accounting.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 155 -

1. Media and media integration: - use of audio –visual aid, ICT including multimedia,
OHP,Computerinteraction board,LCD Projector, Internet, E-learning, social media, networking etc.in
Financial Accounting teaching.
2. Using community resources for Financial Accounting teaching-Interaction with persons of accounting
profession.
3. Library resources.
4. Concept and design of Financial Accounting Laboratory.
5. Recreational Activities through Commerce Club related to Financial Accounting teaching-
a) Commerce Exhibition
b) Commerce Fair
c) Financial Accounting Models
d) Games
e) Field –Trip.
UNIT–III Professional development of Financial Accounting Teacher

1. Qualities and responsibilities of a Financial Accounting teacher.

2. Role and functions of a Financial Accounting teacher.
3. Ethics of a financial accounting teacher.
4. Professional growth of a Financial Accounting teacher- In-service Education Programs, In-house
discussions, Use of library resources and studying subject based new papers and magazines,
contribution in professional Journals, membership and participation in professional organization.
5. Developing and use of Action Research Plan.

SESSIONAL WORK
Any one of the following:
1. One project related to any Financial Accounting topic.
2. To prepare an Action Research Plan.
3. Review of any one Research article from Journals on Financial Accounting Education.

REFERENCES

1. Sharma B.L. (2007) Vanijyashikshan R.L. book Depot, Meerut.

2. Dr. Jain K.C.S.(2008) Vanijyashikshan, Rajasthan Hindi Academy, Jaipur.
3. ParsarAshish Ashok (2007) VanijyashikshanRadhaPrakashan, Agra
4. Singh I.B.(1968) Vanijyakaadhyayan, Laxmi Narayan, Agra .
5. Asubel D.P.(1963) “The Psychology of Meaningful Verbal Learning” N.V. Grune and Stration.
6. Agarwal J.C.(2003)- Teaching of commerce, Vikas publication, New Delhi.
7. Choudhary, Anil (2007)- Fundamental Accounting and Financial Analysis for UPTU person
education Delhi.
8. Parshar&Updhya (2010)- Teaching of Commerce, Book keeping and Accountancy, RadhaPrakashan,
Agra.
9. RaoSema – Teaching of Commerce, Anmol Publication Pvt. Ltd. 1995.
10. Jain, K.C.S. (1989).Work Shop Report ( 13 Feb. to 18 Feb.)
11. PRACTICE SETS IN FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING, Dr. K.C.S. Jain Programme Co-ordinator
12. Regional Institute of Education (National Council of Education Research & Training)

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 156 -

13. Ajmer (1998-99).
14. Instructional Material for Teaching Accountancy, Dr. K.C.S. Jain Programme Co-
15. ordinator(1998-99) Regional Council of Educational Research (NCERT) AJMER.
16. Sharma M.L. and Agarwal Ashok Accountancy Part – I
17. Kapoor, N.D. : Principals and practice of Accounting.
18. Singh, M.N. : Methods of teaching Commerce
19. Maheshwari , S.B. : Teacher‟s Guide in Book Keeping and Accounting Methods of Teaching Book
Keeping
20. Boynton, L.D. : Methods of Teaching Book Keeping
21. Musselman, V.A. and Hauna, J.M. : Teaching Book Keeping and Accounting

PAPER CODE-9224
Course 14 - KNOWLEDGE AND CURRICULUM
Objectives: On completion the course the student teacher will be able to:

1. Develop understanding of meaning philosophical basis and sourses of knowledge.

2. Develop understanding of the relationship between knowledge and curriculum.
3. Develop understanding of Activity, Discovery and Dialogue related to modern child centered
education with reference to Gandhi, Tagore, Dewey, Plato and Freire.
4. Understand the concept of Nationalism, Secularism and Universalisation with special
reference to Tagore and J.krishnamurthi.
5. Understand the changes brought about by Industrialization,
6. Implications of Democracy, Individual autonomy, Equality, Social justice for education.
7. Understand the difference between Curriculum framework, Curriculum, Syllabus and
textbook.
8. Understand the Principles of Curriculum Construction.
9. Understand the assessment modes of Curriculum Evaluation.

COURSE CONTENT
UNIT- I Epistemology, Knowledge and Knowing

1. Epistemology: Meaning; Philosophical basis of Knowledge according to Western and Indian

Philosophy.
2. Distinction between : Knowledge and Belief; Knowledge and Information ; Knowledge and Skill;
Knowledge and Reason; Knowledge and Education; knowledge and Training
3. Facets of Knowledge Such as Local and Universal ; Concrete and Abstract ; Theoretical and
Practical; Contextual and Textual; School and out of School.
4. Process of Knowing Process of Construction of Knowledge; Factors involved in construction of
Knowledge; The role of Knower and Known in Construction and Transmission of Knowledge; The
role of Culture in Knowing

UNIT -II Forms of Knowledge and Its Organization in Schools.

1. Categorization of Knowledge; Basis of Categorization;

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 157 -

2. The essential forms of Knowledge.
3. Basis of selection of categories of Knowledge in School Education.
4. The responsibility of Selection Legitimacy of inclusion of knowledge in School curriculum.

UNIT- III Educational Thinkers and Child Centered Education

Basis of Child Centered Education in relation to Activity, Discovery and Dialogue with reference to
Gandhi, Tagore, Dewey, Plato and Freire.
Social basis of Education in the context of society in relation to Democracy, Industrialization and Ideas of
Individual Autonomy Equality and Social- justice.

1. Concepts of Nationalism, Universalization and Secularism and their interrelationship with education.
2. Critical Multiculturalism and Democratic education as the basis of analyzing concepts of learning
rooted in school practices.

UNIT- IV Principles of Curriculum construction

1. Meaning and need of Curriculum.

2. Principles of Curriculum construction
3. Differentiation between curriculum framework, Curriculum and Syllabus.
4. Determinates of Curriculum
5. Social-Political-cultural-economic diversity.
6. Socio-Political aspirations including ideologies.
7. Economic necessities and Technological possibilities.
8. National priorities and International contexts.
9. Considerations in curriculum making.
10. Relevance and specificity of educational objectives for concerned level.
11. Critical issues: Environmental concerns, Gender differences, Values and Social sensitivity.

UNIT –V Curriculum Development and its Implementation

1. Different approaches of curriculum development: Subject centered: Environmentalist ( incorporating

local concerns) Behaviorist ; Competency based, Learner centered and Constructivist
2. Role of external agencies in providing curriculum and pedagogic supports to teachers within schools;
teacher‟s role in transacting, developing and researching curriculum.
3. Operationalisation of curriculum into learning situations; selection and development of learning
resources i.e. text books, teaching – learning materials and resources outside the school- local
environment, community and media.
4. Process of Curriculum evaluation; Evolving assessment modes, need of model of Continuous
Comprehensive Evaluation; Feedback from learners, teachers, community and administrators.

SESSIONAL WORK

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 158 -

Attempt any two of the following.
1. Report on analysis of operationalisation of Curriculum into learning situations in school and outside
school in any one school.
2. Conduct a survey on feedback of curriculum from learners/ Teachers/ community and prepare a
report.
3. Prepare a report of a group discussion conducted on „democratic ducation‟/„multiculturalism‟ as the
basis of analyzing school practices.
4. Prepare three activities to develop awareness about Environmental concerns, Gender ensitivity and
Social Sensitivity (one on each issue).

Reference
1. Schilvest, W.H. (2012), Curriculum: prospective paradigm and possiilty.M.C MLLAN
publication.
2. Hirst, Paul, H. Knowledge and the curriculum. Routledge publication.
3. Letha ram mohan (2009). Curriculum instrchon and evaluation. Agerwal publication, Agra.
4. Scolt, dand (2003). Curriculum studies: curriculum knowledge. Routledge falmes, m.y.
5. Kelly, AV. (2009). The curriculum: theory and practice sage publication Singapore.
6. JhokLro] ,p-,l-,oa prqosnZ h] ,e- th ¼2010½- ikB~;p;kZ vkSj f’k{k.k fof/k;kW] f’k{kk izdk’ku] t;iqj
7. ;kno] f’k;kjke] 2011 ikB~;dze fodkl vxzoky izdk’ku-
8. Shulman L. S. (1986) those who understand: knowledge growth in teaching. educational
researcher.
9. Sinha, S. (2000) Acquiring literacy in schools, seminar.
10. Sternberg, R.J. (2013). intelligence, competence, and expertise, in A.J. Elliot & C.S. Dweck
(Eds), handbook of competence and motivation .
11. Tagore, R. (2003) Civilization and progress in crisis in civilization and other essays.: rupa &co.
New Delhi.
12. Pathak, A (2013) Social implications of schooling: knowledge pedagogy and consciousness.
Aakar books, New Delhi.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 159 -

 PAPER CODE-9225
Course 15 - ASSESSMENT FOR LEARNING
Objectives: After completion of the course the student teacher will be able to-
1. Understand the historical aspect and current practices of Assessment.
2. Understand assessing children‟s progress in terms of psychological development and the criteria
provided by the curriculum.
3. Explain cognizant of key concept related to assessment such as measurement, evaluation, assessment,
Examination, Test, Formative and Summative evaluation etc.
4. Evolve realistic, comprehensive and dynamic assessment procedures that are able to keep the whole
students in view.
5. Explore the use of wide range of assessment tool their selection and appropriate construction.
6. Develop critical understanding of issues in assessment for learning (from constructivist paradigm)
7. Use statistical techniques for interpretation of assessment data.
8. Understanding the critical role of assessment in enhancing learning.
9. Design, integrate and evaluate appropriate assessment tools as part of the learning process.
10. Develop assessment linked to student learning outcomes.
11. Understand and use assessment for improvement of teaching and learning.

COURSE CONTENT
UNIT- I Overview concept of assessment
1. Concept and purpose of assessment
2. Distinction between terms-
a) Assessment for learning
b) Assessment as learning
c) Assessment of learning
3. principles of assessment for learning
4. Critical review of current evaluation practices and their assumption about learning and development.

UNIT- II Assessment of Subject based learning

1. Enlarging notions of subject based learning in a constructivist perspective.
2. Assessment tools
a) Kinds of task : project, assignments & performance
b) Observation of learning process by-

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 160 -

 c) Self
d) Peers
e) Teachers
f) Self and peer assessment
3. Assessment technique: Oral, Practical test, CAA(Computer Aided Assessment), Test, Exercise,
Portfolio, Assignment, MCQ, Short Answer, Notes, Summary, Observing, interviewing and writing
comprehensive profile of a student.
UNIT- III Context of assessment and evaluation
1. Context of assessment: subject related, person related.
2. Steps in pedagogical analysis of content matter.
3. Preparation of test items, development of blue print.
4. Checking of answer script: subjective and objective.
5. Classification of assessment based on-
a) Purpose: prognostic, diagnostic, formative, summative
b) Scope: teacher made, standardized

UNIT- IV reforms in Assessment and Feedback

1. Importance and use of educational statistics.
2. Statistical tools-frequency distribution, normal distribution, graphical representation, percentile,
central tendency, deviation, rank difference and product moment coefficient of correlation and their
interpretation.

UNIT V Reforms in assessment for learning

1. Critical analysis of prevalent practices of assessment.
2. Innovation in assessment practices.
3. Meaning and purpose of feed back in teaching learning process.
4. Types of teacher feedback (written, comments, oral, peer feed back)
5. Reporting on a learner profile in consolidated form.
6. Use of assessment for feedback and taking pedagogic decision.

SESSIONAL WORK
(Any two of following)
1. A critical analysis of a question paper in any subject of RBSE/CBSE.
2. Prepare a diagnostic test and remedial programme of any subject at secondary level.
3. Organize a group activity (like: competition, story telling, reading, writing), evolve criteria for
assessing the activity and present an assessment report of the activity.
4. School visits followed by presentation of a report on evaluation practices in school.
5. Construction, administration and interpretation of self made achievement test.

REFERENCES

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 161 -

 A.J. (2001). Educatuinal Assessment for Student (3rd Ed.) Upper Saddle River , NJ: Prentice Hall.
 Agarwal, Y.P.,(1990) Statistical Method: Concept, Application and Computation, Sterling Publisher
Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi.
 Angelo, Thomas A. and Patricia Cross. (1993). Classroom Assessment Techniques: A Handbook for
College Teachers. (2nd edition). San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.
 Banta, Trudy W. et al. (1996) Assessment in Practice: Putting Principles to Work on
CollegeCampuses. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.
 Battersby, Mark. (1999) “So What is a Learning Outcome Anyway?” Vancouver, B.C.: Learning
Outcomes Network; Centre for Curriculum, Transfer and Technology.
 Becker, H.J., & Reil, M.M. (2000), Teacher professional engagement and constructivist compatible
computer use (Report No. 7). Irvine, CA: Center for Research on information Technology and
organization.
 Black, P. & Wiliam, D (1998). Assessment and Classroom Learning. Assessment in Education 5(1)
pp. 7–71.
 Black, P., Harrison, C., Lee, C., Marshall, B. & Wiliam, D. (2003) Assessment for learning: putting it
into practice (Maidenhead, Open University Press).
 Black, P.J. & Wiliam, D. (1998) Inside the Black Box: Raising standards through classroom
assessment. King‟s College, London.
 Bransford, J., Brown, A.L., & Cocking, R. R. (Eds.), (2000): How People Learn: Brain, Mind,
Experience and School, Washington, DC: National Academy Press.
 Burke, K. (2005), How to Assess the Authentic Learning(4 th Ed.) Thousand Oaks, CA: Corwin.
 Burke, K., Fogarty, R., & Belgrad, S (2002) : The Portfolio connection: Student Work Linked to
standard (2nd Ed.) Thousand Oaks, CA: Corwin.
 Carr, J.F., & Harris, D.E. (2001): Succeeding with standards: linking curriculum, assessment, and
action planning. Alexandria, V.A.: Association for Supervision and Curriculum Development.
 Chouhan, S.S., (1990): Innovation in Teaching Learning Process, Vikas Publication, New Delhi.
15. Cooper, Damian. (2006). Talk About Assessment: Strategies and Tools to Improve Learning.
Toronto, ON: Thomson Nelson. Government of British Columbia [7]
 Danielson, C. (2002). Enhancing student Achievement: Framework for school improvement.
 Ecclestone, Kathryn (2010). Transforming formative assessment in life long learning. McGraw Hill.
Eng.
 Gentile, J.R. & Lalley, J.P. (2003) :Standards and Mastery Learning :Aligning teaching and
assessment so all children can learn. Thousand Oaks, CA: Corwin.
 Goodman, J. (2012). Improving progress through AfL. Dr Joanna Goodman reflects on the role and
application of Assessment for Learning. SecEd, 304:13.
 Grasha, Tony. (1996) Teaching with Style: A Practical Guide to Enhancing Learning by
Understanding Teaching and Learning Styles. Pittsburgh, PA: Alliance Publishers.
 Guskey, T.R., & Bailey, J.M. (2001). Developing Grading and reporting system for student learning.
Thousand Oaks, CA: Corwin.
22. Manitoba Education, Citizenship, and Youth. (2006) Rethinking Assessment with Purpose in Mind:
assessment for learning, assessment as learning, assessment of learning Winnipeg, Manitoba, Canada:
MECY [8]
 Natrajan, V. and Kulshreshta, S.P. (1983). Assessment non- Scholastic Aspects –Learner Behaviour,
New Delhi: Association of Indian University .
 NCERT (1985),. Curriculum and Evaluation, New Delhi,: NCERT Newman, F.M. (1996). Authentic
Achievement: Restructuring School for Intellectual quality. San Francisco, CA: Jossey- Bass. Nitko.
 Norris N.(1990) Understanding Educational Evaluation, Kogan Page Ltd. Singh H.S. (1974) Modern
Educational Testing. New Delhi: Sterling Publication.
 Paul, Black (2012). Assessment for Learning, McGraw Hill.
 Savery, J. and Duffy , Thomas M.(1995) Problem based learning: An Instructional Model and its
constructivist framework. Educational Technology, 35, 31-38, 21.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 162 -

 Singh, H.S.(1974). Modern Educational Testing, New Delhi : Sterling Publication.
 Stiehl, Ruth. (2000) The Outcomes Primer: Reconstructing the College Curriculum. Corvallis, OR:
The Learning Organization.
 Stiggins, Richard J. Opening Doors to Excellence in Assessment, A Guide for Using
QualityAssessment to Promote Effective Instruction and Student Success, Assessment Training
Institute, Inc. Portland, OR: July 1996.
 Throndike, R.L. and Hagan (1977). Measurement and Evaluation in Psychology and Education.
 Verma Ramesh, Suresh K. Sharma (1990) : Modern Trends in Teaching Technology, Anmol
Publication Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi.
 Wiggins, Grant. (1998). Educative Assessment: Designing Assessments to Inform and Improve
Student Performance. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.
Websites link
 http://www.aahe.org/assessment/assess_links.htm
A hefty site updated by the American Association of Higher Education. Has many links to assessment articles,
sites and listserves.
 http://www.duq.edu/~tomei/tomei/advancedsites.html
Another hefty site that includes many links to articles and sites on assessment, Bloom’s taxonomy, learning
styles, etc.
 http://www.snow.utoronto.ca/Learn2/introll.html
Learning to Learn, a thinking and learning skills site, is for learners, teachers, and researchers to learn about
the value of self-awareness as a critical part of learning. It was created for educators developing their
assessment and instructional design skills.
 http://www.ldcommunity.org/thesystem.html
Learning Disabilities Resource Community (LDRC) site that focuses on teaching and assessment including the
Intelligent Tutoring and Assessment System that plans to focus on the navigational tools available to users,
including perceptual modes.
 http://www.sbctc.ctc.edu/Board/Educ/Outcomes/outcom_wag.htm
Washington State Assessment Newsletter
 http://www.wwu.edu/~assess/airlinks.htm
A site generated by Western Washington University that includes resources, articles and
 links to assessment sites.
 http://trgmcber.haygroup.com/Products/learning/lsius.htm
An online version of David Kolb’s Learning-Style Inventory. Material is not printable, but one can opt to pay for
it, take it online or order copies for class use.
 http://www.keirsey.com/
Links to Meyers Briggs information sites
 http://pss.uvm.edu/pss162/learning_styles.html
 http://www.hcc.hawaii.edu/intranet/committees/FacDevCom/guidebk/teachtip/
 http//www. snow.utoronto.ca/Learn 2/mod3/ tchstyle.html for a Multiple Intelligence
Inventory, Thinking Styles Inventory, Teaching Styles Inventory, Learning Styles Inventories and Tests on the
Web, and Learning Styles Links.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 163 -

 PAPER CODE-9226
Course 16 - EDUCATIONAL MANAGEMENT AND CREATING
INCLUSIVE SCHOOL
Objectives: After completing the course the student Teachers will be able to -
1. Develop understanding about concept and importance of Educational Management
2. Understand the educational Management structure at different levels.
3. Understand the role of Heads and Teachers in School Management.
4. Understand the importance of Management of different resources in school system
5. Develop an institutional plan for a secondary school
6. Understand the characteristics of inclusive school and appreciate diversity
7. Develop skills and practices for creating inclusive school so as to address the special needs of
children with different backgrounds.
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT-1 Introduction to Educational Management
1. Concept, need, Functions & recent trends in Education Management
2. Characteristics of Effective Educational Management.
3. Management structure of education in India at different levels – Centre, State and Local.
4. Educational Management in the state of Rajasthan with special reference to School Education.

UNIT-2 Management of Resources

1. Leadership role of Principal – Characteristics & skills. Role in building the climate of a school.
2. Material resource Management.
3. Human Resource Management – Recruitment, Orientation and Professional development of Teachers.
4. Financial Management –Budgeting, Monitoring and Auditing.
5. School community Symbioses – Utilization of Community resources for school development, role of
PTA and SMC.
6. Managing school supervision- Concept, need, principles, scope and techniques of supervision.

UNIT-3 Management of School Activities

1. Time Management – School Calendar, preparation of time table – concept, principles, types
2. Curricular & Co curricular activities- Their importance, Principles, planning and effective
organization.
3. Institutional Planning, Concept, Areas and Steps

UNIT-4 Inclusive Education:

1. Meaning, Need and Importance of inclusive education

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 164 -

2. Historical overview of education of children with disabilities – from welfare to right
3. Policies related to inclusive education
4. Barriors of Learning and Participation
5. Challenges in Inclusive Education.

UNIT-5 Creating inclusive School

1. Characteristics of inclusive school
2. Understanding student needs.
3. Inclusive Practices – Collaboration, Team work peer strategies and innovative instructional practices.
4. Role of Teacher in inclusive education
5. Role of Principal in managing inclusive schools.
6. Role of Government for promoting inclusive education.

SESSIONAL WORK
(One from each of the following two sections)
Section -A
1. Study of an institutional plan of a school
2. A critical study of a secondary school time-table
3. Study the management of co-curricular activities of a school.
4. Study the leadership role of Headmaster of a Secondary School.
Section -B
1. Case-study of an inclusive school.
2. Case study of an individual with disability.
3. Study of inclusive practices of a secondary school.
REFERENCES
1. Agrawal, J.C. (2010) Shiksha Vyavastha Ka Adhar Tatha Prabandhan, Agra, Agrawal Publications.
2. Allen, L.A. (1995) – Management and Organization, McGraw-Hill Auckland.
3. Baquer, A & Sharma, A. (1997) Disability: Challenges VS Responses: CAN, New Delhi.
4. Bhatnagar, Suresh (1996), Shaikshik Prabandh Avam Shiksha Ki Samasyaye, Meerut, Surya
Publication.
5. Dave, Amritlal Avam Anya (2015), Bharat Me Shaikshik Vyavastha Avam Vidyalaya Prabandh,
Meerut, R. Lall Book Depot.
6. Farrell, M. (2004) Special Educational Needs: A Resources for Practitioners, New Delhi, Sage
Publications.
7. Hearty, S. & Alur, M. (eds.) (2002) Education and Children with Special Needs: From Segregation to
Inclusion. New Delhi, Sage Publications.
8. Jaswant Singh (1959), How to be successful the school Headmaster, Jalandhar, University Publishers.
9. Khan, M.S. (1996) – Educational Administration, ES-362, Block-4, New Delhi.
10. Kochar, S.K. (1970, Secondary School Administration, New Delhi, Sterling Publishers.
11. Kochhar, S.K. (1994) – Secondary School Administation, Sterling Publishers, New Delhi.
12. Mahajan, Baldev (1996), Educational Administration in Rajasthan, New Delhi, Vikas Publishing
House (Private) Limited.
13. Mohanty, J. (2000) – School Management, Administration and Supervision, Deep and Deep, New
Delhi.
14. Mohi-u-ddin, M.S. (1962) School Organization and Management, Baroda, Acharya Book Depot.
15. Mukerji, S.N. (1963), Secondary School Administrating, Baroda, Acharya Book Depot.
16. Mukherji, S.N. (1962), Administration of Education in India, Baroda, Acharya Book Depot.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 165 -

17. NCERT (2000) Assessment of Needs for Inclusive Education: Report of the First Regional Workshop
for SAARC Countries, NCERT, New Delhi, India.
18. Puri, M. & Abraham, G. (eds.) (2004) Handbook of Inclusive Education for Educators,
Administrators, and Planners, New Delhi, Sage.
19. Reynolds, C.R. and Janzen, F.E. (eds.) Encyclopedia of Special Education: A reference for the
Education of the Handicapped and other Exceptional Children and Adults, Vol. No. 2 ed. USA, John
Willey and Sons, Inc.
20. Safaya, R.N. (2006), Modern School Administatoin and Organziation, New Delhi, Dhanpat Rai
Publishing (Pvt.) Limited.
21. Sidhu, K.S. (1992) – School Organization and Administration Sterling Publisher, New Delhi.
22. The persons with Disabilities (Equal Opportunities, Protection of Rights and Full Participation Act
(1995) Ministry of Law, Justice and Company Affairs (Legislative Department)

PAPER CODE-9227
Course 17 - UNDERSTANDING THE SELF
Objectives: After completion of the course, the pupil teachers will be able to:
1. Understand the development of self as a person and as a teacher.
2. Develop sensibilities, dispositions and skills to facilitate personal growth of their students in the
classroom.
3. Know the development of self concept and the professional identity.
4. Develop social relational sensitivity.
5. Build resilience within to deal with conflicts.
6. Analyse self identity (one‟s implicit beliefs, stereotypes and prejudices resulting from gender, culture,
assets and limitations of oneself).
7. Become aware of the impact of political, historical, and social forces on their identity formation.
8. Learn and practice effective communication skills.
9. Understand the philosophy of yoga.
10. Practice Yoga to enhance abilities of body and mind.
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT 1: Exploration Into Self
1. Meaning and Nature of Self and Self Concept. Role of Home, Neighbourhood, Community, Peer
Group, School in their development. Importance of Building social Relations.
(a) Pupil teachers are required to explore their own self, self concept and self esteem by
administering tests of self efficacy, Self concept, self esteem and self identity under the
supervision of facilitators and prepare their personality profile.
(b) Pupil Teachers will be required to administer above tests to five school students and prepare
student profile. On the basis of this profile they are required to prepare a teaching strategy to
enrich self concept, classroom learning and enhance achievement of students
Note: Records of the above to be submitted for evaluation

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 166 -

2. Self Esteem and Self Identity: Meaning and Nature; Development process: parenting practices, role of
caste class, gender, age, religion, school, role models in the development of self esteem and self
identity. Development of Teachers Personality: role of social, cultural, Political, academic,
Psychological and organisational factors.
Pupil teachers are required to:
(a) Write down biographies of the best teachers they have come across
(b) Interview Successful teachers, professionals, businessmen and prepare a report of their interview.
(c) Collect success stories of high achievers in the field of academics/ sports / athletes/ actors and
analyse them to identify their unique personality factors contributing to their success.
(d) Identify their own best contribution as a teacher, identify challenging situations they have come
across during class room teaching.
Note : Reports of the above will be presented and discussed in the group situation and to be
submitted for evaluation.

3. Motivation: Meaning and importance of achievement motivation for achieving excellence.

Importance of Goal Determination and Goal Achievement. Achieving self actualisation in teaching
Profession.
(Mode: Workshop in Small Groups)
Identify influences of motives in his/her achievement in schools, college/jobs/personal relations. Pupil
teachers will reflect on their own contribution to enrichment of their family, society and peer group.
UNIT – II Communication
meaning, nature, types; factors Influencing communication: psychological, social, organisational. Mass
Communication: its impact on personality development and classroom learning. Effective listening and
its role in the classroom, Characteristics of effective communication (body language, listening behaviour,
responding strategies), Mastering Effective Communication.
Workshop of Pupil Teachers to restructure personality through:
(a) analysis of one‟s strengths and weaknesses, beliefs, prejudices, time management, life goals,
professional commitment.
(b) Developing effective listening and observation skills.
Student teachers are required to develop in the workshop their personal strategies to enrich inner self
as a teacher and stipulate its impact on their students.

UNIT – III Philosophy and use of Yoga

Philosophy of Yoga and its role in well being, use of yoga in different contexts; importance of
meditation; contribution to development of self.
(a) Practice of Yoga Exercises and Meditation

SESSIONAL WORK

1. Reports of the practicums of the above units.

NOTE: In this paper there will be no external examination. Internally college will conduct a
written examination carrying a weightage of 10 marks and a practical examination carrying a
weightage of 20 marks, Viva Voce carrying a weightage of 10 marks and 10 marks will be
awarded for sessional work.

College will conduct Internally

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 167 -

 Total Marks: 50 Internal
Assessments: 50

Written examination 10 Marks

Practical examination 20 Marks

Viva Voce 10 Marks

PRACTICUM/SESSIONAL WORK 10 Marks

REFERENCES

1. Besant, A.(2005) An Introduction to Yoga. Cosmo. New Delhi.

2. Bhatnagar, Nitin (2012) Effective Communication and soft Skills. Pearson Education India
3. Covey, Stephen R.(2008) The Leader IN ME. Free Press. New York
4. 4. Craver,C.S & Scheier, M.F (1992) Perspective on Personality.(Second edit.) Alyn & Bacon.
Boston.
5. Eriikson, E.H. (1963) Childhood and Society.(Second Edit.)Norton. New York
6. Gilmer,B.Von Haller (1970)Psychology. Harper and Row Publishers, New York, Chapter 9
7. Harishchander Shrivastav, Diwvedi,K (1975) Samaj Manovigyan .Uttar Pradesh Hindi Sansthan,
Lukhnow
8. Kamla Ganesh & Usha Thakkar(edit.) (2005).Culture and Making of Identity in India. Sage
Publications, New Delhi
9. Khera, shiv(2005) YOU CAN WIN. Chapters 6&7. Macmillan India Ltd. New delhi.
10. Louis L.Hay (1994) The Power is Within You. Hay House, Inc.
11. Norman Vincent.You Can If You Think You Can. Prentice Hall In. London
12. Pathak,Avijit(2002) Social Implications of Schooling, Rainbow publishers ,Delhi
13. Rao,P.V.K.(1995). Scientific and Psychological Significance of Yoga.Department of Education,
BHU. Banaras.
14. Saraswati,T.S.(1999)Culture Socialisation and Human Development.Theory:Research and
Applications in India.Sage Publications, New Delhi
15. Santrock,K.G.(2007)Child Development(11th Ed).McGrawHill,New York
16. Success Stories A Reader‟s Digest Selection.RDIPrint and Publication PVT LTD ,Mumbai
17. Woolfolk,A.(2007)Educational Psychology (10ThEd).Allyn & Bacon ,Boston
18. Yadav, Y.P & yadav, R.(2003). Art of Yoga. New Delhi: Friends

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 168 -

 PAPER CODE-9228
Course 18 - OPTIONAL COURSE
1. VOCATIONAL / WORK EDUCATION
Objectives: After completion of the course the student teacher will be able to develop:-
1. Respect, and regard for manual work and dignity of labor.
2. Socially desirable values such as self reliance, Sahyog, team work, tolerance.
3. Work habits and values such as regularity, punctuality, discipline, honesty.
4. Self esteem and confidence through achievement in productive work and services.
5. a deeper concern for environment and a sense of belonging, responsibility and commitment to the
society.
6. awareness of socio-economic problems of the society
7. Manual work and vocational skills.
8. Appreciation for manual productive work.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT –I Work Education
1. Concept, need and objectives of Work Education according to Gandhian thoughts.
2. Historical Perspective and current initiatives of Work Education with special reference to National
and international documents such as Policy of National Education Conference (-Wardha, 1937), Zakir
Hussain Committee Report,1938, Acharya Narendra Dev Committee Report on Primary and
Secondary Education, Secondary Education Commission (1952-53), Education Commission (1964-
66), National Policy of Education(1986), National Knowledge Commission, NCF-2005 Position
paper on Work and Education, CBSE- Work Education in schools, National Policy on skill
development, UNESCO International Commission On Education.
3. Correlation–Concepts, Types, Characteristics, Integrating Work education in classroom activities,
Relation between Work and Knowledge.

UNIT- II Vocational Education

1. Concept, need and objectives of Vocational Education.
2. Historical Perspective and current initiatives of Vocational Education with special reference to
National and International documents such as Policy of National Education Conference (-Wardha,

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 169 -

 1937), Zakir Hussain Committee Report,1938, Acharya Narendra Dev Committee Report on Primary
and Secondary Education, Secondary Education Commission (1952-53), Education Commission
(1964-66), National Policy of Education(1986), National Knowledge Commission, NCF-2005 Position
paper on Work and Education, CBSE- Work Education in schools, National Policy on Skill
Development, UNESCO International Commission on Education.

UNIT-III Planning For Work and Vocational Education

1. Planning of Work and Vocational Education Activities-Meaning and types (Annual, Half yearly,
Quarterly, Monthly and Weekly.)
2. Exploring and identifying local resources for work and vocation, Steps of the planning (Objective,
resources, activity, experience, progress, evaluation and reporting.)
3. Difference between Work and Vocational Education and its need in society
Suggested Work activities- (Any Two)
Cleaning the campus; Agriculture; Gardening; Campus beautification and making the environment
eco-friendly; Crafts (Food Processing, Wood work, Paper articles); Book binding; Tie-n-dye;
Tailoring; Suggested Vocational activities- (Any Two)
Computer hardware repairing,
a) Domestic equipment repairing,
b) Electrical wiring and repairing,
c) Organic farming.

SESSIONAL WORK
Apart from the above suggestive activities other activities may be conducted depending upon the
availability of local resources.
REFERENCES

1) Aachraya Narendra Deo Committee Report on Primary and Secondary Education.

2) Bhatia, H C :Craft in Education
3) Buniyadi Shikshan – Shayam Sunder Sankhyadhar
4) Buniyadi Shiksha-(Sidhanth & manovigyan) Hanuman Shing Vardiya & Laxminarayan Joshi.
5) CBSE Work Education in Schools, 2004
6) Handbook for Basic School Teachers. (Ministry of Education, Government of India.)
7) MHRD 1990, Towards an Enlightened Human Society, New Delhi: Department of Education.
8) Nagda,B.L.2008,Career Chune,Ankur Prakashan,Udaipur
9) National Policy on Education (1986), Govt. of India, Ministry of Human Resource Development.
New Delhi.
10) National Council of Teacher Education, 1998, Gandhi on Education, New Delhi: NCTE.
11) NCERT, 1964-66, Educational and National Development: Report of the Education Commission,
New Delhi,
12) Report of the Zakir Hussain Committee of Basic National Education.
13) Rob, M.K.: Hasthakala Parichaya (Hindi) Allahbad, (Kitab Mahal)
14) Rybrun -Creative Education.
15) Strang, Ruth: 1933 The role of Teacher in Personnel Work, New York, Teachers College, Columbia
University.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 170 -

16) Super Donald: 1947 Appraising Vocational Fitness, New York, Harper and Brothers.
17) The Report of Secondary Education 1952-53. Govt. of India, Ministry f Education.
18) Varkey: The Wardha Scheme of Education.

PAPER CODE-9228

Course 18 - OPTIONAL COURSE

2. HEALTH AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION
Objectives: On completion of the course the student teacher will be able to:

1. Develop Physical fitness.

2. Understand the concept, aims & objectives of Health & physical education.
3. Understand various communicable diseases
4. Understand and practice good posture, Balance diet, first aid
5. Understand the characteristics of hygienic environment along with contributing factors and its
importance.
6. Understand the rules & regulations and develop skill of organizing different physical education
activities.
7. Develop competencies in games & athletic events
8. Conduct tournaments, competitions & Athletic Meets.

COURSE CONTENTS
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 171 -
UNIT-I Health Education
1. Meaning, Concept, Aims & Objectives, School Health Programme. Nutrition & Balanced Diet
Components of balanced diet, major sources & mal nutrition.
2. Posture Concept & values Postural deformities and their management.
3. Communicable diseases Mode, Control & Prevention Physical fitness & first aid Physical fitness
meaning, elements & importance. First aid in the following- Wounds, cuts, Hammaerage, dislocation,
fracture, bites of insects, sprain & strain.

UNIT-II Physical Education

1. Concept, definition, aims, objectives and importance. Its place in school programme. A suggestive
physical education programme in an Indian school

UNIT-III Management & organization of different physical education activities.

1. Rules of important major games and sports. Methods of marking a standard track (400 m), Connected
areas & their rules.
2. Organization, Management & administration of tournaments, intramurals, play day, health day, play
centers and other similar activities. Organizing Indigenous games like Kho-Kho, Kabbadi,
Malkham etc.Indian street games-Satoliya, Gilli–Danda, and Rumal Jhapatta etc.
3. Officiating, Coaching, fundamental skills & ground marking of any two major games.

SESSIONAL WORK

Any one of the following:

1. Organize games / sports / health activities during OAS/SUPW Camp

2. Conduct awareness programme on issue of social health
3. Prepare an exhibition / awareness rally/poster competition on health awareness in nearby schools.
4. Organize a programme on health & hygiene.
5. Organize intramurals.

REFERENCES

1. Educational Dimensions of Physical Education- V.KRISHANA MURTHY AND N.

PRAMESHWARA RAM: Sterling Publishers Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
2. Rules of Games and sports – YMCA PUBLISHING HOUSE, Jai Singh Road, New Delhi-1
3. Physical Education and Health- Dr. A.K. Uppal, Dr. G.P. Gautam, Friends Publications, New Delhi.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 172 -

4. Physical activities for Secondary School (T.IP.E. Kandivali Bombay-Sub).
5. Syllabus of Exercise for Primary and Middle Schools, Education Department, Govt. of Rajasthan.
6. Loyal : Sharirik Shiksha (Shakuntala Prakashan, Lucknow)
7. Health Education & Physical Education(2003) – Krishna Puri & Dr. Soti Shivendra Chandra, Surjeet
Publication; 7-K Kolhapur Road, Kamla Nagar, Delhi-110007.
8. Health Education and Physical Education Teaching, Dr. Veena Sharma & Onkar Singh Tyagi,
Arihant Shiksha Prkashan 50, Pratap Nagar-II, Tonk Phatak, Jaipur.

PAPER CODE-9228
Course 18 - OPTIONAL COURSE
3. PEACE EDUCATION

Objectives: On completion of this course the student will be able to-

1. Explain about peace and peace education, their relevance and connection to inner harmony as well as
harmony in social relationships.
2. Understand the views of different philosophies about peace.
3. Understand importance of Peace and factors responsible for disturbing peace.
4. Understand and resolve conflicts within self and in society.
5. Use pedagogical skills and strategies in and out of classroom for promoting peace.

COURSE CONTENT
UNIT-I Understanding peace as a dynamic Social reality
1. Concept, Need and importance of peace education.
2. Peace values vis-a-vis constitutional values : Importance of the attitudes, beliefs and values of peace
viz compassion, cooperation, love etc. that foster inner peace and constitutional values of justice,
equality, freedom, respect for differences and ecological resources that ensure peace in society.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 173 -

3. Challenges to peace by increasing stresses, conflicts crimes, terrorism, violence and wars resulting in
poor equality of life.
4. Nature and causes of conflicts.
5. Conflicts at different levels in society: With himself, interpersonal, intrapersonal, organizational, inter
state and global.
6. Role of Social and Ecological condition and processes that sustain conflict: limited resources,
poverty, political interest, economic interest, socio-cultural and ecological conditions, environmental
resources viz. water, mineral, forests, energy etc.

UNIT-II Role of various thinkers and agencies in promoting peace

1. Concept of Peace according to the following thinkers - Gandhi, Krishnamurthy, Aurbindo,
Vivekananda, Rabindranath Tagore, Gijubhai Badheko, Mother Terasa initiatives at National and
International levels.
2. Agencies contributing to peace – UNESCO, Gandhi Peace Foundation etc.
UNIT-III Empowerment of Self
Awareness of the influence of Social milieu on self
1. Understanding adequate self as a product of positive experiences of caring, warmth and appreciation in
the family, school, neighborhood, etc. which promote healthy discipline, shunning violence.
1. Negative experiences generate stress, anger, aggressor
2. Yoga, meditation, anger/stress management, as practices that restore positive physical healthy and
attitudes.
3. Role of different subjects in inculcation of PEACE.
4. Suggested Activities in schools for promoting peace.
a. Celebration of Festivals of different religions/ important days
b. Exposure to personalities working or fostering peace in society.
c. Practice of Yoga & Meditation.
d. Peace Rallies
5. Intervention in resolution of societal conflicts.

SESSIONAL WORK

Any one of the following:-

1. Visits to organizations connected with peace and inter cultural harmony and aesthetic appreciation to
experience peace as reality submission of reports on experiences.
2. Analysis of morning assembly programme of a school from the point of peace.
3. Preparation of a report on school programmes for promoting to Peace.
4. Case study of a child suffering from bad habit.
5. Developing an action plan for Peace in school and local community.

REFERENCE

Balasovriya, A.S. (1994) Teaching Pace to Children, National Institute of Education Maharagama, Sri
Lanka.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 174 -

Balasovriya, A.S. (2000) World Peace through School National Institute of Education, Maharagama.
Canfeid, Jack (1975) 101 Ways to enhance self concept in the classroom, Prentice Hall, Engle Cliffs.
Fountain, Suan (1988) Learning together – Global education, Stanley Thrones Publishers, Ltd. York
University.
Graham and David Seiby (1993) Global Teacher – Global learner, Hodder and Stoughton Ltd., London.
Kreidler Willam, I, (1991) Creative Conflict Resolution more than 200 activities for keeping pace in the
classroom, Foreman, Scott, Glenview.
Learning the way of Peace, A Teachers Guide to Peace Education (2001) United Nations Educational
Scientific and Cultural Organization, New Delhi.

PAPER CODE-9228
Course 18 - OPTIONAL COURSE
4. GUIDANCE AND COUNSELLING
Objectives: On completion of this course the student will be able to:-
1. Understand the meaning, nature and scope of guidance.
2. Understand various types of guidance.
3. Develop skills in administrating and interpreting testing and non testing tools of data collection.
4. Know and use the information and methods of guidance programme of special learners.
5. Understand with the meaning, nature and techniques of counselling.
6. Develop/learn the skills to organize guidance programme in the secondary schools.

COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT-1 Introduction to Guidance and Counselling
1. Meaning, Purpose, Scope, Nature and Functions of Guidance.
2. Need of Guidance at various stages
3. Principles of Guidance
4. Types of Guidance: Educational, Vocational and Personal guidance (Their Meaning, Objectives, needs
and Importance)
5. Guidance services: Need and Importance
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 175 -
6. Types of Guidance Service, Individual inventory service, Information Service, Counselling Service,
Follow up service.

UNIT-2 Guidance Programme, Services and Procedures

1. Individual and group procedure of guidance and counselling.
2. Characteristic of good guidance programme.
3. Group guidance Techniques, Class-talks, Career Talks, Career Conference, Group discussion, Career
exhibitions, Audio-Visuals Techniques.
4. Role of various community Agencies in school guidance progrmme.
5. Out line of minimum guidance programme at secondary on senior secondary level.
6. Meaning of Nature of Counselling and Role of Teachers as a Counsellor

UNIT-3 Guidance for special learner and Tools and Techniques

1. Concept of special learner Guidance needs of special learner
2. Guidance methods for
3. Special learner
4. Case study method
5. Remedial measures
6. Tools and Techniques
7. Types of tools
8. Standardized and self made tools
9. Techniques; Interview; Observation; Rating Scale & Check List
10. Sources of Collecting data
11. Cumulative record card
12. Anecdotal record card
13. Autobiography
SESSIONAL WORK
Any one of the following:-
1. Group Guidance – One career talk
2. Critical study of guidance programme in any senior secondary school.
3. Survey of Guidance needs of Adolescents
4. Celebration of Career day ensuring participation of all

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 176 -

 SUGGESTED READING
1. Aggrawal, J.C. (2004). Educational Vocational Guidance and Counselling, Delhi : Daaba House
2. Asch, M. (2000). Principles of Guidance and Counselling, New Delhi: Sarup and Sons
3. Bhatia K.K. (2002). Principles of Guidance and Counselling, Ludhiana: Kalyan Publishers.
4. fpÙkkSM+k 'kf'k] ¼2014½] funs'Z ku ,oa ijke'kZ] vxzoky izdk'ku] vkxjk
5. nos bUnq] QkVd vjfoUn & funs'Z u ds ewy rRo] jktLFkku fgUnh xzUFk vdkneh] t;iqj] 1982
6. Erickson, Clifford E: A Basic Text for Guidance workers, N.Y. Prenuce tiff Inc.
7. x.kirjk; 'kekZ] 'kSf{kd ,oa O;kolkf;d funs'Z ku
8. Gupta, V.K. (2004). Educational Guidance and Counselling. Ludhiana: Ankur Publications
9. tk;loky lhrkjke ¼1992½ f'k{kk esa funs'Z ku vkSj ijke'kZ vkxjk] fouksn iqLrd eafnj
10. Jones, J.A. (1970) : Principles of Guidance, Tata Mcgraw Hill, Bombay
11. Kocher, S.K. (2007). Educational Guidnace and Counselling, New Delhi: Sterling
12. Myres, (2005). Principles and Techniques of Vocational Guidance, New York: McGraw Hill
13. NCERT (2005) National Curriculum Frame work-2005, NCERT, New Delhi.
14. NCERT (2008). Assessment and Appraisal of Guidance-I, Module-VI, DEPFE, NCERT, New
Delhi.
15. NCERT (2008): Counselling Process and Strategies (Moule-2) New Delhi: NCERT
16. NCERT (2008). Guidance for human developments and Adjustment (Module-3). New Delhi:
NCERT
17. NCERT (2008). Introduction to Guidance (Module-1) New Delhi: NCERT
18. Pandey, K.P. (2000): Educational and Vocational Guidance in India, Vishila Vidyalaya Prakashan,
Varanasi
19. Robinson (2005). Principles and Procedures in Student Counselling, New York: Harper & Row
20. Sharma, R.A. (2008), Fundamentals of Guidance & Counseling, Meerut. R. Cell Book
21. Sidhi, H.S. (2005). Guidance and Counseling Patiala: Twenty First Centaury.
22. Strang, Ruth (1968): Counsellling Techniques in Colleges and Secondary Schools, Harper and
Row, New York
23. Taxler, A.E. (1964): Techniques of Guidance, McGraw Hill, New York.
24. oekZ] jkeiky flag] mik/;k; jk/kkoYyHk & 'kSf{kd ,oa O;kolkf;d funs'Z ku] fouksn iqLrd eafnj] vkxjk

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 177 -

 PAPER CODE-9228
Course 18- OPTIONAL COURSE
5. Innovations and Action Research
Objectives: - After completing the course the student teachers with be able to:
1. Understand the meaning, nature and process of innovation.
2. Understand the need and importance of innovations in education.
3. Appreciate comment innovations related to the field of education.
4. Develop skills in planning and conducting action research in school.
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT-1 Innovation
Meaning, Nature and process of innovation
Managing innovations in schools, major barriers in making schools innovative
Role of Principal and teachers in making school innovative
UNIT-2 Innovation and Experiments in Education
Need of innovations and experimentation in education
Current innovative practices and education SSA, RMSA, Open Education, Virtual education.
Innovations in teaching-learning-process – cooperative-learning, joyful learning, experiential learning,
web-based learning.
Innovations in evaluation – CCA, Peer evaluation, self-evaluation.
UNIT-3 Action Research
Concept, need and importance of action research
Process of action research
Data analysis, Tabulation, graphical interpretation, Reportuniting
Developing an action research plan in school context.

SESSIONAL WORK
Any one out of the following practicum
1. Study the details of any importance innovation in school.
2. Study the characteristics of an innovation in school / institution.
3. Study the implementation programme CCA of in a school.
4. Prepare an action research plan related to any problem of school.
REFERENCES
1. Nagda,B.L. (2007) : Shiksha Ke Nutan ayam,Ankur Prakashan,Udaipur
2. Mukhopadhyay, M. (2001) : Total Quality Managment in Education, NIEPA, New Delhi.
3. Mukhopadhyay M. (2004) : Leadership for Institute Building in Education' Society for
Educational Research and Development 49, Harinagar, Gotmi Road, Vadudara.
4. Dewal, O.S., Phatak, A.B., : A Handbook on Educational Research (1999), Sharma, M.P.
& Dani D.N. NCTE, New Delhi.
5. Richard A. Schmuck, (2006) : Practial Action Research for Change, Corwin Press
California.
6. Vyas, J.C., (1999) : Kniyanusandhan Sampratyay or Prakriya, Shreyas Sandhan
Prakashan, Udaipur.
7. Pande, K.P., Amita : Shiksha me Kriyatmak Anusandhan, Vinod Pustak Mandir,
Agra.
8. Dhondiyal, S., Patak, A.B., (2003): Shekshik Anusandhan Ka Vidhishastra, Rajasthan Hindi
Granth Akadmi, Jaipur.
9. Best, John. V., (2012) : Resarch in Education, PHI Limited, Delhi.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 178 -

 PAPER CODE-9229
Course 19 - INTERNSHIP PROGRAMME (School Internship Phase-II)
School Internship is designed to lead to the development of broad repertoire of perspectives, professional
capacities, teacher dispositions, sensibilities and skills. During the internship, a student-teacher shall
work as a regular teacher and participate in all the school activities, including planning, teaching and
assessment, interacting with school teachers, community members and children.

Objectives: After completion of the Internship the student - teachers will be able to –
1. Develop the understanding of the school and its management.
2. Develop the ability to plan and manage the class-room teaching.
3. Develop the sensibility towards diverse needs of learners in school.
4. Develop ability to discharge various responsibilities expected from a teacher.
5. Organize and conduct the co- curricular activities.
6. Get acquainted with various school records maintained by the school.
7. Maintain records expected from a teacher.
8. Develop skills of conducting community contact programmes.
9. Get acquainted with the functioning of SMC.

As per the School Internship: Framework and Guidelines (Jan., 2016) of the NCTE
Regulations, 2014, following revised plan of the School Internship is proposed for the
consideration of the committee.

Execution of the Internship Programme (II Year) (16 Weeks)

(2 Weeks) (14 Weeks)

Community School
Engagement Engagement

Group Activities  Teaching in school (Record of date & period

related to community wise teaching plan to be maintained for it)
services  School Based Individual Activities and File
Record
 School Based Group Activities and File
Record
 Teaching Aids (4)

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 179 -

During the 14 weeks period of internship in schools, the student-teachers will perform the
under mentioned tasks:-
1) Interact with Headmaster and mentor teachers of the school about the two teaching
Subjects he/she has offered.
2) They will teach at least 3-4 periods per day (Minimum of 200 lessons).
3) They will have to discharge the duties of a class- teacher of any class.
4) They will have to participate in the following activities individually as well as in group.
The suggested individual and the group activities are as follows:-

A) Individual Activity
1. Preparation of time table of the school other than that in force.
2. Maintaining students‟ attendance and preparing a monthly record of students‟
attendance.
3. Maintaining Teacher‟s diary.
4. Case study of a special child.
5. A critical study and report of Institutional plan of the school.
6. Preparation of a progress report of a student of the class of which he /she is the
Class teacher.
7. Analysis of school syllabus and textbooks of their pedagogy subjects.
8. Undertaking of Action Research Project on at least one problem area of Schooling.

B) Group Activity
1. Organising Morning Assembly
2. Organising Literary and Cultural Activities
3. Organising Games and Sports Activities
4. Participation in Parent‟s-Teacher Meeting and Meeting of School Management
Committee (SMC)
5. Observing and participating in Mid-day Meal Programme
6. Organising Science Club or other Club Activities
7. Maintaining discipline in the school.
8. Participating in Community Contact Programmes like- Rallies, awareness
Campaigns, community health campaigns, cleanliness campaigns and so on.

NOTE: - From group activities (1) to (7), each student- teacher has to participate in at
least 5 of the activities and activity no. (8) Is compulsory for all student-teachers

5) Study of various records maintained by the school (for instance, stock register, service
book, letter receipt & dispatch register, Library book accession & issue register, scholar
register, leave account, T.A. bill etc.)

NOTE: - Each student - teacher has to submit a file in which detailed reports of all the
activities and tasks observed and discharged by him/her are to be mentioned along with
reflective thinking. A viva- voce will be conducted after the internship programme. The
file record, the viva-voce and the lesson plan diary will form the basis of assessment of the
internship programme. The student-teachers performance shall be assessed jointly by the
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 180 -
TEI Principal and faculty (The grade recommended for a particular student by the
Principal and mentor teachers of internship school must also be considered.)

Evaluation for Internship Programme

Evaluation for internship programme will consist of two parts – Internal Evaluation &
External Evaluation, the details of which are as follows:

INTERNAL EVALUATION (Course-19)

[II Year]
Teaching in Schools (Record of date and period wise teaching plan to be
1 100
maintained for it.
2 Individual Activities and File Record 80
3 Group Activities and File Record 30
4 Teaching Aid (4) 20
5 Community Engagement and Report writing 20
Total Marks 250
EXTERNAL EVALUATION (Course -20)
[II Year]
Viva-Voce for Internship Programme (50 marks)
1. Written test based on internship (50 marks) 150
Power point presentation and documentation of internship (50 marks)
Total Marks 400

Note:-
1. The grand total for the internship programme of both the years is 550 marks (150+400)
2. The weightage of external evaluation (Viva-voce for II Year) of internship will be 150
marks.
3. During the viva- voce, student will present all the records of the work done during the
internship (II Year) programme viz. teaching in school, individual and group activities.
4. Power point presentation (including videos of various activities) of the work done by
the students during the second year of internship is desirable at the time of viva-voce.
The Board of examiners for Viva-voce will consist of:
a) The Principal of the college concerned.
b) One senior member of the college. (Preferably Internship Incharge)
c) Two external members appointed by the university.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 181 -

 PAPER CODE-9230
Course 20 - External Assessment

[II YEAR]

1. The weightage of external evaluation (Viva-voce for 2nd phase) of internship will be 150 marks.
2. During the Viva voce, student will present all the records of the work done during the internship (2 nd
phase) programme viz. teaching in school, individual and group activities.
3. Power point presentation (Including Videos of various activities) of the work done by the students
during the second phase of internship is desirable at the time of viva-voce.

EXTERNAL EVALUATION
[II Year]
Assessments

Viva-Voce for Internship Programme

Total Marks: 150

Written test based on internship 20 Marks

Presentation of work (Power point presentation and 40 Marks
documentation of internship)
Practical examination of Internship work 30 Marks

Group Discussion 20 Marks

Viva Voce 40 Marks

The Board of examiners for Viva-voce will consist of:

a) The Principal of the college concerned.
b) One senior member of the college. (Preferably Internship Incharge)
c) Two external members appointed by the university.

BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.Ed.), TWO- YEARS PROGRAMME - 182 -